Dokumentation KK 70 2 A Mach NR 177

MASCHINEN UND
ANLAGENBAU GMBH & CO KG.
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS DE SERVICE
ISTRUZIONI PER L’USO
INSTRUCCIONES DE MANEJO
TECHNISCHE DOKUMENTATION
TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION
========================================================================
MUFFENFORMANLAGE
AUTOMATIC SOCKET FORMING UNIT
KK 70 / 2 A
===============================================================
KUNDE Min Hung Plastics Co. Ltd.

CUSTOMER
Vietnam
MASCHINEN NR. 177

MACHINE NO.
AUFTRAG NR. 509849

ORDER NO.
ROHRDURCHMESSER 20-75 mm
PIPE DIAMETER
ROHRLÄNGEN 3000 - 6000 mm

PIPE LENGTHS
BETRIEBSSPANNUNG 3 x 400 V + N + PE / 50 HZ
OPERATING VOLTAGE
STEUERSPANNUNG 24 V / DC
CONTROL VOLTAGE
EXRTUSIONSHOEHE 1160 MM
EXTRUSIONS HEIGTH
BEDIENSEITE LINKS
OPERATING SIDE LEFT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 SICHERHEITSHINWEISE 1.0 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.1 VORBEMERKUNG 1.1 PREFACE
1.2 TECHNISCHE DATEN 1.2 TECHNICAL DATA
2.0 AUFBAU DER ANLAGE 2.0 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.1 AUFSTELLPLAN 2.1 LAY - OUT PLAN
2.2 ENERGIEANSCHLÜSSE 2.2 ENERGY CONNECTIONS
2.3 VORBEREITENDE ARBEITEN ZUR 2.3 STARTING UP OPERATIONS

INBETRIEBNAHME
3.0 ABLAUFDIAGRAMM 3.0 PROCESS CHART
4.0 SCHALT- UND REGELFUNKTIONEN 4.0 SWITCHING AND CONTROL
5.0 INBETRIEBNAHME 5.0 STARTING UP
5.1 AUSSERBETRIEBNAHME 5.1 STOPPING
5.2 EINRICHTEN 5.2 SETTING UP
5.3 AUTOMATIKABLAUF 5.3 AUTOMATIC PROCESS
5.4 UMRÜSTEN 5.4 RETOOLING
5.5 EINSTELLWERTE 5.5 SETTING VALUES
6.0 WARTUNG 6.0 MAINTENANCE
6.1 SCHMIERANWEISUNG 6.1 LUBRCATION DIRECTION
6.2 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG 6.2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

FREMDTEILE SUBSUPPLIED COMPONENTS
7.0 ELEKTROUNTERLAGEN 7.0 ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTATION
8.0 PNEUMATIKUNTERLAGEN 8.0 PNEUMATIC DOCUMENTATION
9.0 9.0
10.0 ERSATZTEILLISTEN 10.0 SPARE PART LISTS

ZEICHNUNGEN DRAWINGS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 SICHERHEITSHINWEISE 1.0 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

======================= =======================
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
Diese Maschine ist nach dem Stand der Technik gebaut und betriebssicher.
Es können von ihr jedoch Gefahren ausgehen, wenn sie von nicht ausgebildetem Perso-
nal unsachgemäß oder zu nicht bestimmungsgemäßem Gebrauch eingesetzt wird. Hier-
durch können
• Gefahren für Leib und Leben
• Gefahren für die Maschinen und weitere Vermögenswerte des Anwenders
• Gefahren für die effiziente Arbeit der Maschine drohen.
Jede Person, die mit der Aufstellung, Bedienung, Wartung und Reparatur der Maschine
befaßt ist, muß die Betriebsanleitung gelesen und verstanden haben. Dem Anwender ist
zu empfehlen, sich dies jeweils schriftlich bestätigen zu lassen.
Die Maschine darf nur von ausgebildeten und autorisierten Bedienern gefahren werden.
Die Zuständigkeiten bei der Bedienung der Maschine müssen klar festgelegt und ein-
gehalten werden, damit unter dem Aspekt der Sicherheit keine unklaren Kompetenzen
auftreten.
Bei allen Arbeiten, die die Aufstellung, den Betrieb, Umrüstungen, Anpassungen, War-
tungen und Reparatur betreffen, sind die in dieser Betriebsanleitung unter Punkt 3.3 an-
gegebenen Ausschaltprozeduren zu beachten.
Bitte beachten Sie als Betreiber der Maschine folgende Instruktionen:
• Es ist jede Arbeitsweise zu unterlassen, welche die Sicherheit an der Maschine beein-
trächtigt .
• Der Bediener hat dafür zu sorgen, daß keine nicht autorisierten Personen an der Ma-
schine arbeiten.
• Der Bediener ist verpflichtet, eingetretene Veränderungen an der Maschine, die die Si-
cherheit beeinträchtigen, sofort zu melden.
• Der Anwender ist verpflichtet, die Maschine immer nur in einwandfreiem Zustand zu
betreiben.
• Soweit erforderlich, hat der Anwender das Bedienungspersonal zum Tragen von
Schutzkleidung usw. zu verpflichten.
• Durch entsprechende Anweisungen und Kontrollen muß das Anwenderwerk Sauberkeit
und Übersichtlichkeit des Arbeitsplatzes an und um der Maschine gewährleisten.
• Es dürfen grundsätzlich keine Sicherheitseinrichtungen demontiert oder außer Betrieb
gesetzt werden.
• Bei Demontage von Sicherheitseinrichtungen während Umrüstung, Reparatur und War-
tung ist die Maschine genau nach Vorschrift außer Betrieb zu setzen. Unmittelbar nach
Abschluß der Umrüstung Wartungs- oder Reparaturarbeiten hat die Remontage der
Schutzeinrichtung zu erfolgen.
Auf folgende besondere Gefahren weisen wir hin:
Hochspannung: Beachten Sie die Vorschriften zum Anschließen, Erden und Abschalten
der Maschine. Bei Nichtbeachtung droht Lebensgefahr durch Starkstrom.
Gase: Bei Anwendung von verschiedenen Reinigungsmitteln droht Vergiftungs-, Explosi-
ons- und Verpuffungsgefahr. Benutzen Sie dieses Mittel nicht in der Nähe des Anwärm-
ofens.
Hydraulik, Pneumatik: Hydraulik- und Pneumatikkomponenten, die unter Druck stehen,
können bei Beschädigung Verletzungen, Explosionen und Brände verursachen.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This machine has been built to meet most recent technical and safety standards.
Dangers, however, may arise, when inadequately or for non-authorized purposes used by
non-trained people. In that case
• dangers for live and limb
• dangers for the machine and other properties of the user
• dangers for the efficient operation of the machine may arise.
Any person engaged in setting up, operation, maintaining and repairing the machine must
have read and understood the operating instructions. It is recommended to the user to ask
for written confirmation of this condition.
The machine shall only be run by trained and authorized operators.
Competences for operating the machine must be fixed clearly and met, in order to exclude
any cases of unclear competences under the safety aspect.
For any operation concerning setting up, operation, retooling, adaptations, maintenance
and repair must be abserved the respective stopping procedure described in these
operating instructions under Par. 3.3.
Please, observe as the user of the machine, following instructions:
• Avoid any mode of operation affecting the safety of the machine.
• The operator must make sure no non-authorized people are operating the machine.
• The operator is bound to notify immediately any changes on the machine concerning
the safety aspect.
• The user is bound to operate the machine always in proper condition.
• The user must, as far as necessary, engage the operating personnel to carry protecting
clothes.
• The user plant must ensure leanliness and clearness of the job place on and round the
machine by giving respekctive instructions and making controls.
• In no case can safety equipment be dismounted or set out of operation.
• When dismounting safety equipment during retooling, repair or maintenance, the
machine must be stopped exectly in conformity with available prescriptions.
Immediately after finishing the retooling, maintenance or repair work must the safety
equipment be reinstalled.
We point at following dangers:
High voltage: Please, observe the prescriptions for connecting, grounding and stopping
the machine. Non-observance will cause danger to live by high-voltage current.
Gases: When using different detergents, poisening, expolsion and deflagration hazards
will arise. Do not use such products in proximity to heating unit.
Hydraulics, Pneumatics: Hydraulic and pneumatic components under pressure may cause
demages, injuries, explosions and fire.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 VORBEMERKUNG 1.1 PREFACE

================ ===========
Diese technische Dokumentation wird This Technical Documentation is

Ihnen beim Kauf der Maschine ausge- handed to you on purchase of our
händigt. machine.
Sie ist für den Betrieb gedacht und It is intended for operation pur-
sollte dem technischen Personal, poses and should be accessible at
das die Maschine bedient und wartet all times to the technical per-
jederzeit zugänglich sein. sonnel who operates and services
the machine.
Für Schäden, die durch unsachgemäße Damage arising from improper

Behandlung entstehen, wird keine handling is excluded from the
Garantieleistung übernommen. guarantee.
In allen Fällen, in denen die Ur- In all cases where the cause of a
sache einer Störung nicht ermittelt malfunction cannot be determined
oder behoben werden kann, bitten or eliminated, please contact our
wir unseren Kundendienst in Anspruch service department.
zu nehmen.
Hier noch einmal unsere Anschrift: Our address is as follows:
SGGT Maschinen-und Anlagenbau GmbH & Co. KG

Bahnhofstraße 35
D-66564 Ottweiler
Tel. +49 - 6824 – 308 - 0

Fax +49 - 6824 – 308 - 143
Eine Ersatzteilanfrage oder Be- Spare part inquiries or -orders

stellung muß außer der Teile-Nummer must include, in addition to the
und der Bezeichnung, die Sie der part number and the description
Ersatzteilliste entnehmen können, which can be taken from the spare
auch den Maschinen-Typ und die part list, the machine type and
Maschinen-Nummer enthalten. the machine number.
Diese Angaben sind im Interesse This data is necessary in the in-
einer schnellen Bearbeitung, ohne terest of smooth processing
Rückfragen, notwendig. without queries.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Für diese technische Dokumentation All rights are reserved for this
behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. technical documentation. Without
Diese Unterlagen dürfen ohne unser our prior agreement these documents
vorherige Zustimmung weder verviel- may neither be duplicated nor
fältigt, noch Dritten zugänglich made available to third parties
gemacht, noch in anderer Weise ver- nor utilized in any other way.
wertet werden.
Zuwiederhandlung verpflichtet zum Infringement will involve compen-

Schadensersatz und ist strafbar. sation for damages and legal action
Änderungen und Ergänzungen, die dem We reserve the right to introduce

technischen Fortschritt dienen, be- modifications or additions in the
halten wir uns vor. interest of technical development.
TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KM-D 500A/AWI
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 TECHNISCHE DATEN 1.2 TECHNICAL DATA

==================== ==================
Rohrdurchmesser: mm siehe Deckblatt
Pipe diameter: see cover sheet
Rohrlängen: mm siehe Deckblatt

Pipe lengths: see cover sheet
Rohrwanddicke: max. mm 6
Pipe wall thicknes:
Druckluftanschluß: R" 1/2 NW 13

Compressed-air connection:
Luftdruck: bar 6 max 16

Air pressure: atm
Luftverbrauch: NL/Muffe 150 bei 6 bar

Air consuption: lit/socket 150 at 6 bar
Wasserzulauf: R" 1/2 NW 13

Water inlet:
Wasserablauf: R" 1/2 NW 13

Water outlet:
Wasserverbrauch: l/h 1400 max

Water consumption: lit/h
Extrusionshöhe: mm siehe Deckblatt

Extrusion height: see cover sheet
Anschlußleistung: KW 8 max
Connected load:
Betriebsspannung: V/Hz siehe Deckblatt

Operating voltage: V/cps see cover sheet
Steuerspannung: V/DC 24
Control voltage:
Länge: mm siehe Aufstellplan

Length: see lay out
Breite: mm siehe Aufstellplan

Width: see lay out
Höhe: mm siehe Aufstellplan

Height: see lay out
ca. Gewicht: kg
Appr. weight:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2.0 AUFBAU DER ANLAGE 2.0 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

===================== =============================
-Baugruppen nach Aufstellplan -Erection and assembling of units

(siehe 2.1) auf- in conformity with lay-out plan
stellen und montieren. (see 2.1).
-Anlagenteile beginnend mit Einlauf- -Align unit components exactly be-

rollgang exakt ausrichten. ginning with inlet roll table.
Die Anlage wird so nah als möglich Set up the unit as close as pos-
hinter die Rohrsäge aufgestellt. sible behind the pipe saw.
Zum Ausrichten sind Hilfsmittel For aligning, auxiliary means like
wie Richtschnur und Wasserwaage a guidance and water balance
erforderlich. necessary.
-Anlagenteile nach Aufstellplan -Fix unit components to suit indi-

befestigen. cations on lay-out plan.
Die Beschaffenheit des Untergrundes The condition of the ground must

muß den Anforderungen der Befesti- meet requirements for fixing
gungsschrauben und Dübel entspre- screws and dowels.
chen.
-Elektro-und Pneumatikanschlüsse -Connect electrical, pneumatic

durch gekennzeichnete connections using marked
Steckverbindungen bzw. Schlauch- plug connections resp. hose and
und Rohrverschraubungen anschließen. tube screwings.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 AUFSTELLPLAN 2.1 LAY - OUT PLAN

================ ==================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 ENERGIEANSCHLÜSSE 2.2 ENERGY CONNECTIONS

===================== ======================
-Die Stromeinspeisung erfolgt über -Power supply of the machine is

eine Zuleitung an die Anschlußklem- via the control cabinet by means
men im Schaltschrank. of a conducting cable to a con-
nector block.
Die Betriebsspannung muß mit der The operating voltage must corres-
Nennspannung auf dem Leistungs- pond to the rated voltage on the
schild im Schaltschrank überein- rating plate in the control cabi-
stimmen. net.
ACHTUNG: ATTENTION:
Die Anlage muß gemäß den bestehen- Unit must be grounded in accor-
den Vorschriften und Normen geer- dance with NEC article 250
det werden. and/or other national standards.
-Die Lage und Dimensionierung der -Please, find location and dimen-
Anschlüsse für Elektrik, Druckluft sioning of connections for elec-
und Kühlwasser entnehmen Sie bitte trics, compressed air and cooling
dem Aufstellplan. water on the lay-out plan.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2.3 VORBEREITENDE ARBEITEN ZUR 2.3 STARTING UP OPERATIONS

INBETRIEBNAHME
============================== ==========================
-Alle Getriebemotoren auf Öl- -The oil charge or the grease charge
oder Fettfüllung kontrollieren. of all geared motors must be con-
trolled.
-Führungsbahnen, Kolbenstangen und -Clean and oil, if necessary,

Kettentriebe reinigen und wenn guideways, piston rods and chain
erforderlich ölen. drives.
-Alle übrigen Schmierstellen füllen. -All the other points of lubri-

cation are to be greased before
the first start up.
Pneumatikverschraubungen -Inspect and retighten, if neces-

sowie Kabelklemmen im Schalt- sary, pneumatic
schrank überprüfen und falls erfor- screwings as well as cable termi-
derlich nachziehen. nals in the control cabinet.
-Energieanschluß mit Drehrichtungs- -Check energy connection for right-

messgerät auf Rechtsdrehfeld prüfen. rotary field using an instrument
for testing the sense of rotation.
-Transportsicherungen, Werkzeuge und -Remove protection lockings, tools

andere Gegenstände aus der Maschine and other objects from the machine.
entfernen.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3.0 ABLAUFDIAGRAMM 3.0 PROCESS CHART

================== =================
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Bahnhofstrasse 35 D-66546 Ottweiler +49 (0) 6824/308-0
KOMMISSION: 509849 ANLAGE: MUFFAUTOMAT KK 70/2A

order number: machine: socketing unit KK 70/2A
KUNDE: Ming Hung Plastics Co. Ltd. MASCHINENNR: 177

customer: machine no:
LAND: Indonesia ZEICHNUNGSNR: MU919890

country: drawing no:
STEUERUNG: SIEMENS S5-95U NETZSPANNUNG: 3 x 400V + N + PE / 50 Hz

control system: supply voltage:
BEDIENUNG: LAUER PCS 095 ANSCHLUSSLEISTUNG: 6 KW

control unit: supply voltage:
BUSSYSTEM: STEUERSPANNUNG: 24 V/DC

bus system: control voltage:
BEARBEITET: Frank Meyer GEPRšFT: Frank Meyer BAUJAHR: 2004 VERSION:

build from: checked by: date of build: version:
2
Datum 22.Okt.2004 Ident-Nr. Benennung Zeichnungs-Nr. Bl.
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 1
DECKBLATT MU919902
Gepr. MUFFAUTOMAT KK 70/2A von
Frank Meyer
cover page + 6
nderung Datum Name Norm Urspr. Ers.f. Ers.d.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BLATT-NR. BENENNUNG IDENT-NR. BLATT-NR. BENENNUNG IDENT-NR.

sheet-no. name ident-no. sheet-no. name ident-no.
DECKBLATT
1 /1 21
cover page
Inhaltsverzeichnis
2 /2 22
table of contents
EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1
3 /3 23
extrusion axis 1
EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2
4 /4 24
extrusion axis 2
HEIZEN / AUSFORMEN
5 /5 25
heating / forming
ROHRTRANSPORT
6 /6 26
pipe transport
7 27
8 28
9 29
10 30
11 31
12 32
13 33
14 34
15 35
16 36
17 37
18 38
19 39
20 40
1 3
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 2
Inhaltsverzeichnis MU919902
Frank Meyer
table of contents + 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ABLAUFPLAN process chart

BEZEICHNUNG
title 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
FREIGABE VON TRANSPORT

release from conveying
BELEGT
FREIGABE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1
on
release extrusion axis 1
FREI
off
VOR
EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1
forward
extrusion axis 1
ZURšCK
backward
VOR
ANDRUCKROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1
forward
back up roller extrusion axis 1
ZURšCK
backward
BELEGT
TEILKONTROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1
ON
part control extrusion axis 1 FREI
off
BELEGT
ROLLGANG EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 STOP
on
rollers extrusion axis 1 stop FREI
off
EIN
MOTOR ROHREINZUG
on
motor driving gear
AUS
off
FREIGABE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 FREIGABE AN TRANSPORT

release to extrusion axis 2 release to conveying
2 4
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 3
EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 MU919902
Frank Meyer
extrusion axis 1 + 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

BEZEICHNUNG
title 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

BELEGT
FREIGABE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2
on
release extrusion axis 2
FREI
off
VOR
EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2
forward
extrusion axis 2
ZURšCK
backward
VOR
ANDRUCKROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2
forward
back up roller extrusion axis 2
ZURšCK
backward
BELEGT
TEILKONTROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2
ON
part control extrusion axis 2 FREI
off
BELEGT
ROLLGANG EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 STOP
on
rollers extrusion axis 2 stop FREI
off
EIN
MOTOR ROHREINZUG
on
motor driving gear
AUS
off
FREIGABE AN TRANSPORT
release to conveying
3 5
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 4
EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 MU919902
Frank Meyer
extrusion axis 2 + 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

BEZEICHNUNG
title 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
START HEIZEN FORMEN

start heating forming
VOR
ROHR POSITIONIEREN
forward
pipe positioning
ZURšCK
backward
VOR
OFEN
forward
heater
ZURšCK
backward
EIN
HEIZZEIT
on
heating time AUS t
off
VOR
SPANNBACKEN
forward
clamping jaws
ZURšCK
backward
VOR
WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN
forward
tool carriage
ZURšCK
backward
EIN
KšHLZEIT
on
cooling time t
AUS
off
release to conveying
4 6
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 5
HEIZEN / AUSFORMEN MU919902
Frank Meyer
heating / forming + 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

BEZEICHNUNG
title 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
release to transport
EIN
MOTOR QUERTRANSPORT
on
motor conveying unit
AUS
off
VOR
ENDSCHALTER QUERTRANSPORT
forward
limit switch conveying unit
ZURšCK
backward

START HEIZEN FORMEN

start heating forming
5
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 6
ROHRTRANSPORT MU919902
Frank Meyer
pipe transport + 6
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
4.0 SCHALT- UND REGELFUNKTIONEN 4.0 SWITCHING AND CONTROL

=============================== =========================
TECHNISCHE DOKUMENTATION / TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.0 Schalt- und Regelfunktionen Switching and control operations
4.1 BEDIEN- UND ANZEIGEELEMENTE 4.1 OPERATION AND DISPLAY

ELEMENTS
4.1.1 Bedienkonsole PCS 095 4.1.1 Operator panel PCS 095
4.1.2 Bedienpult 4.1.2 Control Panel
4.1.3 Maschine 4.1.3 Machine
4.2 BETRIEBSARTEN 4.2 OPERATION MODES

4.2.1 Hand 4.2.1 Hand
4.2.1.1 Anwahl der Funktionen 4.2.1.1 Selection of functions
4.2.1.2 Grundstellung 4.2.1.2 Normal position
4.2.1.3 Automatik 4.2.2 Automatic
4.3 EINSTELLUNGEN 4.3 SETTINGS

4.3.1 Programmanwahl 4.3.1 Selection of program
4.3.2 Zeiten 4.3.2 Timer
4.3.3 Temperatur 4.3.3 Temperature
4.3.4 Sonderfunktionen 4.3.4 Special functions
4.3.5 Anwärmtiefe 4.3.5 Heating length
4.3.6 Höhenverstellung 4.3.6 Height adjustment
4.4 SCHNITTSTELLEN 4.4 INTERFACES

4.4.1 Not-Aus 4.4.1 Emergency stop
4.5 FUNKTIONSABLAUF 4.5 OPERATION SEQUENCE

4.5.1 Extrusionsachse 1 4.5.1 Extrusion axis 1
4.5.3 Rohr positionieren 4.5.3 Pipe positioning
4.5.4 Ofen 4.5.4 Heater
4.5.5 Muffgerät 4.5.5 Socketing unit
4.5.6 Rohrtransport 4.5.6 Pipe transportation
4.6 Verriegelungen zum Schutz der 4.6. Lockings for protection of machine
Maschine und des Bedienpersonals and operator
4.6.1 Betriebsart Hand 4.6.1 Operation mode Hand
4.6.2 Betriebsart Automatik 4.6.2 Operation mode Automatic
4.7 EINSCHALTEN DER ANLAGE 4.7 SWITCHING ON MACHINE
4.8 AUSSCHALTEN DER ANLAGE 4.8 SWITCHING OFF MACHINE
4.9 STÖRDIAGNOSE 4.9 ERROR DIAGNOSIS

4.9.1 Anzeige von Störungen 4.9.1 Display of errors
4.9.2 Mögliche Ursachen von Störungen und deren 4.9.2 Possible reasons for errors and their
Behebungen elimination
4.9.3 Quittieren von erfaßten Störungen 4.9.3 Acknowledgement of indicated errors
4.10 ANHANG 4.10 Annex

4.10.1 Bewegungsanwahlschild 4.10.1 Legend at operator's panel
4.10.2 Verriegelungen in der Betriebsart "Hand" 4.10.2 Lockings in the operation mode "Hand"
-1-
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.1 BEDIEN- UND ANZEIGEELEMENTE 4.1 OPERATION AND DISPLAY

ELEMENTS
4.1.1 Bedienkonsole PCS 095 4.1.1 Operator panel PCS 095
Bedienkonsole PCS 095 (mit 1 Datensatz) Operator Pannel PCS 095/PCS 095.1
Bedienkonsole PCS 095.1 (mit 4 Datensätzen für
Unterschiedliche Maschinen und Sprachen)
1. LCD-Display, 4zeilig mit je 40 Zeichen 1. LCD-display, 4 lines each with 40 characters
2. Funktionstasten (auch Softkeys) F1...F8 mit jeweils 2. Function keys (also soft keys) F1...F8 each with a
einer gelben und grünen Melde-LED yellow and a green message LED
3. Funktionstasten F9...F16 mit jeweils einer gelben 3. Function keys F9...F16 each with a yellow and a
und grünen Melde-LED green message LED
4. Zehner-Tastatur für Sollwerteingabe 4. Ten key keyboard for nominal value input
5. Cursortasten mit mit grüner LED und Steuertasten 5. Cursor key with LED and control key for menu and
für Menü und Sollwerteingabe nominal value input
6. wichtige Informations-LED’s zum PCS-Status 6. Important information LED’s on the PCS status
7. Resettaste 7. Reset key
8. DIL-Schalter für die PCS 095 8. DIL switch for the PCS 095
9. Lautstärke für die PCS 095 9. Volume for acoustic signals
10. serielle Schnittstelle RS 232/TTY zur 10. Serial interface RS 232/TTY for the communication
Kommunikation/Programmierung
11. serielle Schnittstelle RS 422/RS 485 zur 11. Serial interface RS 422/RS 485 for the
Kommunikation communication
12. serielle Printerschnittstelle RS 232/TTY 12. Serial interface RS 232/TTY for the programming
and for the PCS 095.1 as Printer interface
13. Betriebsspanungs-Klemmen 13. Operating voltage terminals
14. Sicherung mit Ersatzsicherung 14. Fuse with reserve fuse
-2-
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
F1 " Anlage ein/aus " F1 " Unit On/Off "

Freigabe der Programmbearbeitung. Release of the program processing
Grüne Anzeige = "Anlage ein" Green display = " Unit On"
F2 " Hydraulik ein/aus " F2 " Hydraulic On/Off "

Funktionstaste nicht benutzt Control key not used
(Maschine ohne Hydraulik) (machine without hydraulics)
F3 " Heizung ein/aus " F3 " Heating On/Off "

Ein-/Ausschalten der Heizung. Switching the heater on/off
Grüne Anzeige = "Heizung ein" Green display = "Heater on"
Gelbe Anzeige = "Heizung aus" Yellow display = "Heater off"
F4 " Betriebsart Automatik F4 " Automatic Mode "

Anwahl der Betriebsart Automatik. Selection of the operation mode "Automatic"
Grüne Anzeige = Automatik angewählt Green display = Automatic mode selected
F5 " Automatik Start " F5 " Automatic Start "

Übernahme der Betriebsart "Automatik". Taking over the operation mode "Automatic"
Grüne Anzeige = Automatik gestartet Green display = Automatic mode started
F6 " Betriebsart Hand " F6 Operation Mode "Hand"

Anwahl der Betriebsart Hand. Selection of the operation mode "Hand"
Grüne Anzeige = Hand angewählt Green display = Hand mode selected
F7 " Grundstellung " F7 " Normal position "

Anfahren der Grundstellung Selection of the normal postition in the
in der Betriebsart Hand. operation mode "Hand"
Grüne Anzeige = Grundstellung vorhanden Green display = Machine in normal position
F8 " Sonderfunktionen " F8 " Special functions "

z.B. e.g.
XX Anfaseinheit ein/aus XX XX Chamfering unit ON/OFF XX
XX Stückzähler löschen XX XX Reset part counter XX

Lampentest Light check
Auswahl- Menue für nachfolgende Funktionen Menue for the following functions
- Anfaseinheit ein/aus - Chamfering unit ON/OFF
- Stückzähler zurücksetzen - Reset part counter
- Lampentest - Light check
- Funktionstest - Operation test
- Statusanzeige - Status display
- Schrittkettenanzeige - Step-chain display
- Taktzeit / Zykluszeit - Cycle time / Scan time
- Daten lesen / schreiben - Read / write data
Grüne Anzeige = Menue aktiv Green display = Menue is active
F9 " Störung quittieren " F9 " Error acknowledgement "

Quittieren einer erfaßten Störmeldung. Acknowledgement of a detected error message
Gelbe Anzeige = Steuerung hat eine Störung erkannt Yellow display = Control has detected an error
F10 " Störung anzeigen " F10 " Error display "
Anzeige einer im Hintergrund stehenden Störung Display of an error in the background
-3-
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
F11 " Zeiten eingeben " F11 " Times Setting"

z.B. e.g.
Heizzeit 000 001 x10s Heating time 000 001 x10s
Kühlzeit 000 050 sec Cooling time 000 050 sec
Verz. „Rohreinzug“ 000 005 x0,1s Delay “pipe inlet” 000 005 x0,1s
Zeit Nr. 4 000 000 sec Timer No 4 000 000 sec
Zeit Istwert Zeiteinheit time actual value time unit

Sollwert nominal value
Menue zur Einstellung und Anzeige folgender Menue for setting and display of the following
Zeiten times
- Heizzeit - Heating time
- Kühlzeit - Cooling time
- Verzögerung „Rohreinzug“ - Delay time “pipe inlet”
Grüne Anzeige = Menue aktiv Green display = menue is active
F12 " Programm Anwahl F12 " Program selection"

z.B. e.g.
Werkzeug : 01 Klebedorn Tool No. : 01 Straight mandrel
***** Auswahl mit Tasten "+" oder "-" ***** ***** Selection by button “+” or “-“ ****
Auswahlfenster : 01 Klebedorn Selection ...: 01 Straight mandrel
Menu zur Anwahl eines Muffwerkzeuges. Menue for the selection of a socketing tool.
Grüne Anzeige = Programmanwahl aktiv Green display = program selection is active
F13 " Temperatur eingeben " F13 " Temperature setting "
Funktionstaste nicht benutzt Control key not used
F14 " Bewegungsanwahl " F14 " Movement selection "

z.B. e.g.
XX Quertransport XX XX Conveying unit XX
Spannbacken XX Clamping jaws XX
Höhenverstellung Hight adjustment
Bewegung Anzeige Movement Display

Cursor vor zurück Cursor forward backward
(Auswahlfeld) (selection field)
Menue zur Anwahl einer Bewegung. Menue for the selection of a movement.
Die Anwahl einer Bewegung erfolgt mit den Pfeiltasten an The selection of a movement is effected by the cursor key
der Bedienkonsole. on the operator panel
Grüne Anzeige = Bewegungsanwahl aktiv Green display = Movement selection is active
F15 " Bewegung vor " F15 " Movement forward "
Fahren einer Bewegung in Richtung "vor" in der Selection of a movement in "forward" direction in the
Betriebsart "Hand" innerhalb des Menues" Bewegungs- operation mode " Hand" within the menue "Movement
anwahl". Selection"
F16 " Bewegung zurück " F16 " Movement backward "
Fahren einer Bewegung in Richtung "zurück" in der Selection of a movement in "backward" direction in the
Betriebsart "Hand" innerhalb des Menues operation mode "Hand" within the menue "Movement
"Bewegungsanwahl". Selection"
-4-
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.1.2 Bedienpult 4.1.2 Control Panel
3A2 " Heizung I " 3A2 " Heating I "

Temperaturregler zum Einstellen der Sollwerttemperatur Thermo regulator for setting the nominal temperature on
am oberen Heizblock. the upper heater.
Anzeige der Istwerttemperatur am oberen Heizblock. Display of the actual temperature on the upper heater.
3A3 " Heizung II " 3A3 " Heating II "

Temperaturregler zum Einstellen der Sollwerttemperatur Thermo regulator for setting the nominal temperature on
am unteren Heizblock. the lower heater.
Anzeige der Istwerttemperatur am unteren Heizblock. Display of the actual temperature on the lower heater.
3S1N " Not- Aus " 3S1N " Emergency-stop "

Not- Aus Taster Emergency-stop button
1Q1 Hauptschalter 1Q1 Main switch

Zuschalten der Netzspannung Putting the mains voltage
4.1.3 Maschine 4.1.3 Machine
3H1 Störanzeige 3H1 Error indicator

Anzeige einer erfassten Störung durch Blinklicht. Display of an indicated error by flashing light.
2S1N "Not- Aus" 2S1N "Emergency-stop"

Not- Aus Taster in der Extrusionsachse Emergency-stop button on extrusion axis
2S10TK "Teilkontrolle Extrusionsachse 1“ 2S10TK "Part control extrusion axis 1“

2S11TK "Teilkontrolle Extrusionsachse 2“ 2S11TK "Part control extrusion axis 2“
Lichtschranke zum Öffnen der Extrusionsachse 1 oder 2- Light barrier for opening extrusion axis 1 or 2.
Bei Änderung der Rohrlängen müssen diese If the pipe length changes, these light barriers must be
Lichtschranken versetzt werden. relocated.
-5-
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.2 BETRIEBSARTEN 4.2 OPERATION MODES

4.2.1 Hand 4.2.1 Hand
In der Betriebsart "Hand" kann jede Bewegung einzeln In the operation mode "Hand" each movement can be
zwischen ihren Endlagen bewegt werden. Die im Anhang effected separately between its final pos. The locking
4.10.2 aufgeführten Verriegelungsbedingungen müssen conditions mentioned in annex 4.10.2 must be observed.
erfüllt sein.
Die Betriebsartenanwahl erfolgt mit der Funktionstaste F6. The selection of the operating mode is effected by means
Nach Betätigen der Funktionstaste F6 leuchtet die grüne of the control key F6. After pressing F6, the green lamp is
Anzeige und folgendes Display erscheint : lighting and the following display appears:
Betriebsart : Hand Start : Aus Mode : Hand Start : OFF
Werkzeug : kein Werkzeug angewählt Tool : no tool selected

Keine Störung vorhanden ! ! ! No Error ! ! !
Der Automatikablauf wird unterbrochen. Mit den The automatic mode is interrupted. With F15 or F16, the
Funktionstasten F15 oder F16 wird nun die vorgewählte pre-selected movement is effected.
Bewegung ausgeführt.
4.2.1.1 Anwahl der Funktionen 4.2.1.1 Selection of functions

Die Anwahl einer Funktion (Bewegung) erfolgt in dem The selection of a function (movement) is effected in the
Menue "Bewegungsanwahl". Das Menue wird mit der menue "movement selection" The menue is activated with
Funktionstaste F14 aktiviert. Es erscheint z.B. folgende control key F14. The following display appears :e.g.
Displayanzeige :
XX Quertransport XX XX Conveying unit XX

Spannbacken XX Clamping jaws XX
Höhenverstellung Hight adjustment
Bewegung Anzeige movement display

Cursor vor zurück cursor forward backward
Die Anwahl einer Bewegung (Cursor- Position) erfolgt mit The selection of a movement (cursor position) is effected
den Pfeiltasten "oben" oder "unten". by the cursor keys (arrow upward/downward)
Zum Anwählen weiterer Funktionen, die nicht auf dieser For selecting other functions not appearing on this display
Display- Seite stehen, müssen die Pfeiltasten "rechts" oder page, press the left/right cursor key (arrow left/right).
"links" betätigt werden.
Die Ausführung der Bewegung erfolgt erst durch Drücken The actual movement is effected by pressing control key
der Funktionstasten F15 oder F16. F15 or F16.
Es wird nur die Bewegung ausgeführt, die durch die Only the movement selected by the cursor position is
Cursor- Position angewählt ist. effected.
Eine Auflistung aller Bewegungen kann Anhang 4.10.1 A list of all movements can be seen on annex 4.10.1
entnommen werden.
-6-
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.2.1.2 Grundstellung 4.2.1.2 Normal position

Die Grundstellung der Maschine ist die Stellung der The normal position of the machine is the position
einzelnen Bewegungen aus denen der automatische of the different movements from which the automatic
Ablauf gestartet werden kann. sequence can be started.
Die einzelnen Bewegungen haben folgende The individualt movements have the following initial
Ausgangsposition : positions:
Bewegung Grundstellung movement normal position
Einwerfer links geschlossen Tilting device - left closed

Andruckrolle Achse 1 zurück Back-up roller axis 1 backward
Teilkontrolle Achse 1 frei Part control axis 1 not occupied
Einwerfer rechts geschlossen Tilting device - right closed
Andruckrolle Achse 2 zurück Back-up roller axis 2 backward
Teilkontrolle Achse 2 frei Part control axis 2 not occupied
Rohr positionieren zurück Pipe positioning backward
Ofen zurück Heater backward
Werkzeugschlitten zurück Tool carriage backward
Quertransport zurück Conveying unit backward
Spannbacken zurück Clamping jaws backward
Die erreichte Grundstellung wird mit der grünen Anzeige The reached normal position is indicated by a green
bei F7 signalisiert. display at F7.
Zum automatischen Anfahren der Grundstellung dient die F7 serves for automatic selection of the normal
Funktionstaste F7: position.
Die Taste muß solange gedrückt werden bis die grüne Press the key until the green display appears.
Anzeige leuchtet.
Die Funktion "Grundstellung" F7 ist nur in der Betriebsart The function "normal position" (F7) does only work
Hand wirksam. iin the operation mode "Hand".
-7-
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.2.2 Automatik 4.2.2 Automatic

In der Betriebsart "Automatik" laufen alle Bewegungen In the operation mode "Automatic" all movements are
selbständig programmgesteuert ab. effected independently and program controlled.
Die Betriebsartenanwahl erfolgt mit der Funktionstaste F4 The operation mode is selected by control key F4 on
am Bedienpult. Nach Betätigen der Funktionstaste F4 the control panel. After pressing F4, the green lamp
leuchtet die grüne Anzeige und folgendes Display is lighting and the following display appears :
erscheint :
z.B. e.g.
Betriebsart : Automatik Start : Aus Mode : Automatic Start : OFF
Werkzeug : Klebedornwerkzeug Tool : Straight mandrel

keine Störung vorhanden ! ! ! No Error ! ! !
Die Freigabe des automatischen Ablaufs erfolgt mit der The automatic operation is released by control key
Funktionstaste "Start" F5. “Start" F5.
Das "Start"- Signal kann nur übernommen werden, wenn The signal "Start" can only be taken over if the
sich die Maschine in Grundstellung befindet und keine machine is in normal position and if there is
Störung ansteht. no error.
Die erfolgte Freigabe des automatischen Ablaufs wird The effected release of the automatic operation
durch Dauerlicht an der grüne Anzeige F5 und am Display is indicated by permanent green light on F5 and
angezeigt. on the display.
z.B. e.g.
Betriebsart : Automatik Start : Ein Mode : Automatic Start : ON
Werkzeug : Klebedornwerkzeug Tool : Straight mandrel

keine Störung vorhanden ! ! ! No Error ! ! !
Nach dem Einbruch der Versorgungsspannung, der kürzer After a failure of the supply voltage with a duration of less
wie 2 Sekunden gedauert hat, führt die Maschine than 2 seconds, the machine makes a restart on its own.
selbständig einen Wiederanlauf durch.
Das zuletzt angewärmte Rohr wird dann aber nicht The pipe which has been heated last, will not be formed.
gemufft.
-8-
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.3 EINSTELLUNGEN 4.3. SETTINGS

Abhängig von eingesetztem Werkzeugtyp und -größe sind Depending on the type and dimension of the installed
unterschiedliche Einstellungen an der Maschine tool, different machine settings have to be effected.
vorzunehmen.
Die hierzu erforderlichen Werte sind den Datenblättern zu The corresponding values can be seen on the enclosed
entnehmen. data sheets.
Alle nachfolgend nicht beschriebenen Einstellungen an der All settings not mentioned below have already been set by
Maschine sind bereits werkseitig eingestellt und dürfen the machine manufacturer and must not be modified.
nicht verändert werden.
4.3.1 Programmanwahl 4.3.1 Program selection

Die Maschine kann mit verschiedenen Werkzeugen The machine can be run with different tools. The
betrieben werden. Die Auswahl hierzu erfolgt mit der respective selection is effected by control key F12 on the
Funktionstaste F12 an der Bedienkonsole. operator panel.
Nach Betätigen von F12 leuchtet die grüne Anzeige, im After pressing F12, the green lamp is lighting and the
Display erscheint folgendes Bild : following display appears :
z.B. e.g.
Werkzeug : 01 Klebedorn Tool No. : 01 Straight mandrel
*** Auswahl mit den Tasten "+" oder "-" *** **** Selection by button “+” or “-“l ***
Auswahlfenster ...: 01 Klebedorn Selection ...: 01 Straight mandrel
Die Vorwahl des gewünschten Programms erfolgt mit den The pre-selection of the required program is effected by
Tasten "+" oder "-". means of the "+" or "-" key.
Das vorgewählte Programm erscheint im Auswahlfenster. The pre-selected program appears in the selection field.
Die Übernahme des Programms geschieht durch The taking over of the program is effected by pressing the
Betätigung der Taste "ENT". "Ent" key.
Das aktive Programm wird in der ersten Zeile des Displays The active program is indicated in the first line of the
(Werkzeug :) angezeigt. display (Tool No. :)
Folgende Wahlmöglichkeiten stehen zur Verfügung : The following program can be selected :
00 kein Programm angewählt 00 no program selected

01 Klebedornwerkzeug 01 straight mandrel
02 Durchlauf ohne Muffen 02 pipe conveying only
Der Funktionsablauf der einzelnen Programmanwahlen The function sequence of the individual program selection
kann dem Ablaufplan oder Kapitel 4.5 dieser Anleitung can be taken from the process chart or from chapter 4.5 of
entnommen werden. these instructions.
-9-
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.3.2 Zeiten 4.3.2 Timer

Veränderbare Zeiten können in dem Menu "Zeiten Modifyable times may be set and indicated in the menue
eingeben" eingegeben und angezeigt werden. Die "times setting". The menue selection is effected with F11.
Menuanwahl erfolgt mit der Funktionstaste F11.
Nach Betätigung von F11 leuchtet die grüne Anzeige und After pressing F11, the green lamp is lighting and the
es erscheint folgendes Display : following display appears:
z.B. e.g.
Heizzeit 000 001 x10s Heating time 000 001 x10s
Kühlzeit 000 050 sec Cooling time 000 050 sec
Verz. „Rohreinzug“ 000 005 x0,1s Delay “pipe inlet” 000 005 x0,1s
Zeit Nr. 4 000 000 sec Timer No 4 000 000 sec
Zeit Istwert Zeiteinheit time actual value time unit

Sollwert nominal value
Zum Ändern eines Wertes (Sollwert oder Zeiteinheit) muß To modify a value (nominal value or time unit), the value to
der zu verändernde Wert mit den Pfeiltasten angewählt be changed must be selected by means of the cursor keys
werden (--> Wert blinkt). (--> value is flashing).
Mit den Tasten "+" oder "-" oder mit der Zehnertastatur The nominal value may now be changed by means of the
kann nun der Sollwert verändert werden. "+" or "-" key or with the aid of the ten-key keyboard.
Die Übernahme des geänderten Wertes erfolgt durch die The taking over of the modified value is effected by the
Taste "ENT" oder durch Verlassen der Zeile. "ENT" key or by quitting the line.
Fehlerhaft eingegebene Werte können mit der Taste Values set by mistake may be deleted with the "CLR" key.
"CLR" gelöscht werden.
Die Zeiteinheit wird durch Betätigen der Taste "." The time unit may be changed by the "." key.
umgeschaltet.
Es können folgende Zeiteinheiten eingestellt werden: The following time units can be set:
.0 --> x 0,01 Sekunden .0 --> x 0,01 seconds

.1 --> x 0,1 Sekunden .1 --> x 0,1 seconds
.2 --> Sekunden .2 --> seconds
.3 --> x 10 Sekunden .3 --> x 10 seconds
Beispiel : Zeitwert = 10 Sekunden Example : Time = 10 seconds

Eingabe : 100.1 oder Value set : 100.1 or
10.2 oder 1.3 10.2 or 1.3
- 10 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
Folgende Zeiten können in dem Menu "Zeiten eingeben" The following times in the menue "Set times" can be
verändert werden : changed.
" Heizzeit " " Heating time "

Zeit einstellen, die zum Anwärmen des Rohres benötigt Set the time necessary for heating the pipe.
wird.
" Kühlzeit " " Cooling time "

Zeit einstellen, die das ausgeformte Rohr zum Abkühlen Set the time requested for cooling the socketed pipe
benötigt.
" Verzögerung Rohreinzug " " Delay time pipe inlet "
Nachlaufzeit einstellen, um die der Rohreinzug verzögert Set delay time needed to stop the driving gear. The time is
abgeschaltet wird. Die Zeit ist so einzustellen, dass das to be set in a way, that the pipe commes to a stop close to
Rohr im Bereich des Positionierers zum Liegen kommt. the postioner.
Regel : Rule:
- dünne Rohre: kleine Zeit (0 x 0,01s) - small pipes: short time (0 x 0,01s)
- dicke Rohre: große Zeit (100 x 0,01s) - big pipes: long time (100 x 0,01s)
" Zeit Nr. 4 - 7 " " Timer No. 4 - 7 "

Nicht im aktuellen Maschinenprogramm benutzt. Not used in the present machine program.
4.3.3 Temperatur 4.3.3 Temperature

Die Temperatureinstellung wird am Temperaturregler The temperature is set by means of the OMRON E5CS
Fabrikat OMRON, Typ E5CS vorgenommen. Die thermo regulator. For operating instructions conc.
Bedienung dieses Reglers kann dem Datenblatt im Kapitel this regulator pls. refer to the data sheet in
"Technische Unterlagen" entnommen werden. chapter " Technical documents".
" Heizung I " (3A2) " Heating I " (3A2)

Temperatur für den oberen Heizblock einstellen. Die Set temperature for the upper heating block.
Eingabe erfolgt in Grad Celsius. Setting in degrees Centigrade.
" " Heizung II (3A3) " Heating II " (3A3)

Temperatur für den unteren Heizblock einstellen. Die Set temperature for the lower heating block.
Eingabe erfolgt in Grad Celsius. Setting in degrees Centigrade.
- 11 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.3.4 Sonderfunktionen 4.3.4 Special functions

Mit der Funktionstaste F8 können zwei verschiedene With control key F8 two different menues with special
Menus mit Sonderfunktionen angewählt werden (siehe functions can be selected (see annex 4.10.1)
Anhang 4.10.1).
Der Wechsel zwischen den beiden Menues erfolgt mit den The change from one menue to the other is effected by
Pfeiltasten "rechts" oder "links". means of the cursor keys "right" or "left"
Die einzelnen Menuepunkte können mit den Pfeiltasten The different menue items can be selected by means of
"oben" oder "unten" angewählt werden. Es kann nur die the cursor keys "up" or "down". Only the special function
Sonderfunktion verändert werden, die durch die which is activated by the cursor position can be changed.
Cursorposition aktiviert ist.
Menue 1 Menue 1
Anfaseinheit ein/aus XX Chamfering unit ON/OFF XX
XX Stückzähler löschen XX XX Reset part counter XX

Funktionstest XX Function test XX

"
Sonder- Anzeige special display

funktion vor zurück function for- back-
Cursor cursor ward ward
Anfaseinheit ein/aus Chamfering unit ON/OFF

Anwahl nicht möglich, da keine Anfaseinheit angebaut ist. No chamfering unit mounted. Selection not possible.
Stückzähler löschen Reset part counter

Der Stückzähler wird durch Betätigen der Funktionstaste The part counter is reset by pressing control
F16 gelöscht. key F16.

Durch Betätigen der Taste F15 oder F16 wird ein The displays are checked for their function
Funktionstest der Anzeigen durchgeführt. by pressing F15 or F16.
Funktionstest Function test

Diese Funktion dient zu Testzwecken des Herstellers. Die This function is only for checking purposes of
Funktion ist für den Anwender gesperrt. the machine manufacturer. It is not accessible
for the user.
- 12 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
Menue 2 Menue 2
XX Statusanzeige Funktion XX Status display press

Schrittkettenanzeige aktivieren Step-chain display "ENT"
Taktzeit/Zykluszeit mit Taste Cycle time/Scan time for
Daten schreiben/lesen "ENT" Data read/write activ.
Sonder special
funktion function
Cursor cursor
Durch Betätigen der Funktionstaste "ENT" wird das The menue selected by the cursor position is activated by
Untermenue aufgerufen, das durch die Cursor- Position pressing control key "ENT".
angewählt ist.
Untermenue Statusanzeige Sub-menue Statusdisplay
low-byte | high-byte low-byte | high-byte

Eingangswort: 000 00000000 00000000 Input word : 000 00000000 00000000
Ausgangswort: 000 00000000 00000000 Output word : 000 00000000 00000000
Merkerwort : 000 00000000 00000000 Flag word : 000 00000000 00000000
Status status
Wort-Nr. Word no.
Angezeigt wird der Zustand der Eingänge, Ausgänge und Displayed are : the status of inlets, outlets
Merker der Steuerung (SPS). and flag words of the Control (PLC).
Untermenue Schrittkettenanzeige Sub-menue Step-chain display
Seite 1 Page 1
Extrusionsachse 1 : 00 Muffgerät: 00 Extrusion axis 1: 00 Socketing unit: 00

Extrusionsachse 2 : 00 Rohrtransp.: 00 Extrusion axis 2: 00 Pipe conveying: 00
Rohr pos. : 00 Anfaseinh.: 00 Pipe positioning 00 Chamfering unit: 00
Ofen : 00 Heater: 00
Schritt- Schritt- Schritt- Schritt- step- step- step- step-

kette Nr. kette Nr. chain no. chain no.
Angezeigt wird die aktuelle Schrittnummer der jeweiligen Displayed is the present step no. of the respective step
Schrittkette, während des automatischen chain during the automatic machine operation.
Maschinenablaufs.
- 13 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
Untermenu Taktzeit / Zykluszeit Sub-menue cycle time / scan time
Muffen/Stunde .......: 000 Stück Socketing rate .........: 000 sockets/h

Stückzahl ...............: 00000 Rohre No. of pipes .............: 00000 pipes
Taktzeit Maschine..: 000 sec Cycle time machine.: 000 sec
Zykluszeit SPS ......: 000 msec Scan time PLC ........: 000 msec
Angezeigt wird die Muffleistung der Maschine, Indicated is the socketing rate of the machine, based on
hochgerechnet aus der zuletzt gemessenen Taktzeit. the latest cycle time.
Zur Ermittlung der Stückzahl werden alle Rohre gezählt, To determinate the no. of pipes, all pipes are counted
die aus beiden Extrusionsachse in die Rohrtransporteinheit which are thrown from both extrusion axis onto the pipe
eingeworfen werden. Der Stückzähler kann im ersten conveying unit.. The part counter can be reset in the first
Menue der Sonderfunktionen (F8) zurückgesetzt werden. menue of the special functions (F8).
Die Taktzeitmessung der Maschine wird zwischen zwei The cycle time of the machine is determinated between
Transportzyklen ermittelt. two transport cycles.
Die Zykluszeit der Steuerung (Programmlaufzeit) wird The scan time of the control (program running time) is
durch Betätigen der Funktionstaste F15 ermittelt. determined by pressing control key F15
4.3.5 Anwärmtiefe 4.3.5 Heating length

Die Anwärmtiefe wird über die Bewegung „Rohr The heating length is set by the movement “pipe
positionieren“ festgelegt. Der Verfahrweg des Zylinders positioning”. The traversing path of the cylinder can be set
wird durch einen verstellbaren Anschlag verändert. by an fixed stop gage.
4.3.6 Höhenverstellung 4.3.6 Forming pressure

Zur Anpassung an unterschiedliche Rohrdurchmesser For adaptation to different pipe diameters, the pipe
muß die Rohrtransporteinheit in der Höhe verstellt werden. transporting unit must be adjusted in height.
Die Verstellung erfolgt in der Betriebsart „Hand“ bei der The adjustment is done at “hand mode” by
Funktion 31 „Höhenverstellung“. function 31 “height adjustment”.
- 14 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.4 SCHNITTSTELLEN 4.4 Interfaces
4.4.1 Not- Aus 4.4.1 Emergency stop

An Klemme 1X4_27 und 1X4_29 wird für weitere Anlagen A contact of the emergency-stop combination for a further
in der Linie ein Kontakt der Not- Aus- Kombination zur machine is placed at the terminal 1X4_27 and 1X4_29.
Verfügung gestellt. Dieser Kontakt ist im Normalfall (kein Normally (no emergency-stop) this contact is closed.
Not- Aus) geschlossen.
Die Not- Aus Taster einer externen Anlage können an The emergency stop buttons of an external machine can
Klemme 1X4_25 und 1X4_26 eingeschleift werden. be looped in at terminal 1X4_25 and 1X4_26.
Der eingeschleifte Kontakt muß im Normalfall geschlossen Normally, the contact looped in must be closed.
sein.
Sollen beide Anlagen nicht miteinander gekoppelt werden, If the two machines shall not be coupled, a bridge (terminal
so muß an der Klemmleiste 1X4 eine Brücke (Klemme 25/26) must be added to terminal board 1X4
25/26) eingelegt werden.
- 15 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.5 FUNKTIONSABLAUF 4.5 OPERATION SEQUENCE

Der Funktionsablauf der Maschine ist in Schrittketten The operation sequence of the machine is devided into
aufgeteilt, die unter Berücksichtigung gegenseitiger step chains which operate independently from each other
Verriegelungen unabhängig voneinander ablaufen. taking into account mutual lockings between them.
Es existiert für A separate step chain was programmed each for
- Extrusionsachse 1 (Schrittkette 1) - extrusion axis 1 (step chain 1)

- Extrusionsachse 2 (Schrittkette 2) - extrusion axis 2 (step chain 2)
- Rohr positionieren (Schrittkette 3) - pipe positioning (step chain 3)
- Ofen (Schrittkette 4)) - heater (step chain 4)
- Muffgerät (Schrittkette 5) - socketing unit (step chain 5)
- Rohrtransport (Schrittkette 6) - pipe conveying (step chain 6)
je eine getrennte Schrittkette.
Der genaue Funktionsablauf mit den Fortschalt- The detailed operation sequence with the conditions for
bedingungen des jeweiligen Schrittes kann der reaching the next step can be seen on the follwing listing.
nachfolgenden Auflistung entnommen werden.
Die Reihenfolge der einzelnen Bewegungen ist auch als The sequence of the different movements is also shown in
Weg-/Zeit-Diagramm im Ablaufplan dargestellt. a travel-time diagram in the process chart.
- 16 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177

Schrittkette 1 Step chain 1
Schritt 0 : Startschritt Step 0 : Normal position

- Extrusionsachse 1 in Grundstellung - Extrusion axis 1 in normal position
- Rohr in Einwurfposition 2S10TK / E65.0 - Pipe in feeding position
- kein Rohr im Magazin 2S12TK / E72.2 - No pipe in the magazine
- Schrittkette Nr.6 - Step chain no. 6 is not
nicht in Schritt 1 oder Schritt 2 at step 1 or 2
Schritt 1 : Extrusionsachse 1 öffnen Step 1 : Open extrusion axis 1

- Extrusionsachse 1 geöffnet 2S10V / E65.3 - Extrusion axis 1 is opened
Schritt 2 : Teilkontrolle Achse 1 belegt? Step 2 : Part control axis1 occupied?

Andruckrolle Achse 1 vor Back-up roller axis 1 forward
- Rohr in Magazin? 2S12TK / E72.2 - Pipe in magazine?
- Rohreinzug stop (frei) 2S14R1 / E72.4 - Pipe inlet stop (not occupied)
Schritt 3 : Extrusionsachse 1 schließen Step 3 : Close extrusion axis 1

- Extrusionsachse 1 geschlossen 2S10R / E65.2 - Extrusion axis 1 is closed
Schritt 4 : Andruckrolle Achse 1 vor Step 4 : Back-up roller axis 1 forward

- Andruckrolle nicht zurück 2S12R / E72.0 - Back-up roller not backward
Schritt 5 :Rohreinzug Achse 1 Step 5 : Rollers pipe inlet axis 1

- “Rohreinzug stop” nicht belegt 2S14R1 / E72.4 - “Pipe inlet stop” not occupied
Schritt 6 : Andruckrolle Achse 1 zurück Step 6 : Back-up roller axis 1 backward

- Andruckrolle zurück 2S12R / E72.0 - Back-up roller backward
Schritt 7 : Freigabe an Rohrtransport setzen Step 7 : release to pipe conveying

- kein Rohr in Magazin 2S12TK / E72.2 - No pipe in magazine
- Quertransport vor 2S2V / E73.3 - Conveying unit forward
- 17 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177


- Extrusionsachse 2 in Grundstellung - Extrusion axis 2 in normal position
- Rohr in Einwurfposition 2S11TK / E65.1 - Pipe in feeding position
- kein Rohr im Magazin 2S12TK / E72.3 - No pipe in the magazine
- Schrittkette Nr.6 - Step chain no. 6 is not
nicht in Schritt 1 oder Schritt 2 at step 1 or 2
Schritt 1 : Extrusionsachse 2 öffnen Step 1 : Open extrusion axis 2

- Extrusionsachse 2 geöffnet 2S11V / E65.5 - Extrusion axis 2 is opened
Schritt 2 : Teilkontrolle Achse 2 belegt? Step 2 : Part control axis 2 occupied?

Andruckrolle Achse 2 vor Back-up roller axis 2 forward
- Rohr in Magazin? 2S13TK / E72.3 - Pipe in magazine?
- Rohreinzug stop (frei) 2S14R2 / E72.5 - Pipe inlet stop (not occupied)
Schritt 3 : Extrusionsachse 2 schließen Step 3 : Close extrusion axis 2

- Extrusionsachse 2 geschlossen 2S11R / E65.4 - Extrusion axis 2 is closed
Schritt 4 : Andruckrolle Achse 2 vor Step 4 : Back-up roller axis 2 forward

- Andruckrolle nicht zurück 2S13R / E72.1 - Back-up roller not backward
Schritt 5 :Rohreinzug Achse 2 Step 5 : Rollers pipe inlet axis 2

- “Rohreinzug stop” nicht belegt 2S14R2 / E72.5 - “Pipe inlet stop” not occupied
Schritt 6 : Andruckrolle Achse 2 zurück Step 6 : Back-up roller axis 2 backward

- Andruckrolle zurück 2S13R / E72.1 - Back-up roller backward
Schritt 7 : Freigabe an Rohrtransport setzen Step 7 : release to pipe conveying

- kein Rohr in Magazin 2S13TK / E72.3 - No pipe in magazine
- Quertransport vor 2S2V / E73.3 - Conveying unit forward
- 18 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.5.3 Rohr positionieren 4.5.3 Pipe positioning


- Grundstellung “Rohr positionieren” - Normal position “pipe positioning”
- Schrittkette Nr. 6 in Schritt 5 - Step chain no. 6 at step 5
Schritt 1 : Rohr positionieren vor Step 1 : Pipe positioning forward

- Rohr positionieren vorne 2S5V / E 65.6 - Pipe positioning in forward position
Schritt 2 : Wartezeit Step 2 : Waiting time

- Wartezeit von 0,5 sec - 0,5 sec waiting time
Schritt 3 : Rohr positionieren zurück Step 3 : Pipe positioning backward

- Rohr positionieren zurück 2S5R / E 65.7 - Pipe positioning in backward position
Schritt 4 : Fertigmeldung setzen Step 5 : Set “Ready signal”

4.5.4 Ofen 4.5.4 Heater


- Grundstellung “Ofen” - Normal position “heater”
- Programm “Klebedorn” gewählt - Program “straight mandrel” selected”
Schritt 1 : Ofen vor Step 1 : Heater forward

- Heizblöcke geschlossen 2S6V / E 33.6 - Heater in closed position
Schritt 2 : Heizzeit Step 2 : Heating time

- Heizzeit abgelaufen - Heating time expired
Schritt 3 : Ofen zurück Step 3 : Heater backward

- Heizblöcke geöffnet 2S6R / E 33.5 - Heater in opened position

- 19 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.5.5 Muffgerät 4.5.5 Socketing station


- Grundstellung „Muffstation“ - Normal position “socketing station”
- Programm „Klebedorn“ gewählt - Program “straight mandrel” selected”
Schritt 1 : Spannbacken vor Step 1 : Clamping jaws forward

- Spannbacken vorne 2S3V / E 33.1 - Clamping jaws in forward position
Schritt 2 : Werkzeugschlitten vor Step 2 : Tool carriage forward

- Werkzeugschlitten vorne 2S8V / E 64.1 - Tool carriage in forward position
Schritt 3 : Kühlzeit Step 3 : Cooling time

- Kühlzeit abgelaufen - Cooling time expired
Schritt 4 : Werkzeugschlitten zurück Step 4 : Tool carriage backward

- Werkzeugschlitten zurück 2S8R / E 64.0 - Tool carriage in backward position
Schritt 5 : Spannbacken zurück Step 5 : Clamping jaws backward

- Spannbacken zurück 2S3R / E 33.0 - Clamping jaws in backward position

4.5.6 Rohrtransport 4.5.5 Pipe conveying


- Maschine in Grundstellung - Machine at normal position
- Schrittkette Nr. 1 nicht in - Step chain no. 1 not at
Schritt 0 oder Schritt 7 step 0 or step 7
- Schrittkette Nr. 2 nicht in - Step chain no. 2 not at
Schritt 0 oder Schritt 7 step 0 or step 7
- Lichtschranken 2S14R1 / E 72.4 - Light barriers
nicht belegt 2S14R2 / E 72.5 not occupied
Schritt 1 : Quertransport vor Step 1 : Conveying unit forward

- Quertransport vorne 2S2V / E 73.1 - Conveying unit in forward position
Schritt 2 : Leerschritt Step 2 : Idle step
Schritt 3 : Schrittketten Nr. 3 bis 5 starten Step 3 : Start steps chains no. 3 to 5
- Wartezeit 0,5 sec - Waiting time 0,5 sec
Schritt 4 : Quertransport zurück Step 4 : Conveying unit backward

- Quertransport zurück 2S2R / E 73.0 - Conveying unit in backward position
Schritt 5 : Freigabe von Schrittketten Nr. 3 - 5 Step 5 : Release of step chains no. 3 to 5
- Schrittketten Nr. 3 und 4 in Schritt 4, - Step chains no. 3 and 4 at step 4,
Schrittkette 5 in Schritt 6 oder step chain no. 5 at step 6 or
Programm „Durchlauf ohne Muffen“ program “pipe conveying only”
- 20 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.6 VERRIEGELUNGEN ZUM SCHUTZ DES 4.6 LOCKINGS FOR PROTECTION OF

BEDIENPERSONALS UND DER OPERATORS AND MACHINE
MASCHINE
4.6.1 Verriegelungen in der Betriebsart Hand 4.6.1 Lockings at operation mode hand
Im Handbetrieb sind alle Bewegungen, die zur Gefährdung In the operation mode hand, all movements which could be
des Bedienpersonals oder zu Beschädigungen an der dangerous for the operators or which could damage the
Maschine führen könnten, gegeneinander verriegelt. machine are mutually locked between each other.
Beispiel : Example:
Die Spannbacken können nur geschlossen werden, The clamping jaws can only be closed if the conveying
wenn der Quertransport in Position steht unit is in correct position
Die Verriegelungen der einzelnen Bewegungen The mutual lockings between the different movements can
untereinander sind im Anhang 4.10.2 aufgelistet. be taken from chapter 4.10.2 .
4.6.2 Verriegelungen in der Betriebsart Automatik 4.6.2 Lockings at the operation mode auto
In der Betriebsart Automatik sind vom Bediener keine In the operation mode automatic the operator does not
besonderen Verriegelungen der einzelnen Bewegungen zu have to pay attention to special lockings of the individual
beachten. Die Programmierung des Maschinenablaufs in movements. Programming of machine in step chains has
Schrittketten hat bereits alle Verriegelungsbedingungen already taken into account all locking conditions.
berücksichtigt.
Siehe hierzu Kapitel 4.5 "Funktionsablauf" See also chapter 4.5 "Operation sequence"
- 21 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.7 EINSCHALTEN DER ANLAGE 4.7 SWITCHING THE MACHINE ON
Hauptschalter einschalten (1Q1) Switch main switch on (1Q1)

Netzspannung wird zugeschaltet the mains voltage is put in
Anlage einschalten (F1) Switch control on (F1)

Steuerspannung wird eingeschaltet, switching control voltage on,
Programmbearbeitung wird freigegeben release of programm processing
Betriebsart "Hand" wählen (F6) Select operation mode "hand" (F6)

Handfunktionen sind freigegeben hand functions are released
Heizung einschalten (F3) Switch heating on (F3)

Temperaturregler und -anzeige werden eingeschaltet, temperature regulation and display are switched on,
Ofen wird aufgeheizt heater block is heated
Versorgungsleitung für Druckluft öffnen Open compressed air supply
Grundstellung anfahren (F7) Select normal position (F7)

Muffautomat nimmt die Grundstellung ein socketing unit moves to normal position
Zeitwerke einstellen (F11) (siehe Kapitel 4.3.2) Set time relay (F11) (see chapter 4.3.2)
- Heizzeit - heating time
- Kühlzeit - cooling time
- Verzögerung Rohreinzug - Delay time “pipe inlet”
Temperaturen einstellen (siehe Kapitel 4.3.3) Set temperatures (see chapter 4.3.3)
- Anwärmtemperatur (3A2/3A3) - heating temperature (3A2/3A3)
Programm anwählen (F12) (siehe Kapitel 4.3.1) Select program (F12) (see chapter 4.3.1)
Betriebsart "Automatik" wählen (F4) Select operation mode "automatic" (F4)

der automatische Ablauf wird freigegeben the automatic sequence is released
"Start"- Taster (F5) betätigen Press "start" button (F5)

der automatische Ablauf wird gestartet the automatic sequence is started
- 22 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.8 AUSSCHALTEN DER ANLAGE 4.8 SWITCHING THE MACHINE OFF
Betriebsart "Hand" wählen (F6) Select operation mode "Hand" (F6)

der automatische Ablauf ist gesperrt the automatic sequence is blocked
Heizung ausschalten (F3) Switch heating off (F3)

Temperaturregler und –anzeige werden temperature regulator and display are switched off,
ausgeschaltet, Heizblöcke werden abgeschaltet heating system is switched off
Anlage ausschalten (F1) Switch control off (F1)

Steuerspannung wird abgeschaltet, control voltage is switched off, programm processing
Programmbearbeitung wird gesperrt is blocked
Hauptschalter ausschalten (1Q1) Switch main switch off (1Q1)

Netzspannung wird abgeschaltet mains voltage is switched off
Versorgungsleitungen für Druckluft absperren Block supply for compressed air
- 23 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.9 STÖRDIAGNOSE 4.9 ERROR DIAGNOSIS
Die Maschine verfügt über ein Stördiagnosesystem, das The machine has got an error diagnosis system supporting
den Bediener bei der Suche nach Fehlern in der Anlage the operator in searching for machine errors and for
und deren mögliche Ursachen unterstützt. possible reasons for them.
4.9.1 Anzeige von Störungen 4.9.1 Display of errors

Alle vom Diagnosesystem erfaßten Störungen werden an All errors detected by the diagnosis system are indicated
der Bedienkonsole im Klartext, an Funktionstaster F9 on the operator panel as text, at control key F9 by flashing
durch Blinklicht und über eine Rundumleuchte an der light and by a rotating lamp on the machine.
Maschine signalisiert.
Falls bei einer Störung oder Maschinenstillstand keine If the display shows no indication in case of an error or
Anzeige am Display erfolgt, sind complete machine standstill, please check
- Sicherungen - fuses
- Steckverbindungen - plug connections
- Kabelbefestigungen - cable fixings
- PC Steuerung - PC control
zu überprüfen.
Falls eine Störung durch eine andere Funktion (z.B. F4 If an error is superimposed by another function (e.g. F4
"Betriebsart Automatik" betätigt) überlagert wird, so kann "Automatic Mode" activated), the error can be re-displayed
die Störung mit F10 "Störung anzeigen" erneut zur by pressing F10 "Error display".
Anzeige gebracht werden.
- 24 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.9.2 Mögliche Ursachen von Störungen und ihre 4.9.2 Possible reasons for errors and their elimination
Beseitigung
"Schutzorgan" "Protective device"

Ursache: Reason:
Ein Motorschutzschalter oder Sicherungsautomat hat Release of a motor protective switch or of an automatic
ausgelöst. circuit breaker.
Abhilfe: Remedy:
Motorschutzschalter oder Sicherungsautomat wieder Switch motor protective switch or automatic circuit breaker
einschalten. on again.
Beachten: Attention:
Ursache für die Überlast am Schutzorgan feststellen und Find and eliminate reason for overload of the protective
beheben. device.
"Not - Aus" "Emergency stop"

Ursache: Reason:
1. Not- Aus- Taster am Bedienpult oder an der 1. Button emergency stop on the control panel or on the
Extrusionsachse betätigt. extrusion axis is activated.
2. Not- Aus Schützkombination ist abgefallen 2. Emergency stop relay is not activated.
Abhilfe: Remedy:
1. Not- Aus Taster entriegeln. 1. Unlock emergency stop button
2. Verdrahtung überprüfen. 2. Check wiring
- 25 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
"Endschalter" "Limit switch"

z.B. e.g.
! ! ! STÖRUNG ENDSCHALTER ! ! ! ! ! ! ERROR LIMIT SWITCH ! ! !
"Spannbacken“ " Clamping jaws”
*** Endschalter 2S3V und 2S3R *** ** Limit switch 2S3V and 2S3R **
*** sind gleichzeitig betätigt *** ** are activated at the same time **
Ursache : Reason :
Die beiden Endschalter "vor" und "zurück" einer Bewegung The 2 limit switches "forward" and "backward" of one
sind gleichzeitig betätigt. movement are activated at the same time.
1. Der nicht angefahrene Endschalter klemmt 1. The non-selected limit switch becomes mechanically
mechanisch oder schaltet elektrisch durch. stuck or switches trough electrically.
2. Der Eingang der Steuerung, auf den ein Endschalters 2. The input of the control to which a limit switch is wired
verdrahtet ist, hat Spannung, ohne daß der is alive without the limit switch being actuated.
Endschalter betätigt ist.
3. Das Betätigungselement des Endschalters ist falsch 3. The activating element of the limit switch is not
eingestellt. correctly set.
Abhilfe : Remedy :
1. Endschalter austauschen oder reparieren. 1. Exchange or repair limit switch
2. Elektrische Installation oder die Steuerung 2. Check electrical installation or control
überprüfen.
3. Betätigungselement einstellen. 3. Set activating element
"Betriebsartenanwahl" "Selection of operation mode"

Ursache : Reason :
Keine Betriebsart angewählt. No operation mode is selected
Abhilfe : Remedy :
Funktionstaste F4 oder F6 betätigen Press control key F4 or F6
- 26 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
„Kein Programm angewählt“ “No program selected”

Ursache. Reason:
Es ist kein gültiges Programm angewählt No valid program is selected.
Abhilfe: Remedy:
Funktionstaste F12 „Programmanwahl“ betätigen und Press function key F12 “Program selection” and select
Programm 01 oder 02 anwählen program 01 or 02.
"Heizung ausgeschaltet" "Heater switched off"

Ursache : Reason :
Bei Betriebsart "Automatik" ist die Heizung nicht The heater is not switched on in operation mode
eingeschaltet. "Automatic".
Abhilfe : Remedy :
Heizung mit Funktionstaste F3 einschalten oder in Switch on heater with control key F3 or turn to operation
Betriebsart "Hand" umschalten. mode "Hand".
"Anwärmtemperatur oben" "Upper heating"

„Anwärmtemperatur unten“ „Lower heating“
Ursache : Reason :
Die Ofentemperatur entspricht nicht dem eingestellten The heater temperature does not correspond to the
Sollwert. selected nominal value.
- Sollwert wurde noch nicht erreicht - Nominal value still not reached
- Sollwert wurde zu groß gewählt - Nominal value selected too high
- Heizung (teilweise) defekt - Heating (partially) defect
Abhilfe : Remedy :
- Warten bis Sollwert erreicht ist - Wait until nominal value is reached
- Sollwert herabsetzen - Reduce nominal value
- Heizelement(e) auswechseln - Exchange heating element(s)
"Programm- Änderung nicht möglich" "Program change not possible"

Ursache: Reason :
Es wurde in der Betriebsart "Automatik" versucht eine It had been attempted to execute a program change in the
Programm- Änderung durchzuführen. Automatic mode.
Abhilfe: Remedy :
Betriebsart "Hand" anwählen und Programm- Änderung Select “Hand” mode and change the program.
vornehmen.
- 27 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
"Grundstellungsfahren (F7) nicht möglich" "Normal Position (F7) not possible"

Ursache: Reason :
Die Funktionstaste F7 wurde in der Betriebsart "Automatik" The control key F7 has been activated in the “Automatic”
betätigt. mode.
Abhilfe: Remedy :
Betriebsart "Hand" anwählen und Grundstellungsfahren Select “Hand” mode first and then go to normal position.
durchführen.
"Automatik Start nicht möglich" "Automatic Start not possible"

Ursache: Reason :
Die Funktionstaste F5 wurde betätigt, wobei eine der The control key F5 has been pressed without one of the
nachfolgend beschriebenen Bedingungen nicht erfüllt war : following conditions beeing complied with :
1. Maschine in Betriebsart "Automatik" 1. Machine in operation mode "Automatic"

2. Maschine in Grundstellung 2. Machine in normal position
3. Anlage störungsfrei 3. No error detected
Abhilfe: Remedy :
1. Betriebsart "Automatik" wählen (F4) 1. Select “Automatic” mode (F4)
2. Maschine in Grundstellung bringen (Betriebsart 2. Select normal position
„Hand“ F6, Grundstellung F7). (“Hand” mode F6, normal position F7).
3. Störung an der Anlage beheben und Störmeldung 3. Eliminate error and acknowledge error (F8)
quittieren (F8)
"Zyklusüberwachung" "Time-out control"

z.B. e.g.
Zeitüberwachung Schrittkette 06 Time-out step chain 06
" Rohrtransport“ " Pipe conveying "
Schritt-Nr. : 02 Step-No. : 02
"Spannbacken vor (2S3V)" fehlt Check "Clamping jaws (2S3V)"
Ursache : Reason :
Die Bewegung (z.B. Spannbacken vor), die in einem The movement (e.g. clamping jaws forward) which is
bestimmten Schritt (z.B. 02) einer Schrittkette (z.B. 06 selected in a particular step (e.g. 02) of a step chain (e.g.
Rohrtransport) angesteuert wird, wird nicht innerhalb einer 06 pipe conveying) is not completed within a given time.
vorgegebenen Zeit abgeschlossen.
Hierfür gibt es verschiedene elektrische oder mechanische This may have different electrical or mechanical reasons,
Ursachen wie z.B. as for example:
- Endschalter einer Bewegungsrichtung defekt - Limit switch of one movement direction defect
- Endschalter falsch eingestellt - Setting error for limit switch
- Ventil defekt - Valve defect
Folge : Result :
Die Nächste Bewegung wird nicht eingeleitet, die The next movement is not initiated, scan time control unit
Zyklusüberwachung spricht an. reacts.
Abhilfe: Remedy :
Ursache ermitteln und beseitigen z.B. Find reason and eliminate it , as for example:
- Endschalter austauschen - exchange limit switch

- Endschalter neu justieren - adjust limit switch
- Ventil austauschen - exchange valve
- 28 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK-70/2A_509849_Masch.-Nr. 177
4.9.3 Quittieren von erfaßten Störungen 4.9.3 Acknowledgement of indicated errors
Wurde einmal vom Diagnosesystem eine Störung erkannt, An error once recognized by the diagnosis system is
so wird diese gespeichert, bis sie durch die Funktionstaste stored until it is reset by the function key F9 "Error
F9 "Störung quittieren" zurückgesetzt wird. acknowledgment".
Durch Betätigen der Funktionstaste F9 werden alle einmal By pressing the function key F9 all recognized signals
erfaßten Meldungen, die nicht mehr anstehen, gelöscht. which do not exist anymore are eliminated.
Weiterhin anstehende Meldungen lassen sich nicht Signals still existing cannot be acknowledged.
quittieren.
Steht keine aktuelle Störung mehr an, so erlöschen die If there is no error anymore, the yellow indicator F9 and
gelbe Anzeige F9 und die Störlampe 3H1. the flashlight 3H1 are not alight anymore.
- 29 -
KK-70_NR177.doc
KK 70/2 A
F4 F6 F8 F 11 F 12
Automatic Hand Special Times Program
Mode Mode functions setting selection
I I I I I
Mode: xxx Start: xxx 101 Chamfering unit ON/OFF 111 Status display press 1 Heating time Actual / Set Tool No. 'xxxxxxx'
102 112 Step - chain display 'ENT' 2 Cooling time Actual / Set
Tool: xxxxxxxxx 103 Reset part counter 113 Cycle - / Scan time for 3 Delay time "pipe inlet" Actual / Set ***** Selection by button ' + ' or ' - ' *****
No Errors !!! 104 Light check 114 Data read / write activ. 4 Timer No. 4 Actual / Set Selection ...: 00 No program selected
01 Sraight mandrel
02 Pipe conveying only
105 Operation test 5 Timer No. 5 Actual / Set
F 14 6 Timer No. 6 Actual / Set
Movement 7 Timer No. 7 Actual / Set
selection ***** for other timers press *****
01 Extrusion axis 1 11 Extrusion axis 2 02 Conveying unit 05 Pipe positioning 03 Clamping jaws
12 Back-up roller axis 1 13 Back-up roller axis 2 03 Clamping jaws 06 Heater 08 Tool carriage
14 Rollers "pipe inlet" 14 Rollers "pipe inlet" 31 Height adjustment 07 Start "heating time" 09 Start "colling time"
03 Clamping jaws 09 Cooling device "ON/OFF"
Unit Heating Automatic Automatic Hand Normal Special

Off / On Off / On Mode Start Mode Position functions
Error Error Times Program Temperature Movement Movement Movement
acknowled. display setting selection setting selection forward backward
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
5.0 ERSTE INBETRIEBNAHME 5.0 FIRST STARTING UP

======================== =====================
Siehe 4.0 See 4.0

-----------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1 AUSSERBETRIEBNAHME 5.1 STOPPING

====================== ============
Achtung: Attention:
Bei allen Arbeiten, die die Observe respective stopping pro-

Aufstellung, den Betrieb, Umrüst- cedure when carrying out operations
ung, Anpassungen, Wartungen und concerning erection, operation,
Reparatur betreffen, sind die hier retooling, adaptations, maintenance
vorgeschriebenen Ausschaltprozedu- work and repair.
ren zu beachten.
-Mit Schalter "Steuerung Ein/Aus" -Switch off control using the switch
Steuerung ausschalten. "Control on/off".
-Hauptschalter am Schaltschrank -Switch off main switch at

ausschalten. control cabinet.
Schalter mit einem Einhängechloß Lock switch by means of a sus-
sichern. pended lock.
-Druckluftanschluß und Wasseran- -Close compressed air connection

schluß schließen. and water connection.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 EINRICHTEN 5.2 SETTING UP

============== ==============
Die beiden Endschalter (2S----, Set both limit switches at the

2S----) in den Einlaufrinnen inlet unit (2S----, 2S----) to
auf 3 m bzw. 6 m Länge einstellen. a length of 3m respectively 6 m
Rohrpositionierung: Pipe positioning:
Die Anwärmtiefe wird mittels einer Set preheating length by means

Stellschraube an der Positions- of a regulating screw located
einheit eingestellt. on the positioning unit.
Höhenverstellung: Vertical adjustment:
Das Transportsystem kann mit einem The conveying system can be

Handrad an die Mitte der Muff- und adjusted according to the center
Heizstation angepaßt werden. of the socketing and heating
station with the help of a hand
wheel.
Dazu schließt man die Heizstation, For this purpose, the heating
legt ein Rohr mit dem entsprechen- station will be closed and
den Durchmesser vor die Heizung a pipe with the corresonding
und hebt oder senkt das Transport- diameter is placed in front of
gestell so lange bis die Mitte von the heater. Then the conveying
Rohr und Heizung übereinstimmen. unit is vertically moved until
the center points of pipe and
heating station do correspond.
Heiz- und Kühlzeit einstellen: Setting of heating and cooling

Time:
Die Werte der beiliegenden Tabelle Please take the corresponding

entnehmen und einstellen. values from the enclosed table
Vorgehensweise siehe Punkt 4.3.2 und set them as needed.
Proceedure see it. 4.3.2
Anwärmtermperatur einstellen: Setting of preheating

Temperature:
Die Werte der beiliegenden Tabelle Please take the corresponding

entnehmen und an den Temperatur- values from the enclosed table
reglern einstellen. and set them on the temperature
regulators.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
5.3 AUTOMATIKABLAUF 5.3 AUTOMATIC PROCESS

=================== =====================
Siehe 4.5 See 4.5

-----------------------------------------------------------------------
5.4 UMRÜSTEN 5.4 Retooling
============= =============
Folgende Teile sind zu wechseln: Following items have to be

exchanged:
2 Stück Muffdorne 2 pcs socketing mandrels

2 Stück Rohrhalteadapter 2 pcs clamping unit adaptor
4 Stück Heizschalenadapter 4 pcs heater inserts
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
5.5 EINSTELLWERTE 5.5 SETTING VALUES

================= ==================
Folgende Tabellen basieren auf The following tables are based on

Erfahrungs- und Versuchswerten. emperical and experimental values.
Sie sollen als Richtwerte zum Ein- They shall serve as standard
stellen der Anlage dienen. values for setting the unit.
Änderungen des Rohstoffes, der Changes in raw material, ambient

Umgebungstemperatur und des Kühl- temperature and coolant may re-
mediums können eine Anpassung quire an adaptation of the values.
dieser Werte zur Folge haben.
Es wird empfohlen, den Zyklus der It is recommended to adapt the

Muffenformanlage dem der Extru- cycle of the socketing unit to
sionslinie anzupassen. the one of the extrusion line.
Einstellwerte
Setting values
Maschine: Heizung: Kontaktanwärmung

Machine type: KK 70 2/A Heating system: Contact heater
Werkzeug: Klebedorn Kühlsystem: gekühlte Luft

Tool system: Streight mandrel Cooling system: cooling air
Rohr: d1 X s1 Wandverdickung: sv
Pipe: Wallthickening: mm
Extr.Leistung Extr.Geschwind.:
Extr.output: kg/h Extr.speed: m/min
Rohrlänge: Zykluszeit erf.:

Pipe length: m Cycletime requ. sec
Pos. Einstellungen Settings real
1 Anwärmung : Heating:
2 Anwärmtiefe Heating depth mm
3 Anwärmzeit Heating time sec
4
5 Kontaktanwärmung Contact heater
6 Außenheizung oben Outer heater upper °C
7 Außenheizung unten Outer heater lower °C
8
9
10 Muffen: Socketing:
11 Kühlzeit Cooling time sec
12
13 °C
14 Wassertemperatur Water temperature °C
15
16
17
18
19
20 Taktzeit sec Cycle time sec
21 Muffleistung Muffen/h Output rate sockets/h
KK_70_2_A_Standard.XLS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
6.0 WARTUNG 6.0 MAINTENANCE

=========== ===============
Achtung Attention
Bei Demontage von Sicherheitsein- Stop the machine exactly in con-

richtungen während Umrüstung, Repa- formmity with Par.5.1, when dis-
ratur und Wartung ist die Maschine mounting safety equipment during
genau nach Punkt 5.1 außer Betrieb retooling, repair or maintenance
zu setzen. Unmittelbar nach Ab- operations. Remount safety equip-
schluß der Umrüstungs-, Wartungs-, ment immediately after finishing
Reparaturarbeiten hat die Remontage the retooling, maintenance or re-
der Sicherheitseinrichtung zu er- pair work.
folgen.
Die richtige Pflege und Wartung der Proper care and maintenance of the
Maschine sowie rechtzeitiges Erken- machine as well as early detection
nen und Beseitigen von Störungen and elemination of errors and da-
und Schäden gewährleisten Einsatz- mages contribute to keep it in a
bereitschaft, verhüten Unfälle und status ready for operation, to
ersparen später zeitraubende und protect it from accidents and to
teure Reparaturen. save time-consuming and expensive
repair work later.
Wöchentlich durchzuführende Operations to be carried out

Arbeiten: weekly
-Allgemeine Reinigung der gesamten -General cleaning of the whole

Anlage. unit.
-Alle wichtigen Klemm- und Schraub- -Inspect all important clamping

verbindungen auf festen Sitz über- and screwing connections for
prüfen. proper seat.
-Schalter, Taster, Steckverbind- -Inspect switches, buttons, plug

ungen und Kabel der elektrischen connections and cables of electri-
Ausrüstung auf einwandfreien Zu- cal equipment for proper condi-
stand überprüfen. tion.
- Wasserzulauf, -Water inlet,

Schmutzfänger Sieb reinigen dirt trap clean sieve
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
6.1 SCHMIERANWEISUNG 6.1 LUBRCATION DIRECTION

==================== ========================
Achtung Attention
Bei Demontage von Sicherheitsein- Stop the machine exactly in con-

richtungen während Umrüstung, Repa- formmity with Par.5.1, when dis-
ratur und Wartung ist die Maschine mounting safety equipment during
genau nach Punkt 5.1 außer Betrieb retooling, repair or maintenance
zu setzen. Unmittelbar nach Ab- operations. Remount safety equip-
schluß der Umrüstung Wartungs- oder ment immediately after finishing
Reparaturarbeiten hat die Remontage the retooling, maintenance or re-
der Sicherheitseinrichtung zu er- pair work.
folgen.
Schmierung: Lubrication:
-Kettentriebe 1x wöchentlich ölen. -Oil chain drives 1x weekly.
-Getriebemotoren nach Vorschrift -Geared motors acc. to prescrip-

der Hersteller (siehe 6.2). tions by manufacturer (See 6.2).
Alle Lagerstellen an der Anlage All bearing points of the unit are
sind entweder dauergeschmiert provided with permanent greasing
oder wartungsfrei. or free of maintenance.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG 6.2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

FREMDTEILE SUBSUPPLIED COMPONENTS
===================== ==========================
topline Ma nua l
0 91
PCS
for the operating consoles

PCS 009, 090, 095, 095.1, 095.2
PCS 009plus, 090plus, 095plus
The operating consoles PCStopline offer the highest

degree on perfection, unparalled in design and function.
PCStopline keeps every-thing under control - from the
PCSmini to the PCSmaxi, with a superior operating
culture and an unlimited setup freedom.
PCS, the first programmable operating console with a
large selection of "ready-to-use" opera-ting functions or
operating tools which are simply selected via instruc-
tions. You can realize even the most unuasal operating
requests at ease and in a minimum of time.
Today this way and tomorrow that way

One standard hardware for virtually thousands of diffe-
rent operating situations. Without ex-tensive wiring and
dozens of I/O points.
PCS for operating. What else?

reg 10215/0899
Version 06/08.99
Systeme Lauer GmbH & Co KG
Systeme Lauer GmbH & Co KG
Postfach 1465
D-72604 Nürtingen
Operator reference manual: PCS 091

Version: August 1999
Person responsible: Zoch
Operating manuals, reference manuals, and software are protected by copyright. All rights remain reserved. The copying,
duplication, translation, conversion in the whole or into parts are not permitted. An exception applies to making a copy of
the software for the own use.
We reserve the right to make changes to the reference manual without prior notice.
We can not guarantee the accuracy of the programs and data stored on the diskette and the fault-free state of this
information.
Since diskettes represent manipulatable data media, we can only guarantee the physical completeness. The responsibility
is limited to a replacement.
At any time, we welcome suggestions for improvements and remarks on errors.
The agreement also applies to the special appendices to this reference manual.
Microsoft, MS, MS DOS, Windows, Windows 95, Windows NT and the Windows logo are either registered trademark or
trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and/or other countries.
SIMATIC and STEP are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG.
The remaining designations in this document can be brand names whos use by third parties for their purposes can violate
the rights of the owners.
0-2 © Systeme Lauer GmbH & Co KG Kelterstr. 59 D-72669 Unterensingen Phone +49 7022 96 60-0 Fax +49 7022 96 60-103
General overview
Operate and monitor

Control
Machine
© Systeme Lauer GmbH & Co KG Kelterstr. 59 D-72669 Unterensingen Phone +49 7022 96 60-0 Fax +49 7022 96 60-103 0-3
Table of contents
General overview 0-3

Quality and support ..................................... 0-7
Manual Organization for the operating consoles and PLC drivers ..................................... 0-8
Important user notes ..................................... 0-9
Safety regulations ................................... 0-10
Function overview of the operating consoles PCS 009, 090, 095, 095.1, 095.2 ................................... 0-11
Function overview of operating panels PCS 009plus, 090plus, 095plus ................................... 0-12
View of the micro operator panel PCS 009 ................................... 0-13
View of the mini operator panel PCS 090 ................................... 0-14
View of the mini operator panel PCS 095, PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2 ................................... 0-15
View of the micro operator panel PCS 009plus ................................... 0-16
View of the mini operator panel PCS 090plus ................................... 0-18
View of the mini operator panel PCS 095plus ................................... 0-20
Programming and communication of the PCS topline ................................... 0-22
Programming and communication of the PCS plus ................................... 0-23
Functions and tools of the PCS topline ................................... 0-24
Functions and tools of the PCS plus ................................... 0-25
The variables of the PCS ................................... 0-26
The variable formats of the PCS ................................... 0-27
Nominal Value Input - Simple and Straight Forward with Menu Technique ................................... 0-31
Automux PCS 809 for the Siemens PLC Range ................................... 0-32
The character table of the PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1 ................................... 0-33
The character table der PCS 095.2 and PCS plus ................................... 0-34
The simple communication principle of the PCS ................................... 0-35
1 General references 1-1

1.1 General procedures ..................................... 1-1
1.2 Equipment and accessories required ..................................... 1-2
2 Operation and display elements 2-1

2.1 Keys ..................................... 2-1
2.2 Incription field ..................................... 2-2
2.3 DIL switch (not PCS plus) ..................................... 2-3
2.4 LED displays ..................................... 2-4
2.5 Display and contrast adjustment ..................................... 2-6
2.6 Acoustic signal ..................................... 2-6
3 Connections 3-1
3.1 Operating voltage ..................................... 3-1
3.2 Serial interfaces ..................................... 3-1
3.3 RS 232/TTY interface ..................................... 3-1
3.3.1 Configuration/programming ..................................... 3-1
3.3.2 Communication ..................................... 3-2
3.4 RS 422/485 interface ..................................... 3-3
4 Variables 4-1
4.1 Variables format BIT ..................................... 4-2
4.2 Variables format STRING ..................................... 4-3
4.3 Variables format CSTRING ..................................... 4-4
4.4 Variables format BCD ..................................... 4-5
4.5 Variables format BIN ..................................... 4-7
4.6 Variables format WORD ................................... 4-10
4.7 Variables format ASCII ................................... 4-12
4.8 Timer ................................... 4-14
4.9 Internal variable formats ................................... 4-15
4.9.1 Internal variables of PCS 009plus, 090plus, 095plus ................................... 4-16
4.10 Treatment of variables ................................... 4-17
Table of contents
5 Texts 5-1
5.1 Text groups ..................................... 5-1
5.2 Administration of priorities ..................................... 5-2
5.3 Default text priority ..................................... 5-4
5.4 Daily history priority (PCS plus only) ..................................... 5-4
5.5 Menu priority ..................................... 5-4
5.6 Recipe priority (PCS plus only) ..................................... 5-5
5.7 Message priorities ..................................... 5-5
5.8 Help priority ..................................... 5-5
5.9 Error priority ..................................... 5-6
6 Menus 6-1
6.1 Build-up of the menus ..................................... 6-2
6.2 Variables in the menu ..................................... 6-3
6.3 Arrow keys in menus ..................................... 6-4
6.4 Permissible keys in menus ..................................... 6-5
7 Message texts 7-1

7.1 Message priorities ..................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Storage behaviour - message block 0 ..................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Storage behavior of message blocks 1-7 (PCS plus devices only) ..................................... 7-2
7.2 Cancel modes ..................................... 7-3
7.3 Display behaviour ..................................... 7-3
7.4 Variables in message texts ..................................... 7-3
7.5 Diagnostic text ..................................... 7-4
8 Date/time (PCS plus only) 8-1
9 Softkey bar 9-1

9.1 Softkey actions ..................................... 9-1
9.2 Example of a softkey bar and softkey actions ..................................... 9-2
10 Recipes (PCS plus only) 10-1

10.1 Introduction ................................... 10-1
10.2 Operation ................................... 10-1
10.3 Selecting recipes ................................... 10-2
10.4 Programming ................................... 10-3
11 Daily history (PCS plus only) 11-1

11.1 Introduction ................................... 11-1
11.2 Important details ................................... 11-1
11.3 Operation ................................... 11-1
12 BIOS setup and off-line menus (only PCS plus) 12-1

12.1 Overview ................................... 12-1
12.2 Calling up the BIOS setup menu ................................... 12-1
12.3 Leaving the BIOS setup menu ................................... 12-1
12.4 Operation ................................... 12-1
12.5 Description of the menu pages ................................... 12-2
12.6 Off-line menu ................................... 12-3
13 System error messages 13-1

13.1 Firmware messages ................................... 13-1
13.2 BIOS messages ................................... 13-2
13.3 Communication error ................................... 13-3
Table of contents
14 Activation of the PCS micro, mini and the PCS plus 14-1
14.1 Overview ................................... 14-2
14.2 System area ................................... 14-6
14.3 Key bits ................................... 14-6
14.4 PCS status ................................... 14-7
14.5 LED status, display and storage behaviour ................................. 14-10
14.6 Command word ................................. 14-12
14.7 Message area, Message block 0 ................................. 14-15
14.8 Extension area ................................. 14-16
14.9 Message area, message block 1-7 (only for PCS plus) ................................. 14-19
14.10 Variables area ................................. 14-22
15 Printer (PCS 095, PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2 und PCS plus) 15-1
15.1 Printer parameters ................................... 15-1
15.2 Printer status ................................... 15-1
15.3 Hardcopy ................................... 15-2
15.4 Printing of messages ................................... 15-2
15.5 Connector assignment RS 232/TTY ................................... 15-2
16 Technical data 16-1

16.1 Datas PCS 009 and PCS 009plus ................................... 16-1
16.2 Datas PCS 090 and PCS 090plus ................................... 16-3
16.3 Datas PCS 095, PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2 and PCS 095plus ................................... 16-5
16.4 Memory organization ................................... 16-7
16.5 Programming cable PCS 733 ................................... 16-8
16.6 Maintenance ................................... 16-8
16.7 Using the PCS in an Ex area ................................... 16-9
Index I-1
Quality and support
In our company, quality comes first. From the electronics component up to the finished
device, the quality assurance tests competently and comprehensively.
National and international test standards (ISO, TÜV, Germanischer Lloyd) are the basis.
Within 48 hours, every device passes a 100% check and continuous test under worst
case conditions at changing temperatures (0... 50°C) and test voltages.
A guarantee for maximum quality.
Our products not only feature a maximum economic efficiency and reliability but also a
comprehensive complete service.
You not only receive demo devices but we rather make specialists available who support
you in person with your first application.
Qualified user consultation by competent sales engineers is obvious for us.

Our support is for you for the side with advice and deed every day.
We set up training programs and technical training for you in our modern training
center or alternatively also in your house.
Request the current training catalog.
From the consultation up to the user support, from the hotline up to the service, from
the reference manual up to the training an all covering and individual service for the
entire product line is waiting for you.
Whenever you need us, we are there for you:

dynamically, creatively and enormously efficiently. With the entire experience of a world-
wide successful enterprise.
Telephone 07022/9660 -222, -132, -231, -230

eMail: support@systeme-lauer.de
Web site: www.systeme-lauer.de
Manual Organization for the operating consoles and PLC drivers
1 Manual PC
PCSS 091
for the operating consoles
PCS 009, 090, 095, 095.1, 095.2
1 2 2 Introduction PC SPRO
PCSPRO
Setup software for the
PCS 009, 090, 095, 095.1, 095.2
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
You need the PCS 091 Technical Manual for

the operating consoles PCS 009, 009plus,
090, 090plus, 095, 095.1, 095.2, 095plus 3 Appendix to PC PCS S 091
(1). Handling software
PCS 91.xxx
For the setup of the operating consoles you
need the setup software PCSPRO. We supply
the software with a brief introduction. The 3
extensive help system of PCSPRO supports
you directly on-screen (2).
Use the appropriate driver for easy communication of the PCS with your programmable control-ler. As an appendix to the PCS
091 manual you receive a detailed driver description with the handling module which is delivered on a 3.5" floppy disk (3).
The following order numbers apply to the various driver appendixes*):
PCS 91.ABB for ABB-PLC PCS 91.KLM for Klöckner-Moeller-PLC
PCS 91.AEG for AEG-PLC PCS 91.MAT for Matsushita-PLC
PCS 91.ALB for Allen Bradley-PLC PCS 91.MIT for Mitsubishi-PLC
PCS 91.B&R for Bernecker & Rainer-PLC PCS 91.OMR for Omron-PLC
PCS 91.BOS for Bosch-PLC PCS 91.PDP for Profibus DP
PCS 91.CEG for Cegelec-PLC PCS 91.PHI for Philips-PLC
PCS 91.CRO for Crouzet-PLC PCS 91.SAI for Saia-PLC
PCS 91.EBE for Eberle-PLC PCS 91.SAM for Samsung-PLC
PCS 91.FES for Festo-PLC PCS 91.SEL for Selectron-PLC
PCS 91.GEF for GE-Fanuc-PLC PCS 91.SIE for Siemens-PLC
PCS 91.HIT for Hitachi-PLC PCS 91.S7 for Siemens MPI
PCS 91.IBS for Interbus S PCS 91.HIT for Sprecher & Schuh-PLC
PCS 91.IPC for IPC-PLC PCS 91.TEC for Tecomat-PLC
PCS 91.IZU for Izumi/Idec-PLC PCS 91.TMQ for Telemecanique-PLC
PCS 91.TOS for Toshiba-PLC
*) Driver state June 1998
Important user notes
The present manual applies to all devices unless explicit reference to devices of the PC
PCSS plus series is
made.
To distinguish between the series, the following assignment applies:
PC
PCSS topline = PC
PCSS 009, PC
PCSS 090, PC S 095, PC
PCS PCSS 095.1, PC
PCSS 095.2
PC
PCSS plus = PC
PCSS 009plus, PC S 090plus, PC
PCS PCSS 095plus
The symbols and ideograms shown below are used in this manual:
Warning!
Possibly dangerous situation which can cause death and most serious injuries.
Caution!
Possibly dangerous situation which can cause light and less serious injuries.
Attention!
Possibly harmful situation which can cause damage to the product or its environment.
Mechanical pressure causes damage to the product.
Information concerning safety when using the devices in an ex area.
Information and notes which must additionally be observed.
Text conventions
The information given on the pages below refers to the functions of the PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2
and PCS plus devices. You need the PCSPRO project software to create the user program or to configure the PCS.
The PCS communicates using a word range called transfer range (word 0 .. max. word 255) that, depending on the PLC
system used, can be configurable. To make the wording in the manual more neutral, the words have been designated W0
.. W255. The appropriate PCS 91.xxx driver manual provides information on how to translate these words for the appropriate
PLC system.
The following symbols and abbreviations have been used in the present manual:
$ is an abbreviation for the hexadecimal representation of a number value.
[+] indicates a key on the PCS, in this case the plus key.
Safety regulations
This reference manual contains the most important remarks in order to safely operate the device.
This operators guide, particularly the safety remarks are to be noted by all persons working with the device.
Furthermore, the rules and regulations for the accident prevention applying to the application location are to be observed.
Use as directed. The device is designed for the application in the industrial area.
The device is manufactured to the state of the art and the official safeguarding regulations. Nevertheless, due to the
application, dangers or impairments can result to the machine or to material assets.
The device meets the requirements of the EMC guidelines and harmonized European standards. Any hardware-related
modification of the system can influence the EMC behavior.
The device may not be used without special protective measures in the hazardous area and in plants requiring a special
monitoring.
Do not heat up the buffer batteries. Danger of explosion. Serious burnings can be the result.
The installation and operation may only be performed by trained personnel.
The operating voltage of the device may only be in the specified ranges.
You find information on this on the type plate and in the specifications of this reference manual.
Function overview of the operating consoles PCS 009, 090, 095, 095.1, 095.2
Machine operation using 8 (PC

(PCSS 009, PC
PCSS 090) or 16 (PC S 095, PC
(PCS PCSS 095.1) freely assignable keys. These F01 to F08/F16
labeled keys can be application specifically inscribed and are provided to the controller as status bits.
Machine operation using 4 (PC
(PCSS 009), 16 (PC
(PCSS 090) or 32 (PC
(PCSS 095, PC
PCSS 095.1) freely usable LEDs. These can be assigned
the indicating states ON, DARK, FLASHING, and INVERSE FLASHING. A green and a yellow LED is allocated to each
function key.
Display of fixed texts with integrated variable values. The values can be represented selectably as numerical values or in
text format.
Representation of the contents of 233 words as variables. In addition, 650 external variables can be defined. 9 variable
formats (from bit to timer) are available.
3 text groups
groups, 128 operating texts as menu and idle texts, 128 message texts with up to 332 lines, 5 help texts with up
to 32 lines.
127 menus with 255 menu nodes each for any menu configurations.
4 different deletion modes
modes. For every message, 1 of 4 possible deletion modes can be selected.
Modification of the content of any word within the transfer area. Using the integrated editor all possible representation
formats can be setup.
7 priority levels for idle text up to help text, 3 message priorities Information, Warning, Fault. This working-condition
related management significantly off-loads the programmable controller program.
Monitoring of rising or falling edges of 128 consecutive bits. The assignment of texts, the manage-ment of 3 priority
levels (Information, Warnings, and Faults), keeping the timely sequence as much as possible, organization of the FIRST
MESSAGE, LAST MESSAGE, and CYCLIC DISPLAY, the individually settable dele-tion behaviour, and the representation
formats NORMAL and FLASHING are tasks which are managed by the PCS by itself.
Communication monitoring (wire-break, short circuit)
circuit). A very efficient data transfer is secured by the integrated priority
management in connection with the intelligent package length optimization, the high thruput rate and the fault tole-
rance.
Function overview of operating panels PCS 009plus, 090plus, 095plus
In addition to the standard functions, the PC

PCSS plus offers the following features:
Print function (RS 232) for all devices of the PCS plus series.
Display with international character set. The character set of the PCS plus also contains (like the PCS 095.2) international
characters.
Extended data record memory
memory.. The PCS plus features twice as much memory for each data record (max. 64k). Or you can
choose to work with a larger number of data records than before (e.g. for multi-lingual data record). In this case, 32k of
memory are available per data record.
Recipe memory management. The PCS plus series has a recipe memory; up to 127 recipe texts can be created. The recipe
data can be edited in the PCS and they can be transferred to the PLC (downloaded) or from the PLC (uploaded) to the
PCS. An individual help text is available for the recipe management.
Software clock. A programmable software clock (with date) is available. Time and date are sent to the PLC (upon request).
It is also possible to have the PLC update the time (useful if the PLC has a hardware real-time clock).
Extended off-line menu. DIL switches are no longer required to set up the device; instead, an off-line menu is used.
off-line
1024 message texts of which the first 128 messages can be used as in the past whereas the other 896 messages are
divided into 7 blocks of 128 messages each. The temporal sequence is not stored for the additional messages.
Daily history with 50 memory locations for displaying the last messages that are no longer active (the created message
texts are shown).
Doubleword binary variables can be scaled as an option.
Note!
The PCS plus series does not feature an integrated buzzer. This means that no warning sound is heard if an
error message is issued.
TTY operation is not possible during printing.
View of the micro operator panel PCS 009
Operator panel PC
PCSS 009
1 = LCD-Display, 4 lines each with 20 characters
2 = Function keys (also as soft keys) F1...F8 with a greem
message LED
1 3 = 10 key keyboard for nominal value input

6
4 = cursor and control keys for menus and nominal value
input
5 = Switch key (Shift key) for function keys (F1..F4, F5..F9)
2 6 = Important information LEDs on the PCS status
5 7 = Reset key
8 = DIL switch for the PCS 009
9 = Volume for acoustic signal
aJ = Serial interface RS 232/TTY for communication
3 4 aA = Serial interface RS 422/RS 485 for communication

aB = Operating voltage terminals
aC = Fuse with reserve fuse
aC
aA aJ
aB
View of the mini operator panel PCS 090
2 5
3
4
Operator PPanel
anel PC
PCSS 090 7 = DIL-switch for the PCS 090
1 = LCD-display, 2 lines each with 40 characters 8 = Volume for acoustic signal
2 = Function keys (also as soft keys) F1...F8 with a yellow 9 = Serial interface RS 232/TTY for the communication
and green message LED aJ = Serial interface RS 422/RS 485 for the communication
3 = 10 key keyboard for nominal value input aA = Operating voltage terminals
4 = Cursor keys with LED and cursor control keys for menus aB = Fuse with reserve fuse
and nominal value input
5 = Important information LED's on the PCS status
6 = Reset key
9
aJ
aB
aA
View of the mini operator panel PCS 095, PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2
Operator PPanel
anel PC
PCSS 095
(with 1 data set)
Operator PPanel
anel PC
PCSS 095.1
1
(with 4 data sets for different machines and
languages)
1 = LCD-display, 4 lines each with 40 characters
2 6
2 = Function keys (also soft keys) F1...F8 each with
a yellow and a green message LED
3 = Function keys F9...F16 each with a yellow and a
green mesage LED
3
4 = Ten key keyboard for nominal value input
5 = Cursor key with LED and control key for menu
4 and nominal value input
7 = Reset key
8 = DIL switch for the PCS 095
9 = Volume for acoustic signals
aJ = Serial interface RS 232/TTY for the communi-
cation
aA = Serial interface RS 422/RS 485 for the communi-
cation
aB = Serial interface RS 232/TTY for the programming
7 and for the PCS 095.1 as Printer interface
aC = Operating voltage terminals
8 aD = Fuse with reserve fuse
aB aA aJ
aD
aC
View of the micro operator panel PCS 009plus
Operator PPanel
anel PC
PCSS 009plus
2 = Function keys (also as soft keys) F1...F8 with
1 a greem message LED
6
3 = 10 key keyboard for nominal value input
4 = cursor and control keys for menus and no-
2 minal value input
5
5 = Switch key (Shift key) for function keys
(F1..F4, F5..F9)
6 = Important information LEDs on the PCS status
3 4
6 7 6 7
aJ aJ
9 9
8 8
Backside of the PC
PCSS 009plus.m Backside of the PC
PCSS 009plus.p
6 = Serial interface RS 232 for projecting/ 6 = Serial interface RS 232 for projecting/
printing (9pin female connector) printing (9pin female connector)
7 = MPI-interface (9pin female connector) 7 = Profibus-interface (9pin female connec-

tor)
8 = Operating voltage terminals
9 = Fuse
9 = Fuse
aJ = Communication-LED (without function)
aJ = Communication-LED
View of the micro operator panel PCS 009plus
Backside of the PC
PCSS 009plus.s
6 = Serial interface RS 232 for projecting/printing
(9pin female connector)
7 = Serial interface RS 232/TTY for projecting/
communication (25pin female connector) 7
6 8
8 = Serial interface RS 422/RS 485 (15pin male
connector)
aJ = Fuse
Warning!
When the cable PCS 733 is in use (with aJ
9
9- and 25pin connectors) never connect
both connectors simultaneous!
Backside of the PC
PCSS 009plus.i
aJ
7 = Serial Interbus-interface (Remote-Bus OUT) 9
6 7 8
8 = Serial Interbus-interface (Remote-Bus IN)
(9pin male connector)
9 = DIL-switch to adjust the size of the transfer
area
aJ = Bus-LEDs
aA = Operating voltage terminals
aB = Fuse aB
aA
View of the mini operator panel PCS 090plus
Operator PPanel
anel PC
PCSS 090plus
1
2 = Function keys (also as soft keys) F1...F8 with
a green message LED
2 5 4 = cursor and control keys for menus and no-
minal value input
5 = Important information LEDs on the PCS status
3
4
Backside of the PC
PCSS 090plus.m
7 = MPI-interface (9pin female connector)
9 = Fuse
aJ = Communication-LED (without function)
9
6 7 8
aJ
Backside of the PC
PCSS 090plus.p
7 = Profibus-interface (9pin female connector)
9 = Fuse
aJ = Communication-LED
9
6 aJ 7 8
Backside of the PC
PCSS 090plus.s
7 = Serial interface RS 232/TTY for projecting/
communication (25pin female connector)
8 = Serial interface RS 422/RS 485 (15pin male
connector)
aJ = Fuse
aJ
6 7 8 9
Warning!
When the cable PCS 733 is in use (with
9- and 25pin connectors) never connect
both connectors simultaneous!
Backside of the PC
PCSS 009plus.i
7 = Serial Interbus-interface (Remote-Bus OUT)
(9pin female connector) 9
8 = Serial Interbus-interface (Remote-Bus IN)
(9pin male connector) aJ
9 = DIL-switch to adjust the size of the transfer

area
aJ = Bus-LEDs aB
6 7 8 aA
aB = Fuse
Bedienkonsole PC
PCSS 095plus
1 2 = Function keys (also as soft keys) F1...F16 with a
green and a yellow message LED each time
2 6 4 = cursor and control keys for menus and nominal
value input
5 = Cursor key with LED and control key for menu
and nominal value input
4
5
6 7 6 aJ 7 9
9
aJ 8 8
Backside of the PC
PCSS 095plus.m Backside of the PC
PCSS 095plus.p
6 = Serial interface RS 232 for projecting/printing (9pin 6 = Serial interface RS 232 for projecting/printing (9pin
female connector) female connector)
7 = MPI-interface (9pin female connector) 7 = Profibus-interface (9pin female connector)
8 = Operating voltage terminals 8 = Operating voltage terminals
9 = Fuse 9 = Fuse
aJ = Communication-LED (without function) aJ = Communication-LED
9
aJ
6 7 8 aJ 6 7 8 aB
9 aA
Backside of the PC
PCSS 095plus.s Backside of the PC
PCSS 009plus.i
6 = Serial interface RS 232 for projecting/printing (9pin 6 = Serial interface RS 232 for projecting/printing (9pin
female connector) female connector)
7 = Serial interface RS 232/TTY for projecting/ 7 = Serial Interbus-interface (Remote-Bus OUT) (9pin
communication (25pin female connector) female connector)
8 = Serial interface RS 422/RS 485 (15pin male con- 8 = Serial Interbus-interface (Remote-Bus IN) (9pin male
nector) connector)
9 = Operating voltage terminals 9 = DIL-switch to adjust the size of the transfer area
aJ = Fuse aJ = Bus-LEDs
Warning! aB = Fuse
When the cable PCS 733 is in use (with 9- and
25pin connectors) never connect both con-
nectors simultaneous!
Programming and communication of the PCS topline
TTY / RS 232 / RS 422 / RS 485

é é
Communication
with
Adapter cable (SPS specific)
Programming, simulation
with
Programming cable PCS 733
PC-MSDOS, DRDOS PG 7nn (MSDOS)
Programming with the software

PCSPRO
Programming and communication of the PCS plus
TTY/RS 232/RS 422/RS 485/

Profibus DP/MPI/Interbus
é é
Communication
with
Adapter cable (SPS specific)
Programming, simulation
with
Programming cable PCS 733
PC-MSDOS, DRDOS PG 7nn (MSDOS)
Programming with the software

PCSPRO
Functions and tools of the PCS topline
PCS is a universal operating concept for a variety of PLC systems. The operating panels come with a large number of
predefined operating and monitoring functions and tools:
8 or 16 function keys with 2 yellow/green warning lights

(OFF, ON, FLASHING).
650 switches with blank labelling for functions and
switch setting.
Key lock or code lock for assigning different access au-
thorizations.
233 selectors with up to 256 switch settings with blank
labelling for functions and switch setting.
Digital BCD/BIN-nominal value input with ten key key-
board or ± key: 233 nominal value variables for 4 digit
BCD or 5 Digit BIN or 116 nominal value variables for 8
digit BCD or 10 digit BIN.
127 menus with max. 255 nodes or menu items. At
PCS 090 each node is written into a 2 line menu text
(with max. 8 variables) and at PCS 095 into a 4 line
menu text (with max. 16 variables).
For menu and default texts there are 128, 2(4) line op-
erating texts combined with 8 (16) variables.
Notation and alteration of the bit configuration of a
word in the PCS is possible at any time.
Actual value analog indicator.
Actual value digital indicator selection of up to 5 digits
(0...65.535) or 10 digits (0...4.294.967.295).
128 message lines, 32 lines combined with 128 variables
in 3 message priorities, with 2 indicator and 4 deletion
modes.
Automatic change of the nominal and actual values of
the BCD/BIN in decimal and back with algebraic sign,
limits and scale.
Analog nominal value input
Digital ASCII nominal value input with ± key: 28 nominal
value variables with 16 or 112 nominal value variables
with 4 characters.
128 soft key bars
255 soft key actions
For each of the Default, Menu, Note and Trouble priori-
ties one help text is available.
Functions and tools of the PCS plus
The PCS plus series offers the following additional functions:
127 recipe texts with up to 32 lines and up to 128 va-

riables. 8 kbytes (PCS 090plus) and 32 kbytes (PCS
095plus) of recipe data memory.
Upload, download and printing of recipes.
A help text is available for the recipe priority.
Software clock with date, day of the week and time.
Correctly indicates all leap years and is fully year-2000
compatible.
Additional 896 message texts (1024 in total) with up to
32 lines and up to 128 variables.
Daily history with 50 memory locations for displaying the
last messages that are no longer active (the created
message texts are shown).
As an option, doubleword binary variables can be scaled.
The variables of the PCS
Machines produce different parts. Therefore quick and selective alterations of finished sizes and functions (variables) are
especially important for increased flexibility.
The PCS features a convenient method of processing the variables. 650 external varia-bles (freely definable) and 6 internal
variables are supervised from the PCS.
The value of the external variables are stoped in the words 30...255. The PCS differentiates between actual values and
nominal values:
ACTUAL: The value in the word is the actual value. The PCS can only display the value.
NOMINAL: The standing value in the word is the nominal value. The value can be displayed and changed by the PCS.
NOMINAL VALUE-P: The private value in the word is a nominal value. The PCS can display the value. It can be changed only
if this is allowed by the word 14 bit 7 = log 1 (key switch or DIL-switch 1...4 on the rear side of the PCS). When the bit 7 of
word 14 = log 0, the display of the actual value follows.
Internal variables PCS topline External variables

NAME CONTENTS FORMAT LENGTH ACT/NOM FORMAT, LENGTH
ZP NUMBER OF INFORMATIONS BIN 3 ACT BIT variable max. length 40 Characters
ZQ NUMBER OF WARNINGS BIN 3 ACT STRING variable max. length 40 Characters
ZR NUMBER OF FAULTS BIN 3 ACT CSTRING variable max. length 40 Characters
ZT MENU NUMBER BIN 2 ACT
ZV SCROLL TIME BIN 2 NOM WORD variable KM, KH, KY: length: 17, 4, 7 Characters
ZX INTERFACE FAULTS BIN 2 ACT ASCII variable max. length 16 Characters
ZA PRN_TIMEOUT BIN 3 NOM BCD-1 variable max. length 4 Digits
ZB PRN_RS232/TTY STRING 5 NOM BCD0-1 variable *) max. length 4 Digits
ZC PRN_HANDSHAKE STRING 3 NOM
ZD PRINT DIRECTION STRING 4 NOM
BCD-2 variable max. length 8 Digits
ZE PRN_BAUDRATE STRING 5 NOM BCD0-2 variable *) max. length 8 Digits
ZF PRN_DATA BIT STRING 1 NOM BIN-1, BIN-A variable max. length 16 Bit/11 Digits
ZG PRN_STOP BIT STRING 1 NOM BIN0-1, BIN0-A variable *) max. length 16 Bit/11 Digits
ZH PRN_PARITY STRING 4 NOM
Z084 SOFTKEYLINE_1 SSTRING 40 ACT
BIN-2, BIN-B variable max. length 32 Bit/11 Digits
Z085 SOFTKEYLINE_2 SSTRING 40 ACT BIN0-2, BIN0-B variable *) max. length 32 Bit/11 Digits
VBIN-1, VBIN-A variable max. length 16 Bit/11 Digits + sign
Additional internal variables PCS plus VBIN0-1, VBIN0-A variable *) max. length 16 Bit/11 Digits + sign
NAME CONTENTS FORMAT LENGTH ACT/NOM
VBIN-2,V BIN-B variable max. length 32 Bit/11 Digits + sign
Z15 CLOCK_SECONDS BIN 2 NOM VBIN0-2, VBIN0-B variable *) max. length 32 Bit/11 Digits + sign
Z16 CLOCK_MINUTES BIN 2 NOM Timer variable max. length 40 Characters
Z17 CLOCK_HOURS BIN 2 NOM
Z18 DATE_DAY BIN 2 NOM
Z19 DATE_MONTH BIN 2 NOM
Z20 DATE_YEAR BIN 2 NOM
Z21 WEEKDAY_NOM STRING 2 NOM
Z22 WEEKDAY_ACT STRING 2 ACT
Z23 CLOCK CLOCK 8 ACT
Z24 DATE DATE 8 ACT
Z25 RECEIPENR_ACT BIN 4 ACT *) BIN0...- and VBIN0...variable are only programmable with
Z26 RECEIPENR_NOM BIN 4 NOM
PCSPRO
The variable formats of the PCS
The BIT variable

When two possibilities can be selected at an input, the descision is taken by the bit variable.
This is in the form of an ON/OFF switch.
Every switch position represents an inscription (text) which appears in the display. Each bit
variable occupies a bit. A data word can also take on up to 16 differing bit variables or
switches.
Example: A wood shavings vacuum absorption cleaner shall be switched on or off in bit
2 data word 33.
The +/- switch selects the inscription or the switching position. The bit bears the value of the
inscription. The first inscription carries the value log 0, the second bears the value log 1.
STRING variable
When two or more possibilities can be selected at an input, the decision is made by the
STRING variable. It corresponds to a selector switch.
With STRING variables, every switch position is classified with an inscribed text, which appears
in the display. Every STRING value carries a data word with up to 256 switch positions. The
switch position is deposited in low bytes of the data word.
Example: The frame material shall be selected in data word 40.

The inscription or switching position is selected with the +/- key. Acceptance follows with
the ENTER key.
CSTRING variable
The CSTRING variable corresponds to STRING variable. Acceptance follows directly after
using the +/- key without ENTER.
BCD variable: BCD-1, BCD-2, BCD0-1, BCD0-2

The nominal value of the BCD variable corresponds to that of a BCD thumbwheel switch and
the actual value to that of a BCD digital display. The 4 digit (decimal positions) variable BCD-
1 is allocated to a word, the 8 digit variable BCD 2 to two consecutive following words 32 bits
(W n, W n+1). BCD variables are displayed without pre-zeros. For example a BCD 2 actual value
is: 4 2567.
The 4 digit variable BCD0-1 is allocated to a word, the 8 digit variable BCD0 to two consecutive
following words 32 bits (W n, W n+1). BCD0 variables are displayed with pre-zeros. For
example the actual value of a BCD0 is: 0004 2567
Every BCD value is limited to a min/max value.
Example:
The batch size per window type is written in word 30 as a 4 digit nominal value without min/
max limits.
The nominal value input "8500" takes place with the ten key keyboard of the PCS and is
transfered to the word with the ENTER BCD coded key:
Word 30 = 1000 0101 0000 0000
8 5 0 0
From the Bios versions PCS 095 V508A (1 Data set)
PCS 095.1 V408A (4 Data set)
PCS 095.2 V428A (Int. character key)
PCS 090 V208D
PCS 009 V2041
and the Version 5.2 of the PCSPRO-Software, as well as all devices from the PCS plus series,
the BCD variable can be entered cover. The covered input is also for BCD variables with up to
4 and also up to 8 digits possible. While editing the following display appears:
after input of one number: *(with pre zero: - - - *)
after inputof three numbers: * * * (with pre zero: - * * *).
When the variable is not edited, are fundamental lines (- - - -) in the display. Apart from
the covered input this variant behave just as the normal BCD variable, this means also, that
the insertes value displays in the communication data module and can be read from the
PLC.
BINARY variables:BIN-1, BIN-2, BIN-A, BIN-B, VBIN-1, VBIN-2, VBIN-A, VBIN-B, BIN0-
1, BIN0-2, BIN0-A, BIN0-B, VBIN0-1, VBIN0-2, VBIN0-A, VBIN0-B
The nominal value of the BIN variable corresponds to that of a BIN thumbwheel switch and the
actual value to that of a BIN digital display. The scaled 16 bit variables (BIN-1 to VBIN-A) are
allocated to a word, the 32 bit variables (BIN-2 to VBIN-B) to two consecutive following words
(W n, W n+1).
The variables (V)BIN(0)-1,2 only differ from those of the (V)BIN(0)-A, B in the way the characters
are loaded (V)BIN0-1,2 and (V)BIN-1,2 are with and without pre-zeros repectively VBIN(0)-
1,2A,B take the operational sign into consideration. Every (V)BIN variable is limited by a min/
max value. In addition the (V)BIN-1,A variables can be scaled.
Example:
The temperature of the engine brake can be set between 0°C and 70°C. The scaled 16 bit
nominal value is written into the word W 45 with a min/max limit.
Example:
The window height is adjustable between 750 mm and 1500 mm. The 32 bit nominal value
is written into the word 41+42 with a min/max limit. The higher value part remains in W 41,
the lower value part in W 42.
WORD variable
The WORD variable is specially suitable for service. Die Darstellung kann sowohl bitweise (KM),
hexadezimal (KH) oder byteweise dezimal (KY) erfolgen. An alteration of the bit pattern with
the PCS is possible if the WORD variable is defined as a nominal value.
Example:
The word 33 is to be displayed and altered in the PCS display:
Alteration of the nominal value WORD variable takes place in a menu.
Display line 1BIT PATTERN OF WORD 33
Display line 200000000 00000101
The value of the WORD variable can be changed with the "0" or "1" key. The "+" key switches
the pointer one place to the right and with the "" key, one place to the left.
Display line 1BIT PATTERN OF WORD 33
Display line 211110000 11000000
The ENTER key puts the new value into the word.
TIMER variable
The TIMER variable allows an input of a 3 digit numeric input (BCD) and a timebase value with
4 selection (displayed as text).
Example:
Word 100 should be displayed in Timerformat.
The content of word 100 is KH1235.
If the timebase is defined as ".0", ".1", ".2" and ".3" in the display "235.1" is visible.
The value is defined with the key "0"..."9". The selection between base and value is done with
the (.) key. The timebase is selectable with + or - key or direct input with "0" bis "3" key.
ASCII variable
If an alphabetical nominal value is required (article number, name etc.) the ASCII variable
provides it in a simple manner.
Example: Enter the 12 digit version » 41-BN-890-SB «:
As every 2 ASCII characters occupy a word, 6 words are to be reserved for a 12 digit version
number. In the following example the words 56...61 are used to this purpose.
The loading of the nominal value ASCII variable takes place in a menu.
Display line 1 LOADING OF VERSION:
Display line 2 nnnnnnnnnnnn
By calling the menu the value 0 stands in the DW 56 ... DW 61. For this value the PCS-ASCII
chart sets up the signs "n" (all dots illuminate). By using any key these signs will be replaced by
a question mark (?).
Display line 1LOADING OF VERSION:
Display line 2????????????
Every "?" can be changed with a "+" key to any letter desired and with the "-" key to any character
required. The "point" key moves the indicator one place to the right.
Display line 1LOADING OF VERSION:
Display line 241-BN-890-SB
When all characters have been completely and correctly loaded, pressing the ENTER key for
example, puts the values into the words 56 ... 61. The words then have the following values:
Word No. Contents ($) ASCII Characters
W56 34 31 4 1
W57 2D 42 - B
W58 4E 2D N -
W59 38 39 8 9
W60 30 2D 0 -
W61 53 42 S B
The keyboard outline of the ASCII variables

+ key pages to the letters (characters with the next largest ASCII code)
- key pages to the characters (characters with the next smallest ASCII code)
Point key moves the cursor to the right
ENTER key records the ASCII characters into the data words
CLR key displays old value
Nominal Value Input - Simple and Straight Forward with Menu Technique
The number and format of nominal values are as varied as the operation itself. Regardless of the type and number of nominal
values required, the procedure for recording them used by "the man at the machine" must be simple and straight forward.
The menu technique offers considerable flexibility in recording and altering nominal values. It guides the operator and eliminates
almost any possibility of false entering.
The PCS has at its disposal:
■ 127 menus with a maximum of 255 menu or node points
Every node can be written with a 2 (PCS 090) or 4 (PCS 009, PCS 095, PCS 095.1) line operator text. This text can contain a
maximum of 8 (PCS 009, PCS 090) or 16 (PCS 095, PCS 095.1) variables (nominal values/actual values).
The PLC calls a menu with the word W 14 (bit 0...6). The PCS always shows the text of the start node. Depending on the
arrangement of the menu, the other nodes are reached by actuating the ARROW key. The LED in the arrow key shows the
operator the direction in which further variables (nominal values) are to be edited., i.e., the relevent LED lights. If on the other
hand an LED flashes, it shows the operator that this node will be left on activating.
Termination of a menu is achieved by setting bit 0...6 back in word 14.
The PCS has a simple editor for entering functions and nominal values. This editor permits 3 different inputs of figures:
■ Nominal value input with the numeric key pad
■ Incrementing/Decrementing the nominal value with the +/- key
■ Addition and subtraction of various values of the displayed nominal value (only with BCD and BIN variables)
The CLR key sets nominal value back to its old value.
Ten key keyboard

for nominal value input
Control keys for

nominal value input
Automux PCS 809 for the Siemens PLC Range
The PG interface is occupied if the communication between the PCS and the Siemens S5 runs via the L1 standard or L1 direct
protocol.
As the smaller PLC systems only have a PG interface, this leads to problems during running as a simultaneous application of PG
and PCS is not possible.
The Automux PCS 809 re-moves this problem.
The PCS 809 broadens the PLC-PG-interface so
that the PG and the PCS can serve the PLC
together. The switch over to MUX follows
automatically.
The PCS 809 is intended to be used as a
commis-sioning tool. After the start-up
procedure the PCS is connected to the PLC via
é
MUX-AG the PG interface. We recommend the Au-
é
tomux PCS 809 for the Siemens PLC
é S5-90U
S5-95U
S5-100U
S5-115U (CPU with one interface)
PCS 809 is valid for the PCS Operator Panel
PCS 009
PCS 090
PCS 095/095.1/095.2
PCS 716
PCS 009.s
PCS 090.s
PCS 095.s
PCS 900
PCS 920
PCS 950
PCS 950c
PCS 9000/9100
PCS 110
PCS 210
We supply the PCS 809 with power supply cable and adaptor cable MUX / PLC-AG.
The character table of the PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1
The characters can be presented on the LCD display. 8 characters are individually definable.
00 10 20
0 30
@ P 40 50
\ 60
p 70
! 21
1 31
A 41
Q a q
51 61 71
" 22
2 32
B 42
R 52
b r 62 72
# 3 23 33
C S 43 53
c 63
s 73
$ 24
4 34
D T 44 54
d t 64 74
freely defined characters
% 5 25 35
E 45
U 55
e 65
u 75
& 6 26 36
F 46
V 56
f 66
v 76
´ 27
7 37
G W g w
47 57 67 77
08
( 28
8 38
H 48
X 58
h 68
x 78
09
) 29
9 39
I 49
Y 59
i 69
y 79
0A
* 2A
: 3A
J 4A
Z 5A
j 6A
z 7A
0B
+ ; 2B 3B
K 4B
[ 5B
k 6B
{ 7B
0C
, 2C
< L 3C 4C
¥ 5C
l 6C
| 7C
0D
= M ]
2D 3D 4D 5D
m } 6D 7D
0E
. 2E
> N ^ n
3E 4E 5E 6E
-> 7E
0F 1F
/ 2F
? 3F
O 4F 5F
o 6F
<- 7F
The character table der PCS 095.2 and PCS plus
This international character set can be presented on the LCD display. 8 characters are individually definable.
00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0
free definable characters
The simple communication principle of the PCS
Communication between any PLC and the PCS occurs as follows:

The PCS writes in predetermined word areas of the PLC, functions or nominal values, which the PLC then reads and interprets.
The PLC writes in predetermined word areas functions or actual values, which are automatically read and interpreted by the PCS.
Independently of the PLC there are maximum 256 words of 16 bit, that is to say 4096 inputs / outputs for the PCS/PLC
communication available.
... and rapid set-up of a particular operational requirement
1 First define the specification and decide on the required PCS (PCS micro, PCS mini, PCS midi or PCS maxi)
2 Allocate the word and bit number to variables (actual- and nominal values).
3 Create the texts for operational guidance and help functions as well as for displays of machine conditions.
4 Determine the message texts and apply these words to them, subdivide the message texts into 3 priority groups
■ Information
■ Warnings
■ Faults
and take into consideration the differing cancel modes, display and message modes. Display and message modes can be
altered by the PLC at any time.
5 Define the menus and the menu operating texts.
6 Transfer the data file (variables, texts, menus) which was made in the PC or PG under MSDOS/DRDOS or compatible
DOS-system, with the software PCSPRO into the PCS.
7 Implement and parameterize the PLC specific operating software (PCS 91.nn, see overall view of information) in the users'
programme.
8 Connect the PCS via the adapter cable with the PLC. Test together the operation and control of the PCS and PLC and
adjust if necessary.
1 General references
1.1 General procedures

Please follow the description below to setup a complete system:
■ Specify the functions of the system.
■ Create a data record with the required parameters (variables, texts, menus) and download it into the PCS 009, PCS
090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1 using your specific driver. Refer to the PCSPRO manual and to this part of the manual for
more information.
■ Write a programmable controller program (information is contained in the driver appendix PCS 91.xxx) and download
it into the system.
■ Connect the PCS with the programmable controller. Test the communications and solve any faults.
1 General references
1.2 Equipment and accessories required

To write a user program and transfer this program into the PCS together with a driver. The following (Systeme Lauer) products are
required:
1. The PCS itself
2. The programming cable PCS 733 for programming the PCS using an IBM compatible PC or programmer.
3. This manual (PCS 091).
4. The PCSPRO programming manual with diskette.
5. Driver manual (PCS 91.xxx, depending on the driver required).
6. For "beginners" we recommend the "PCS-SKILLS" booklet with an example program for the PCS.
The following are also required:

7. An IBM compatible PC or programmer with MSDOS > 3.3 or DRDOS operating system and at least one serial interface
(COM).
... also the power supplies for all components.
2 Operation and display elements
2.1 Keys
They are divided into function keys, numerical keypad and control keys. All keys are made available as made available as key
bits in the PLC. As long as a key is activated, a log 1 appears in the corresponding bit of the word range. The "pressing" of a
key sets off a short acoustic signal, the so called keyboard click. Some keys also reproduce repeating acoustic signals on account
of their "REPEAT" function.
The function keys F1 to F8 for the PCS 009 and PCS 090 and F1 to F16 for the PCS 095 and PCS 095.1 are only transmitted to
the programmable controller. They have no internal functions.
The numerical keypad and the control keys also have PCS internal functions each depending on the displayed priority and are
therefore to be interpreted in the PLC with caution.
Priority 0 = DEFAULT TEXT: In this instance the HLP key has internal functions.
Priority 2 = MENU: In this case the numeric keypad 0...9 as well as the control keys +,-,.,Arrow, CLR, ENTER and HLP, internal
functions.
Priorities 4 to 8 = MESSAGE PRIORITIES: depending on the programming of the PCS (cancel mode number of message text
lines, message help texts), the ARROW keys and the CLR and HLP key each have an internal function.
Priority 12 = HELP: On this occasion HLP, as well as ARROW-UPWARDS and ARROW-DOWN each have internal functions when
more than one display is registered.
On activating non-permissible keys, exept for priority 0 = default text (only HLP key), the acoustic fault message rings out. Should
the priority be limited by blocking the priorities 4...8 in the command word A (W13) to priority 0 = default, the numerical key pad
as well as the control keys (exception: HLP) can be occupied with special machine functions. It is to be observed that the priority
12 = HELP is not lockable.
If the acoustic fault message should prove annoying, it can be switched off with bit 4 in the command word A (W13) = logic
1. At the same time the "REPEAT" click will be suppressed.
Tip!
The PCS plus series has no acoustic fault message.
2.2 Incription field

An individually design foil for labeling the F-keys can be inserted into the inscription field. For the PCS 009 the foil to be inserted
should have the following dimensions:
Length: 98 +0 -0,4 mm (left margin = 22 mm)

Width: 13,5 +0 -0,4 mm
22 19 19 19 19
13,5
Thickness of the cover foil: max. 0.1 mm. 0.9 mm are covered at the top and bottom margin. The visible window for each function
key measures 15 mm (horizontal) x 12 mm (vertical).
An individually design foil for labeling the F-keys can be inserted into the inscription field. For the PCS 090 the foil to be inserted
should have the following dimensions:
Length: 186 +0 -0,4 mm (left margin = 34 mm)

Width: 14 +0 -0,4 mm
34 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
14
Thickness of the cover foil: max. 0.1 mm. 0.9 mm are covered at the top and bottom margin. The visible window for each function
key measures 15 mm (horizontal) x 12 mm (vertical).
For the PCS 095, PCS 095.1 the foil to be inserted should have the following dimensions:
Length: 192 +0 - 0.4 mm (left margin = 38 mm, right margin = 2 mm)

Width: 24 +0 -0.4 mm
38 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 2
12
24
12
Thickness of the cover foil: max. 0.1 mm. 1.75 mm are covered at the top and bottom margin. The visible window for each
function key measures 15 mm (horizontal) x 11.6 mm (vertical).
Tip!
For the printing of the DIN A4 labeling sheet no use of a ink jet printer.
2.3 DIL switch (not PCS plus)

On the rear side there are 10 (12 at PCS 095) DIL switches.
DIL 1 to 4 = PLC bits. These switches are in word 4,

bit 4 to 7 are freely available
DIL 1 = W4.4
DIL 2 = W4.5
DIL 3 = W4.6
DIL 4 = W4.7
DIL 5, DIL 6 = Configurations parameter (driver)
e.g. Baud rate, interface selection
OFF OFF Parameter 1 (mainly driver parameter AC)
ON ON Parameter 2 (mainly driver parameter AD)
OFF ON Parameter 3 (mainly driver parameter AF)
ON ON Parameter 4 (mainly driver parameter AF)
For details refer to driver manual PCS 91.xxx
DIL 7 = Configurations baud rate PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1
ON = 115.0 kBaud
OFF = 38.5 kBaud
DIL 8 = Operation Mode
ON = stop, service programme expected
OFF = rund, normal operation
Hinweis!
Dieser Schalter muß im Betrieb auf OFF stehen, sonst sind
Fehlfunktionen in der PCS und SPS möglich !!
DIL 9 = write protection EEPROM

ON = EEPROM re-writable
OFF = EEPROM write protected
DIL 10 = Contrast display
adjustable with the HLP- and +/- key
ON = alteration possible
OFF = not possible
DIL 11 = Datensatz *)
DIL 12 = Datensatz *)
*)
nur relevant bei PCS 095.1 und PCS095.2
Tip
Tip!!
The DIL switch 9 should be switched to off after OFF after programming, otherwise the data content can
not be guaranteed under all circumstances. In normal circumstances (including on/off switching at any
time) there is no chance whatever of data loss.
The contrast normally only has to be adjusted once, it should be put in the OFF position after the setting
of the DIL switch 10.
On the rear side of the PCS plus series are no DIL switches! They are replaced through a menu (see
chapter "BIOS Setup").
2.4 LED displays

Every light display can be in 4 different states: OFF, ON, FLASHING and RAPID FLASHING. The FLASHING state is made up of
75% bright phase and 25% dark phase, the condition rapid FLASHING consists of 75% dark phase and 25% bright phase.
The green and yellow LEDs at the function keys are available for the PLC to change. They are controlled by the LED status
W10 und W11. The LEDs additionally available via the function keys F9...F18 for the PCS 095, PCS 095.1 are controlled by
the extra LED status, words W24 and W25.
The 2 green and 1 yellow LEDs to the right of the control keys show the state of running of the PCS.
INPUT MENU, INFORMATION COMMUNICATION

REQUIRED WARNING, FAULT FAULT
? ! ERR
green green yellow
■ (?) INPUT REQUIRED

ILLUMINATED: The PCS is waiting for key activation (quit, i.e., delete from message, input of nominal values,
closing of a menu)
FLASHING: If a message with cancel mode 4 is shown in the display, this LED flashes as long as the
corresponding message bit is log 1 (the message can not be deleted). If the message bit is 0, then it is
continually illuminated and the message can be cancelled with CLR. Should the HLP key be pressed and a help
text is programmed to the currently activated priorities, this LED flashes alternately with the (!)-LED.
■ (!) MENU, INFORMATION, WARNING, FAULT

ILLUMINATED: An INFORMATION, a WARNING and a FAULT are shown in the display.
FLASHING: A MENU, a WARNING, an INFORMATION or a FAULT is switched on, however is not shown owing
to an activated order of priorities in the command word A (W13; Bit 8...11) (at the moment). Should a help
key be pressed down and a help text is programmed to the currently activated priorites, this LED (!) flashes
alternately with the (?)-LED.
■ (ERR) COMMUNICATION FAULT

ILLUMINATED: The communication has not been started since the switch on.
FLASHING: The communication to the PLC has been broken.
When normal communication is taking place this LED of OFF. Should the communication be interrupt (after
it had just been functioning) the acoustic alarm is activated for a short time and the LED begins to flash.
Warning!
Check the action/reaction of the programmable controller!
The action/reaction of the programmable controller has to be checked after a restart of the programmable
controller following a communications loss.
CURSOR KEY LEDs IN MENUS

In this mode the (!)-LED is off or flashing. The arrow keys LED are enabled via bit 5 in command word A (W13). [Arrow
key]-LED
ILLUMINATED: Further nominal values which can be edited can be reached with this arrow.
FLASHING: Activation of this arrow key enables this menu node to be left.
CURSOR KEYS LEDs IN MES SAGES

MESSAGES
The (!)-LED is on, the arrow keys LEDs are enabled via the bit 14 in command word A (W13). Illuminated
ARROW-UPWARDS: The main lines of this message can be activated.
ARROW-BELOW: The follow-on pages of this message can be displayed.
ARROW-LEFT: The manual scrolling is enabled and can be switched over to previous messages.
ARROW-RIGHT: The manual scrolling is enabled and can be switched over to later messages.
CURSOR KEYS LEDs IN HELP TEXTS

In this mode the (!)-LED flashes alternately with the (?)-LED. The arrow keys LEDs are enabled via bit 15 in the command
word A (W13). Illuminated
ARROW-UPWARDS: The main lines of this help text can be activated.
ARROW-BELOW: The follow-on pages of this help text can be displayed.
CURSOR KEYS LEDs IN RECEIPE TEXTS (ONLY PC

(ONLY PCSS plus)
In this Mode is the (!)-LED off or flashing. [Arrow key]-LED
ILLUMINATED: With this [Arrow]-key are additional edit nominal values within reach.
FLASHING: The operating of the arrow keys (only é and ê) make possible that additional lines of the receipe texts
can be displayed.
CURSOR KEYS LEDs IN HISTORY TEXTS (ONLY PC
(ONLY PCSS plus)
In this Mode is the !-LED and the ?-LED always off. The automatic influence of the arrow key-LEDs can be enabled via Bit
7 in W12 (in the PCS 009plus are no arrow key-LEDs available).
LED-[ARROW-UP], ILLUMINATED: The upmost lines (main lines) of this message texts can not be displayed.
LED-[ARROW-DOWN], FLASHING: The follow-on lines (aditional lines) of this message texts can be displayed.
LED-[ARROW-RIGHT], FLASHING: The history memory includes older inputs, they can be displayed through operate
the key.
LED-[ARROW-LEFT], FLASHING: The history memory includes younger inputs, they can be displayed through operate
the key.
2.5 Display and contrast adjustment

When the PCS is in operation there are backlit lines (PCS 009: 4 lines x 20 characters, PCS 090: 2 lines x 40 characters, and PCS
095, PCS 095.1: 4 lines x 40 characters) . The character set is limited to the latin character set, including a few special characters.
National special characters (eg. ä, ö, ü, ß) must be created via the character programme. For this purpose there are 8 characters
to choose from. A character table can be found in the forward of this manual.
Flashing of individual characters (nominal value input) is administered by the PCS itself. Operating texts can flashed when used
as default text through bit 15 log 1 in command word B (W14). With message texts this can follow for every priority via bit 8...10
in the command word A (W13). This switch over is also possible form the PLC at any time.
The contrast of the display characters can be altered on mass. The key HLP together with the key + increases the contrast of
the characters, the keys HLP and - reduce the contrast until the script has almost completely disappeared. The setting is retentive,
i.e., the very last ajustment remains stored even after switching off the PCS. To avoid an error of adjustment to the contrast,
the adjustment can be disabled with the DIL switch = OFF (not PCS plus)
2.6 Acoustic signal

3 acoustic signals are available.
- a short keyboard click on pressing a key.
- when a key with a "REPEAT" function is "pressed", a "REPEAT" sound is heard.
- a 0.5 second duration acoustic fault message after having pressed a false key.
The volume of the acoustic signal can be adjusted on the rear side of the PCS by means of a potentiometer.
Should the acoustic ringing of a fault message be annoying, then it can be turned off with the word 13 bit 4 = logic 1. At
the same time the "REPEAT" sound is suppressed.
Tip!
The PCS plus series have no acoustic signal.
3 Connectors
Connections
3.1 Operating voltage

The connections for the operating voltage are fixed as screw terminals for wires up to 2 mm2 diameter. For more about power
consumption and limits of operating voltage read the chapter "Technical Data".
Warning!
The protective conductor and 0V of the supply voltage are separated in the device. The protective
conductor is also connected to pin 1 of the serial interfaces (except for the noise filter). The enclosure
must be grounded to avoid noise in the best way. Additionally, 0V must be neutralized near the power
supply (according to VDE regulations).
3.2 Serial interfaces

The PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1 feature a combination interface. Only one interface can be used at a time. On the
25 pol D-type there is either an RS 232 (V24) or alternatively a TTY (line current interface), active or passive, available. On the
15 pol D-plug an RS 422 or alternatively an RS 485 interface is available. With regard to this please take note of the driver
manuals PCS 91.xxx.
With a PLC coupling through the RS 422/RS 485, the programming cable PCS 733 can be plugged in at the same time. During
the configuration of the PCS the interface RS 422/RS 485 is switched to high resistivity.
The PCS plus series have a 9pin RS 232 interface for projecting and printing. It can be used also for simulation operation.
Tip!
Simulation and printing is not possible simultaneous. During the simulation print commands will be
ignored.
With the devices from the PCS plus series (with serial connection) it can be simulate with the 25pin
interface and printed with the 9pin interface simultaneous.
3.3 RS 232/TTY interface
3.3.1 Configuration/programming
With the help of the RS 232 interface you can establish the configuration/programming of the PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095,
PCS 095.1 from a PC/PG (also refer to PCSPRO) with the programming cable PCS 733 (configurations cable). The start up to
the configuration, i.e., programming is observed at the DSR input. The PCS is thereby ready for programm transfer. Please note
that in order to programm, the EEPROM must be enabled with the DIL switch 9 = ON. This is invalid for the PCS plus, the
programming is always possible!
Attention!
The level at DSR (pin 6) is determined by the PC output DTR (25-pole: pin 20; 9-pole: pin 4). Since the
level of this pin is not defined after booting the PC/programmer or after exiting a program, it is possible
that the PCS is in confi-guration mode (only if the programming cable PCS 733 is plugged in). In this
case, the PCS program is stopped. Any communication with the programmable controller will be aborted.
In this case, you must disconnect the PCS 733 cable. The PCSPRO software sets the correct level at this
pin.
3 Connectors
3.3.2 Communication
Depending on your driver and the PLC being used, you need to utilise a special communication cable. Further-more DIL switches
5 and 6 must be set according to the programmed driver parameter. For information regarding this please refer to the
respective driver manual PCS 91.xxx.
2 seperate line current sources (A+B) are at the disposal of the TTY.
(Overhead view of the plug)
RS232/TTY interface for projecting RS232 interface for projecting

and communication and printer
(PCS 009/090/095.x/PCS plus.s) (all PCS plus devices)
Warning!
If external current loop sources are used, the maximum e.m.f. may not exceed 15 V. Furthermore, real
current sources with a maximum of 22 mA are required. Otherwise malfunctions may occur in the PCS
and in the programmable controller!
If the programming cable PCS 733 is used with 9 and 25pin connectors:
Never connect both connectors simultaneous!
3 Connectors
3.4 RS 422/485 interface

You will need a special communication cable depending on the driver and the PLC that you use. In addition the DIL switches
5 and 6 must be set according to the programmed driver parameters PCS 91.xxx.
This interface is intended for the communication only.
The RS 422 communication utitises the pins 2 and 9 for transmission and pins 4 and 11 for reception. On the other hand RS
485 applies pins 2 and 9 to transmit and receive. For further details refer to the "PCS 91.xxx.Driver Manual".
Warning!
Check the action/reaction of the programmable controller!
The action/reaction of the programmable controller has to be checked after a restart of the programmable
controller following a communications loss.
3 Connectors
4 Variables
Variables can be applied to every text. From this position the PCS reserves room for the variables. The display form and the
length are not needed in the variable description. Maximum 4 variables can be used per text line (with the application of the
ASCII variable, only one variable per line is permissible). When writing text, the additional variable lengths in each line have
to be taken into consideration. Use the programming software "PCSPRO", as this automatically takes into consideration the
maximum variable lengths when defining the texts.
A difference is made between INTERNAL and EXTERNAL variables. The source values of the EXTERNAL variables lie in the PLC.
A variable definition must be written for these variables. The description of the external variables is filed in the configuration
of the PCS. With respect to the internal variables, this is already to hand.
In addition the variable types (V)BIN(0)-1,A permit scaling. That means a given range of values (source range) in the PLC will
be displayed in another display range (target area) in the PCS (restrictions: the multiplicator must be positive!).
The number of the pre- and after decimal point positions with every BIN (binary), as well as limiting values; that is minimum
and maximum value; are programmable as constants.
BCD(0)-1,2 allow the definition of a minimum and a maximum value, as well as a definable mantissa (digits).
Every variable can be defined as an ACTUAL-, NOMINAL- or NOMINAL-P value.
ACTUAL:
ACTUAL: The value in the word is an actual value. The PCS can only display the value.
NOMINAL: The value in the word is a nominal value. The value can be displayed and changed by the PCS.
NOMINAL VAL
VALUE-P
UE-P::
ALUE-P The value in the word is a private nominal value. The PCS can display the value. It can be changed
only if this is allowed by word 14 Bit 7 = log 1 (key switch or DIL switch 1...4 on the rear side of the
PCS). When bit 7 of word 14 = log 0, the value is displyed as an actual value.
PC
PCSS plus:
Variables defined as NOMINAL VALUE-P can only be changed in recipes if the NOMINAL VALUE-P bit
(bit 15 in the control word of the recipe words) is set.
Overview of the external variable formats:
BIT see chapter 4.1

STRING see chapter 4.2
CSTRING see chapter 4.3
BCD see chapter 4.4
BIN see chapter 4.5
VBIN see chapter 4.5
WORD see chapter 4.6
ASCII see chapter 4.7
TIMER see chapter 4.8
Overview of the internal variable formats :
PCS 009 /090 / 095 see chapter 4.9

PCS plus see chapter 4.9.1
4 Variables
4.1 Variables format BIT

It is assumed that you have created a bit variable on word 30 as nominal value with the assistance of the programming software
PCSPRO. You have selected bit 15 as bit number. You have programmed the character string (inscriptions) for the logic bit
condition 0 with "CLOSED" and for the logic bit condition 1 with "OPEN".
Summary:
Word number: 30
Class: NOMINAL
Variable format: bit
Bit position: 15
Inscription 0 (AP0): CLOSED
Inscription 1 (AP1): OPEN
The variable is incorporated into the operating text 0 as follows:
VALVE 0 IS IN ••••••••••••• CONDITION
If the bit 30.15 = 0, there appears with the selected operating text 0 in the display:
VALVE 0 IS IN CLOSED CONDITION
If the bit is 30.15 = 1, there appears with the selected operating text 0 in the display:
VALVE 0 IS IN OPEN CONDITION
If this operating text 0 is utilised in the menu node, then the bit 30.15 can be set with the key + and set back with the key
-. The alteration is carried out immediately after every activation of the keys. The remaining bits of the word 30 are not
influenced by writing back.
4 Variables
4.2 Variables format STRING

It is assumed that you defined a STRING variable on word 31 as nominal-P value with the help of the programming software
PCSPRO. The character strings (inscriptions) 0...2 are programmed with "SERVICE", "SETTING UP OPERATION" and "AUTOMATIC
OPERATION".
Summary:
Word number: 31
Class: NOMINAL-P
Variable format: STRING
Inscription 0 (AP0): SERVICE
Inscription 1 (AP1): SETTING UP
Inscription 2 (AB2): AUTOMATIC
The variable is inserted in the operating text 15 as follows:
TYPE OF OPERATION:••••••••••••••• CONTINUED: >
If the value 1 is present in the lower value byte of word 31, then with active operating text 15 there appears in the display.
TYPE OF OPERATION: SETTING UP CONTINUED: >
If the variable is used in a menu, the value in the word 31 can be decremented with keys "-" until the value 0 and incremented
with the key "+" to the value 2. However bear in mind that an altered value is written back into the word first after "ENT" or
departure from the variable field. If the value is to be written at once into the PLC, refer to CSTRING.
Attention:
1. The bits in the higher valued byte of word 31 are ignored on reading; on writing them back into the
PLC, they are set to 0. This is a means of assistance to establish alterations brought about by the PLC
programs.
2. Should the old value not be altered, then it won't be written back (even including Bits 8...15).
3. A maximum of 256 inscriptions are allowed (including 0).
4. The limitations set themselves according to the number of programmed inscriptions; whose minimum
value is 0.
5. At least 3 inscriptions must be defined, otherwise the variable is to be declared as a bit.
6. It is impossible to leave the input field with a value outside the limiting values as soon as editing has
begun.
7. A restoration of the original value is possible at any time with the "CLR" key.
4 Variables
4.3 Variables format CSTRING

It is assumed that you defined a CSTRING variable on word 32 as nominal-P with the help of the programming software
PCSPRO. The character strings (inscriptions) 0...11 are programmed with "JANUARY", "FEBRUARY", "MARCH", "APRIL", "MAY"
until "DECEMBER".
Summary:
Word number: 32
Class: NOMINAL
Variable format: CSTRING
Inscription 0 (AP0): JANUARY
Inscription 1 (AP1): FEBRUARY
up to Inscription 11 (AB11): DECEMBER
FILLING MONTHS: •••• CONTINUED: >
If the value 5 is present in the lower value byte of word 32, then with active operating text 20 there appears in the display.
FILLING MONTHS: JUNE CONTINUED: >
If the variable is used in a menu, the value in the word 32 can be decremented with key "-" until the value 0 and incremented
with the key "+" until 11 (=$000B). A modified value is written into the PLC at once. This is contrary to that with CSTRING.
Attention:
1. The bits in the higher valued byte of word 32 are ignored on reading; on writing them back into the
PLC, they are set to 0. This is a means of assistance to establish alterations brought about by the PLC
programs.
2. Should the old value not be altered, then it won't be written back (even including Bits 8...15).
3. A maximum of 256 inscriptions are allowed (including 0).
4. The limitations set themselves according to the number of programmed inscriptions; whose minimum
value is 0.
5. At least 3 inscriptions must be defined, otherwise the variable is to be declared as a bit.
6. It is impossible to leave the input field with a value outside the limiting values as soon as editing has
begun.
7. A restoration of the original value is not possible with the "CLR" key.
4 Variables
4.4 Variables format BCD

The BCD variable formats are divided into the following sub groups:
Variable 16 bit 32 bit Number of digits Pre-zeros

type
1. BCD-1 x 1...4
2. BCD0-1 x 1...4 x
3. BCD-2 x 1...8
4. BCD0-2 x 1...8 x
It is assumed that you have defined a BCD variable (BCD-2) on word 33 as nominal-P value with the assistance of the
programming software PCSPRO. You will to display 8 digit positions, the typed in minimum value should be 90 and the
maximum value 50000000.
Summary:
Word number: 33
Class: NOMINAL-P
Variable format: BCD-2
Inscription 0 (AP0): 8
Inscription 1 (AP1): 90
up to Inscription 11 (AP11): 50000000
The variable is inserted into the operating text 100 as follows:
FINISHED NUMBER OF PIECES: •••••• CONT.: >
If the value $0045 (69) is in word 33 and the value $5673 (22131) is in word 34, then there appears in the selected operating
text 100 in the display:
FINISHED NUMBER OF PIECES: 455673 CONTINUED: >
The 2 pre-zeros are not shown as this is the variable format BCD-...! If you wish the pre-zeroes to be displayed, put in the
variable format BCD0-... instead of BCD-...
Attention:
1. Unnecessary higher value bits will be ignored and written back to 0.
2. Scalling and the superimposing of decimal points is not possible.
3. Intermediate values will not be recognised. The writeback first occurs after "ENT" or on leaving the
variable field.
4. Offsets are also possible: "1", "0", "+", would give the intermediate result of 455683 in the above
example as a result. As this case is about an intermediate result, no writeback will be made (although
the cursor now refrains from blinking)!
5. It is impossible to leave the input field with a value outside the limiting value after editing has begun.
6. You can also increment and decrement with the operational sign keys (with auto repeat).
7. It is possible to bring back the previous values at any time with "CLR".
4 Variables
From the Bios versions PCS 095 V508A (1 Data set)

PCS 095.1 V408A (4 Data set)
PCS 095.2 V428A (Int. character key)
PCS 090 V208D
PCS 009 V2041
and the Version 5.2 of the PCSPRO-Software, as well as all devices from the PCS plus series, the BCD variable can be entered
cover. The covered input is also for BCD variables with up to 4 and also up to 8 digits possible. While editing the following
display appears:
after input of one number: *(with pre zero: - - - *)
after inputof three numbers: * * * (with pre zero: - * * *).
When the variable is not edited, are fundamental lines (- - - -) in the display. Apart from the covered input this variant
behave just as the normal BCD variable, this means also, that the insertes value displays in the communication data module
and can be read from the PLC.
4 Variables
4.5 Variables format BIN

The 16 bit value of a word or 32 bit value of a double word in the PLC are displayed in the fixed point format as a non pre-
character figure. The variable requires maximum 11 digit places (with decimal points). The inclusion of the decimal point is
made possible with the selection of the pre- and after point position. At the same time the position for the decimal point in
the display is also to be condisdered. With 16 bit variables it is also possible to have scaling, that is a conversion of the range
of values PLC -> PCS and in the reverse PCS -> PLC. The display range in the PLC with the 16 bit variables is between $0 and
$FFFF, and with 32 bit variables between $0 and $FFFFFFFF. The range of values presentable in the PCS is between 0 and
maximum 4 294 967 295.
The following variable formats are possible:
BIN-1: This variable occupies a word in the PLC. The number of pre-decimal point is definable between 1 and maximum
10. The number of the after decimal point positions is between 0 (without decimal point) and maximum 9. As
soon as the after decimal point positions are declared, the variable requires one further character position in order
to superimpose the decimal point. If the minimum value of the PLC is different from the minimum value of the in
the PCS, i.e., the maximum value of the PLC from that of the PCS, then it is dealing with a scaling BIN variable.
With this type of variable, the input of the pre-decimal point position is seperate from the after decimal point
positions, should an after decimal point position have been given. Activating the (.) key puts in the after decimal
point positions. This kind of figure input is also known as pocket calculator input.
BIN0-1: As in BIN-1, though here pre-zeroes instead of empty spaces are displayed.
BIN-A: As in BIN-1, however the value is not entered according to the pocket calculator input, but by means of an
interjection over the decimal point (from right to left).
BIN0-A: As in BIN-1, however the value is not entered according to the pocket calculator input, but by means of an
interjection over the decimal point (from right to left). Also here pre-zeroes instead of empty spaces are displayed.
BIN-2: This variable occupies a double word in the PLC. The number of pre-decimal point is definable between 1 and
maximum 10. The number of the after decimal point positions is between 0 (without decimal point) and maximum
9. As soon as the after decimal point positions are stated, the variable requires one further character position in
order to superimpose the decimal point. With this type of variable, the input of the pre-decimal point position is
separate from the after decimal point positions, should an after decimal point position have been given. Activating
the (.) key puts in the after decimal point positions. This kind of figure input is also known as pocket calculator
input.
BIN0-2: As in BIN-2, though here pre-zeroes instead of empty spaces are displayed.
BIN-B: As in BIN-2, however the value is not entered according to the pocket calculator input, but by means of an
interjection over the decimal point (from right to left).
BIN0-B: As in BIN-2 however the value is not entered according to the pocket calculator input, but by means of an
interjection over the decimal point (from right to left). Also here pre-zeroes instead of empty spaces are displayed.
VBIN: The 16 bit value of a word or 32 bit value of a double word in the PLC are displayed in the fixed point format as a
non pre-character figure. The variable requires maximum 12 digit places (essentially with operational sign and
alternatively with decimal points). The superimposition of the decimal point is made possible with the selection of
the pre- and after decimal point position. At the same time the position for the decimal point and the operational
sign in the display is also to be considered. With 16 bit variables it is also possible to have scaling, that is a
conversion of the range of values PLC -> PCS and in the reverse PCS -> PLC. The display range in the PLC with the
16 bit variables is between $8000 and $7FFF, and with 32 bit variables between $80000000 and $7FFFFFFF. The
range of values presentable in the PCS is between -2 147 483 648 and maximum +2 147 483 647. The operational
sign can be altered with the help of "+" or "-" key. The following variable formats are possible:
VBIN-1: The variables format VBIN displays the bit value of a word or double word in solid point formats as a operational
signed number. The variants of the VBIN variables corresponds to the BIN varables.
4 Variables
The BIN variables format are divided up into the following sub-divisions as follows:
Variable type 16 Bit 32 Bit Pocket calculator entry Scaling Operational sign Pre-zeros
1. BIN-1 x x x
2. BIN-A x x
3. BIN-2 x x selectable at PCS plus
4. BIN-B x selectable at PCS plus
5. VBIN-1 x x x x
6. VBIN-A x x x
7. VBIN-2 x x selectable at PCS plus x
8. VBIN-B x selectable at PCS plus x
9. BIN0-1 x x x x
10. BIN0-A x x x
11. BIN0-2 x x selectable at PCS plus x
12. BIN0-B x selectable at PCS plus x
13. VBIN0-1 x x x x x
14. VBIN0-A x x x x
15. VBIN0-2 x x selectable at PCS plus x x
16. VBIN0-B x selectable at PCS plus x x
Tip!
Variables 9...16 (V)BIN0-... are only definable with the programming environs PCSPRO!
4 Variables
Example:
It is assumed that with the assistance of the programming software PCSPRO, you have defined a BIN variable (BIN-) on word
34 as nominal value. You want to present and key in two pre-decimal point and one after decimal point. In addition you
want to incorporate scaling. Values of between 0 and 100 (0 and 10,0) may be typed into the PCS. This range of values
should be sent to the PLC however as 0...4095 ($0...$0FFF). Pre-positioned zeros should be suppressed.
Summary:
Word number: 34
Class: NOMINAL VALUE
Variable format: BIN-1
Pre-decimal point positions: 2
After decimal point positions: 1
Minimum value PCS: 0
Maximum value PCS: 100
Minimum value PLC: 0
Maximum value PLC: 4095
The variable is to be inserted in the operating text 120 as follows:
POTENTIAL: ••• VOLT CONTINUED: >
If the value $0800 (2048) is in word 34, then there appears in the display with operating text 120 the following:
POTENTIAL: 5.0 VOLT CONTINUED: >
Operation as nominal variable in a menu:

The value can be altered with the numeric keys.
(V)BIN(0)-1(2): Separation of pre-decimal point and after decimal point, change occurs with key (.).
(V)BIN(0)-A(B): Simple pushing through from right to left springing over the decimal point.
Offset input possible (not with VBIN variables!): e.g., ".", "2", "+", : new display (example) 5.2!
Keys "+"/"-":
BIN(0)-1,2,A,B: Adding / subtracting is with 1 (also with ".").
VBIN (0)-1,2,A,B: Change of operational signs at any time.
Tips!
Only altered values are written back within the limiting values.
If the original value is outside the limiting values, then inverse fields will be displayed.
If a value outside the limiting values has been keyed in (this is only possible with direct numeric input)
then by ENTER of departure from the field, a check will be carried out. If there is an error and the
given value was smaller than the minimum value, then the minimum value will be displayed.
Furthermore the acoustic signal rings out and nothing is written in the PLC.
It is possible to leave the inverse field. For example, if the first variable in a menu text is outside the
limiting value, then it is not possible to page further. First of all the value has to be corrected (a valid
value is keyed in when BIN is "+", "-" or "CLR" and with VBIN only "CLR" or per character input).
The declared range of values (PLC and PCS) may only be negative with VBIN(0) variables. In this case
the minus sign is merely to be set before the corresponding value or values.
4 Variables
4.6 Variables format WORD

The 16 bit value of a word in the PLC is displayed in the bit format. The keys [+] and [-] enable a cursor to be positioned on
the individual bits. An individual bit be cancelled with the [0]-key or set with [1]-key. This data format requires a definite 17
character place in a line. An empty space has been set between the HIGH- and the LOW-byte as an convenient division.
The WORD variable of the PCS is used to represent the content of a 16-bit word in different formats:
KM - bit-by-bit representation of a word, e.g. 10001001 10101011 (see word variable)
KH - hexadecimal representation of a word, e.g. 89AB (for entry see ASCII variable)
KY - byte-by-byte decimal representation, e.g. 137 171 (for entry see binary variable)
Attention!
The variable formats KM, KH, and KY are available starting with the following hardware versions:
PCS 009 version V2000 and up
PCS 090 version V205B and up
PCS 095/095.1 version V4067, 4 data records
PCS 095/095.1 version V5066, 1 data record
PCS 095.2 from version V428A, International character set
PCS plus series all versions
Example:
It is to be assumed that you have defined a word variable on word 35 as a nominal value with the help of the programming
software PCSPRO.
Summary:
Word number: 35
Variable format: WORD
1. FFormat
ormat when using bit-by-bit representation (corresponds to KM)
bit-by-bit
The word on the specified address is represented in binary format using 0 and 1 (e.g. a PRESET value has been assigned to
word 135): The insertion of the variable into the operating text 99 is represented below:
W 35 BINARY: ••••••••••••••••• CONTINUED: >
If word 135 contains the value $5A5A the following is displayed with operating text 99 selected:
W 35 BINARY: 01011010 01011010 CONTINUED: >
Using the [+] and [-] keys, the cursor can be moved bit-by-bit if the variable is used in a menu. The bit at the cursor position
can be set to logic. 0 and 1 by using the [0] and [1]-keys.
4 Variables
2. Format when using the dual decimal representation (corresponds to KY)

The word on the specified address is represented using decimal numbers with separation of the high and low byte of the word:
W 35 BINARY: ••••••• CONTINUED: >
W 35 BINARY: 123 123 CONTINUED: >
0..9: calculator entry of high/low byte; Point: switching between digit high/low byte; +/-: INC/DEC of high/low byte
3. Format when using hexadecimal representation (corresponds to KH)

The word on the specified address is represented word-by-word using the numbers 0...F.
W 35 BINARY: •••• CONTINUED: >
W 35 BINARY: 5A5A CONTINUED: >
Point: change to the next digit (right direction); 0...9: assigning a number to each digit; +/-: accessing the numbers A..F
(pseudo tetrad).
Generally, a modified value is only stored in word 135, if the ENT key is pressed or if you exit the variable field.
Attention!
* If the previous value is not changed, no data are stored.
Restoring the previous value is possible at any time using the CLR key.
The WORD variable format permanently requires 17 characters in the display (the 8 most significant
bits are separated by a SPACE from the 8 least significant bits)!
* This point is only valid, if the operating page options correspond to the default setting!
4 Variables
4.7 Variables format ASCII

Up to 16 characters (8 words) in the PLC can be displayed or altered as ASCII characters. The + and - keys enable the ASCII
characters to be presented with the next higher or lower ASCII code. The (.) switches the cursor one position to the right. After
the last character has been entered, activation of the (.) key, the cursor again appears on the 1st character.
Example:
It is assumed that you have defined an ASCII variable on word 36 as nominal value with the help of the programming software
PCSPRO. You wish to be able to key in and display a 16 digit serial number.
Summary:
Word number: 36
Variable format: ASCII
Number of characters: 16 (8 words)
SERIAL NUMBER: •••••••••••••••• CONTINUED: >
If there exists in the words W36=$4557, W37=$4120, W38=$344E, W39=$4542, W40=$2D38, W41=$3131, W42=$3530
und W43=$3533 (corresponds to the String "EWA-4NEB 8115033), then with the selected operating text 90, the following
appears in the display:
SERIAL NUMBER: EWA-4NEB 8115033 CONTINUED: >
4 Variables
Should the variable be used in a menu, then the cursor (flashing position) can be moved one place to the step by step to the
right with the help of the "." key. If the cursor is resting at the variable end (end of the character string), then activation of the
"." key sends it once again to the beginning of the variables. Every sign, including the special signs can be selected with the
"+" and "-" keys. An altered value is first written in the delivery area first after ENTER or departure from the variables field as
from word 36 (W36...W44) Hex coded (except in the case where the value has not been altered).
If the words W36 to W43 are outside the displayable characters, that is to say in the areas $00...$07, $09...$1F or >$7F, there
appears in the string display:
SERIAL NUMBER: ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ CONTINUED: >
After activation of the control keys "+", "-", or "CLR", the "■" characters replaced with "?", so that the variables prediction now
consists of 16 characters with $3F "?".
SERIAL NUMBER: ???????????????? CONTINUED: >
Now the variable can be edited. Afterwards the newly edited variable value can be written in the PLC with ENTER or departure
from the variables field.
Attention!
If the previous value is not modified, no data are stored.
Restoring the previous value is always possible by pressing [CLR].
Only 1 ASCII variable may be used for each display line and no other variables may be shown on that
line.
Only even character lengths are admissible!
4 Variables
4.8 Timer
The variable format TIMER is used to specify a 3-digit time value and to select the time base from 4 possible values.
The TIMER variable reads/writes the content from/into a 16-bit word in the following format:
00dd cccc bbbb aaaa
aaaa = BCD-coded number D1 (0..9) of the time value
bbbb = BCD-coded number D2 (0..9) of the time value
cccc = BCD-coded number D3 (0..9) of the time value
dd = Time base value (0..3)
Word content 2 1 0 0 - time value 100 corresponds to 100 seconds
|
Time base 2 (corresponds to * 1s)
The texts used to represent the selected time base can be created as desired. To modify a TIMER preset value, the time value
and (if required) the time base must be modified. To switch between these two entries, use the (.) key of the PCS.
The time value can be directly modified using the numeric keys. If the time base modification is activated, it can be selected
with the (±) key.
Timer variable in accordance with the Siemens format with 3 BCD digits and 4 Project.AP with a maximum of 37 characters.
Example with an AP comprising 4 characters:
TIMER: ••••••• CONTINUED:>
TIMER: 123ABCD CONTINUED:>
Word format:
Bits 12+13= These bits indicate the corresponding AP.
Bit 11...0 = 3-digit BCD number
Attention!
The variable formats KM, KH, and KY are available starting with the following hardware versions:
PCS 009 version V2000 and up
PCS 090 version V205B and up
PCS 095/095.1 version V4067, 4 data records
PCS 095 from version V5066, 1 data records
PCS 095.2 from version V428A, International character set
4 Variables
4.9 Internal variable formats

PC
PCSS 009 / 090 / 095 / 095.1 / 095.2:
Apart from the variables defined by the user, there are 6 predefined internal variables. At present, only variables above ZP are
being used. These variables can be displayed in the PCS display.
Description of the internal variables PC S009 / 090 / 095 / 095.1 / 095.2:
PCS009
NAME CONTENTS FORMAT LENGTH ACTUAL/NOMINAL
ZP NUMBER OF INFORMATIONS BIN 3 ACTUAL
ZQ NUMBER OF WARNINGS BIN 3 ACTUAL
ZR NUMBER OF FAULTS BIN 3 ACTUAL
ZT MENU NUMBER BIN 3 ACTUAL
ZV SCROLL TIME BIN 2 NOMINAL
ZX INTERFACE FAULTS BIN 2 ACTUAL
Z084 SOFTKEY TEXT LINE_1 STRING 20/40**) ACTUAL
Z085 SOFTKEY TEXT LINE_2 STRING 20/40**) ACTUAL
Additional internal variables of PC
PCSS 095 / 095.1 / 095.2:
ZA PRN_TIMEOUT BIN 3 NOMINAL
ZB PRN_RS232/TTY STRING 5 NOMINAL
ZC PRN_HANDSHAKE STRING 3 NOMINAL
ZD PRINT DIRECTION STRING 4 NOMINAL
ZE PRN_BAUD RATE STRING 5 NOMINAL
ZF PRN_DATA BITS STRING 1 NOMINAL
ZG PRN_STOP BITS STRING 1 NOMINAL
ZH PRN_PARITY STRING 4 NOMINAL
Brief explanation of the existing internal variables:

ZP: The number of currently set notes is displayed as a 3-digit actual value.
ZQ: The number of currently set warnings is displayed as a 3-digit actual value.
ZR: The number of currently set faults is displayed as a 3-digit actual value.
ZT: The current menu number is displayed as a 3-digit actual value.
ZV: The scroll time in the message memory can be displayed in seconds or edited. This alteration is only valid until the
next RESET is performed and is not retained in memory.
ZX: The maximum number of faulty (repeated) packages since the RESET is displayed. This number refers to 100 packages
each and indicates the safety of data transmission which in turn depends on the cable length, the cable type and
the influence of electric and magnetic interferences.An error rate of up to 1% errors is uncritical. This information
applies to all drivers that support the internal ZX variable.
Z084: Variable format SOFTKEY TEXT LINE_1 STRING 20/40 ACTUAL*) **)
Z085: Variable format SOFTKEY TEXT LINE_2 STRING 20/40 ACTUAL **)
For an explanation of the additional internal variables, please refer to section Printer parameters.
The SOFTKEY TEXT LINE variable allows a comment to be issued for the presently set softkey text number (DW26 HB). It is
comparable to a STRING variable with a constant expression length of 40 characters (PCS 090/PCS 095) or 20 characters (PCS
009). The user can define the individual expressions in the PCSPRO. A total of up to 128 softkey text expressions is available.
There are two SOFTKEY TEXT LINES, allowing both the uppe r and the lower softkey line to be assigned a comment of its
own. The variables are allowed in all priorities. They cannot be edited as their expressions are constantly allocated to the PLC
SOFTKEY_TEXT_NUMBER high byte.
*) PCS 090: only variable format SOFTKEY TEXT LINE_1.

**) PCS 009 and PCS 095: both variable formats are valid. Length for PCS 009: 20 characters; for PCS 090/095: 40 characters.
4 Variables
4.9.1 Internal variables of PCS 009plus, 090plus, 095plus
The devices of the PCS plus series have 26 internal variables. The differences are shown in the table.
Name Contents Format Length Act./Nom. Addressable

[ZP] NOTES BIN 3 Act. no
[ZQ] WARNINGS BIN 3 Act. no
[ZR] FAULTS BIN 3 Act. no
[ZT] MENU_NUMBER BIN 3 Act. no
[ZV] SCROLL_NOMINAL BIN 2 Nom. no
[ZX] ERR_INTERFACE BIN 2 Act. no
[ZA] PRN_TIMEOUT BIN 3 Nom. no
[ZB] PRN_RS232/TTY STRING 5 Nom. no
[ZC] PRN_HANDSHAKE STRING 3 Nom. no
[ZD] PRINT_DIRECTION STRING 4 Nom. no
[ZE] PRN_BAUD RATE STRING 5 Nom. no
[ZF] PRN_DATA BITS STRING 1 Nom. no
[ZG] PRN_STOP BITS STRING 1 Nom. no
[ZH] PRN_PARITY STRING 4 Nom. no
[Z15]* CLOCK_SECONDS BIN 2 Nom. yes
[Z16]* CLOCK_MINUTES BIN 2 Nom. yes
[Z17]* CLOCK_HOURS BIN 2 Nom. yes
[Z18]* DATE_DAY BIN 2 Nom. yes
[Z19]* DATE_MONTH BIN 2 Nom. yes
[Z20]* DATE_YEAR BIN 2 Nom. yes
[Z21]* WEEKDAY_NOMINAL STRING 2 Nom. yes
[Z22]* WEEKDAY_ACTUAL STRING 2 Act. yes
[Z23]* TIME TIME 8 Act. yes
[Z24]* DATE DATE 8 Act. yes
[Z25]** RECIPE_NO_ACTUAL BIN 4 Act. yes
[Z26]** RECIPE_NO_NOMINAL BIN 4 Nom. yes
[Z084] SOFTKEY_LINE_1 STRING 40 Act. no

[Z085] SOFTKEY_LINE_2 STRING 40 Act. no
Length = Number of characters in the display
* Description of time and date: see section 8.

** Description of recipies: see section 10.
All other variables have been described in the previous section Internal variable formats and in section Printer parameters.
4 Variables
4.10 Treatment of variables

Every variable is automatically read by the PCS; that is to say the specified word number. The PLC specific word number (DW,
MW, DM, Counter...) or indication, can be found in the help section of the driver manual PCS 91.xxx. This also applies for
nominal values. Here the read value is displayed as preset value (refer to the chapter "Variables in menus").
The following rules apply for the refressing of variables (ACTUAL values or non active nominal-P-values):
Continual refressing of variables occurs in every priority class. The rate of refress depends on various factors: the number
of variables in the display, the type of driver, the transmission speed (baud rate), the number of tasks that can be achieved
in a transfer paket, as well as the answer time of the PLC which is independant of the PLC cycle time. The best case shows
a refress time of roughly 8 per second.
There is no difference between internal and external variables. As long as the variable values have not been transfered,
spaces are shown in the display. If the read value is outside the filed limiting values in the PCS, then the inverse fields will
be displayed in the variables field (every one with dots).
Nominal-P-variables are treated exactly like ACTUAL values as long as the bit 7 in word 14 is logic 1.
Special treatment is required for PC
PCSS 009, PC
PCSS 095, PC
PCSS 095.1, PC
PCSS 095plus as follows:
If there are more than 8 double words from an PLC to read in a display page (4 lines), then the reading is divided into two
different PLC cycles. First the variables which are in the first line pair are read, then finally those in the second pair of lines.
The following rules apply for the editing and writing of variables (NOMINAL and NOMINAL-P):
Nominal-P-variables are first read before activation and then frozen. As a result an alteration of the value by the PLC is not
recognisable after freezing. As soon as a key is pressed to editor the nominal values, a flashing cursor appears and the
remaining variable is presented in a static form. This doesn't apply with offset input nor with the variable bit or CSTRING,
as these are written at once.
As far as nominal value (NOMINAL or NOMINAL-P) is to be altered, it will be written by activating the ENTER key or by
leaving the variables field (permitted arrow key). There is an exception for the menu end. In this case the last presented
value is written on any account.
If an active nominal-P-value is in the display an is set in word 14 bit 7 to zero, then this variable can be written at once.
Finally the first to be edited nominal value of this display side will be looked for and presented flashing (not yet edited).
After a nominal-P-value has been written by the PCS, it will be read twice again (differing PLC cycles). Finally it will be
compared with the previous edited value. If there is a difference in the values, the acoustic warning signal rings and the
current value of the PLC is momentarily displayed flashing. Thereby a dynamic examination of the limiting values by the
PLC is possible. First after activating the proposed value as suggested by the PLC, with ENTER or a permissible "arrow key"
can you quit the variable field (or even a menu). With scaled binary variables where the PLC area is larger that the PCS
area, care must be taken that the correct value, "level" is presented by the PLC. Here is an example: the range of values of
the PCS goes from 0...1000, the range of values of the PLC from 0...65535. The value 10 in the PCS display corresponds
to the value 655 in the PLC. The value 11 in the PCS display corresponds to the value 721 in the PLC. If the PLC is written
with the value 670, the menu could never be completed as the PCS value of (655) always differs form the 670.
4 Variables
5 Texts
5.1 Text groups
There are 3 groups of freely defined texts:
1. 128 OPERATING TEXTS: 2 (PCS 090, 090plus) i.e., 4 (PCS 009, 009plus, 095, 095.1, 095plus) line texts, which can be
used as DEFAULT TEXTS and MENU TEXTS.
2. PCS topline: 128 MESSAGE TEXTS
PCS plus: 1024 MESSAGE TEXTS
Text pages which can be up to 32 lines (max.) in length. These texts are allocated to the message bits and can be
displayed as INFORMATION, WARNINGS, FAULTS and as RECEIPES (only PCS plus).
3. PCS topline: 5 HELP TEXTS
PCS plus: 6 HELP TEXTS
The HELP TEXT is maximum a 32 line text page, which can be brought anytime into the ON-LINE operation with the HLP
key. Individual text pages can be produced according to priority class (default texts, menus, information, warnings and
faults).
4. 127 RECIPE TEXTS: Text pages which can be up to 32 lines in length. The values of the external variables in this texts
getting read from a special receipe memory and can only fetched by an upload from the PLC.
Additional lines can be found with the "DOWN ARROW" in those texts which have more than 2 (PCS 090, 090plus) i.e., 4 (PCS
009, 009plus, 095, 095.1, 095plus) lines can be switched further. With the "UP ARROW" the first display; known as main lines
can be found. If a text consists of only one line, the following lines in the display are empty. If the bit 14 and 15 in word 13
are logic 0, the relevant arrow key LED lights up in order to show whether the main lines or extra lines can be activated.
Alterable texts can be achieved using variables within the main texts. The conversion of numerical and logical values into text
form is done by the PCS. The PCS therefore requires a variable definition during programming and also space allocation in the
text. This definition contains also the format and the length of the variable. These lengths are important in the formulation
of the texts. If the texts are defined with the help of the programming software PCSPRO, then the text length is checked
automatically.
Apart from monitoring the variables value in the PLC, no extra PLC programme is necessary. The variables are refreshened
cyclically in every priority, whereby every value in the display comes from a fixed data exchange cycle. An exception is for the
PCS 009, PCS 095, PCS 095.1, where more than eight double words (i.e., 16 words) are read. This reads those variables out
of the upper two and lower two display lines in separate PLC cycles.
As the variable can also be presented in text form, the recognition of the variables format BIT, STRING, CSTRING, ASCII, WORD
and TIMER important for projecting distribution of text.
Every menu is a collection of between 1 to 255 menu points (nodes). The start up and termination of a menu is controlled by
the PLC. Switching between nodes is under operator control only.
5 Texts
5.2 Administration of priorities
Several of the priorities in the PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1 can be active. It is always the highest active released
priority that will be displayed. If a priority is deleted or barred, then the next lower active released priority will be displayed.
The behaviour of the PCS is shown by the PCS status, which is put at disposal in the PLC transfer area in the words 6...9, as
well as in the command word A (W13):
- Word 6 (bit 0...5) displays every active priority, even when they are barred and therefore not on display.
- Word 7 (bit 8...11) shows the priority currently on display. This is the highest active released priority.
- In the command word A (W13; bit 8...11) several priorities (menu, information, warning and fault) can be barred at any
time. This can be used, for example, to prevent a menu from being interrupted by a information, warning or fault as long
as it is active.
Here is an example that will clarify the matter:

Assume that:
- Fault priority is barred (that means bit 11 of word 13 logic 0), every other one active (bit 8...10 of word 13 logic 1): W13,
bit 8...11: 0111.
- The following priorities are active: Fault, information, menu: word 6 bit 0...5: 0x1011.
Valid therefore is:

- The highest presentable display, i.e., active priority is information (word 7, bit 11...8: 0100).
If the information is deleted, then the menu is the highest valued active released priority:
- Word 7, bit 8...11: 0010; word 6, bit 0...5: 0x1001.
If the operator presses the HLP key, and assuming that a help text has been programmed into the priority menu, then the
help text will be displayed on account of its higher (not barred) priority. If the operator releases the HLP key, the menu will
again be displayed.
As soon as the PLC again releases the fault priority (bit 11 of word 13 is logic 1), the fault message will be displayed.
If the fault message is then deleted, the menu will again appear.
When the operator terminates the menu after having controlled the PLC, the preselected default text will be displayed.
- Recipes (only PCS plus) have the same priority as the menus. To distinguish bit 7 of the recipe operating word is used (see
also chapter 10).
Bit 7 = 1: when RECIPENO_ACT a available recipe texts mark, the recipe texts will be displayed.
Bit 7 = 0: Menu will be displayed.
5 Texts
The priorities 0 to 8 allow themselves to be limited by the PLC (from the highest to the lowest).
Here are the individual priority classes:
Lowest 0 = DEFAULT TEXT (operating texts 0...127)

and
HISTORY DISPLAY (the last 50 messages can be displayed as a history text)
activated through bit 0 in word 27
displayed when there is no higher priority switched on.
: *) 2 = MENU (operating texts 0...127)

activated and concluded through the PLC (word 14)
and
RECEIPE TEXTS (receipe texts 1 ...127)
activated through bit 7 in the receipe operating word
in conjunction with a valid RECEIPENO_ACT
: *) 4 = INFORMATION (message texts 0...127)

activated through 0 > 1 transfers at least one message
bit to which a text with INFORMATION priority has been
allocated to. Deactivated according to the cancel mode
of the corresponding INFORMATION message texts.
: *) 6 = WARNING (message texts 0...127)

activated through 0 > 1 transfers at least one message bit
to which a text with WARNING priority has been allocated to.
Deactivated according to the cancel mode of the corresponding
WARNING message texts.
: *) 8 = FAULTS (message texts 0...127)

activated through 0 > 1 transfers at least one message bit to
which a text with FAULTS priority has been allocated to. Deactivated
according to the cancel mode of the corresponding FAULTS message texts.
: 12 = HELP (Help texts on (R) default-, (M) enu-, (H) information-, (W) arnings- and (S) faults priority)
activated by pressing <HLP>
deactivated by releasing <HLP>
Prerequisite: HELP-text is allocated to the corresponding priority.
: **) ERROR PRIORITY (firm text)

activated through interfaces or start test error usually deactivated
through PLC RESET command.
highest PLC stop/run - transmission or new start
*) These priorities are not activated, if they are barred through the PLC.
**) This error case will be caused mainly by driver in the error word W3 of the PLC. The executions of the error
word are specifically to do with the driver and are therefore to be found in the manual PCS 91.xxx.
5 Texts
5.3 Default text priority
The operating texts 0...127 belong to this priority class. They can all be applied as default texts. The operating texts can and
will be used in menus. The PLC alone decides which of these default texts (bit 8...14 in word 14) are to be displayed and whether
or not the default text should be flashing (bit 15 in word 14). The character and control keys do not have any function here.
However if they are pressed, then the acoustic error will be suppressed in order that the control keys can be applied for control
purposes. An exception here is the HLP key, which brings the defined help text in the default priority onto the display. Every
variable can use NOMINAL values, NOMINAL-P-values and ACTUAL values. None the less nominal values can not be changed.
Every variable is cyclically refreshed.
The DEFAULT TEXT Nr. 0 possesses a special position: it immediately appears after switching on the PCS even when no
communication has been started with the PLC. Should a variable be in the idle text 0, then this variable will be replaced by
an empty space until the variable out of the PLC can be read. This is an good way to recognize whether the communication
has been started.
If an default text is selected that is not declared, then the previous displayed default text will remain active.
In the devices of the PCS plus series the daily history texts lay also on priority 0 ( see chapter "Daily history")
5.4 Daily history priority (PCS plus only)

Note!
Only applicable for devices of the PCS plus series!
The daily history display of the devices of the PCS plus series does not feature a priority of itsown.
Instead, the default texts and the history texts share priority 0. They are distinguished by bit 0 of data
word W27. The default text is only replaced by a history text if this bit is set and history entries are
available. Status bit 4 in W6 is set when a history text is displayed at priority 0. Also refer to section
Daily history.
5.5 Menu priority
127 menus are available for this priority class (2). The menus are labelled with numbers from 1...127. A menu consists of one
or more nodes (1...255), whereby an operating text (0...127) is allocated to every node.
A menu is called with the command word B (W14), bit 0...6.
Requirements for starting up the menu priority is that a menu is programmed and that no higher priority prevents the start
up of the menu.
The actual node number is displayed in the word 6, bit 8...15 as status.
Within a menu additional nodes can be reached with the arrow keys, whereby the structure is freely programmable. The first
declared node is the initial node or start node. This initial node is activated by the call of the menu.
It will be determined through bit 7 in word 14, whether nominal-P-variables can be modified or not. If bit 7 logic 0, then only
nominal values can be modified. If bit 7 is logic 1, then nominal value variable and nominal-P-variable can be modified. This
bit can be changed by the PLC at any time, e.g., node dependent.
In the devices of the PCS plus series the receipe texts lay also on priority 2 (see chapter "Receipe priorities").
5 Texts
5.6 Recipe priority (PCS plus only)

Note!
Only applicable for devices of the PCS plus series!
The recipe texts of the devices of the PCS plus series do not feature a priority of their own. Instead, the
recipes and the menus share priority 2. They are distinguished by bit 7 of the recipe control word. The
menu is only replaced by a recipe text if this bit is set and REZEPTNR_IST contains the number of an
existing recipe text (unequal to 0).
Status bit 14 of the recipe control word indicates whether or not the display contains a recipe.
5.7 Message priorities
In these priority classes (4, 6 and 8) texts are called by the setting of a bit in the message area word 15 up to maximum word
22. A message text with maximum 32 lines is allocated to each of the 128 bits. An individual MESSAGE PRIORITY can be
determined for each of the 128 texts (fixed through programming). Here they are individually.
■ INFORMATION PRIORITY (Priority 4)
■ WARNING PRIORITY (Priority 6)
■ FAULT PRIORITY (Priority 8)
These priority classes differenciate themselves only on the priority level and not in there function. For every priority class there
is an individual storage behaviour (word 12 bit 0...5) and an individual display behaviour (word 12 bit 8...10) which is controlled
by the PLC (and therefore can be changed over at any time). Refer to the following section for further information on this matter.
Should a message bit be set, to which no message text has been declared, then there will be no reaction.
5.8 Help priority
This priority level is the highest priority level. Under normal conditions, the user always has access to it. It is active as long as
the [HLP] key is pressed. Releasing the key switches this priority off again. The PLC cannot lock this priority level which is
therefore always accessible to the user if a HLP text has been defined for the priority currently shown on the display. The text
required in this case is an independent text of no more than 32 lines. We recommend to integrate all variables that might be
important for troubleshooting (also internal variables!) in this text .
Each of the priorities 0..8 (default, menu, note, warning, recipe and fault priority) features help text pages of itsown.
When the [HLP] key is pressed, [ARROW DOWN] is used to scroll to the next line and the [HLP] key is then released, the line
numbers will be saved (not available after the next power-on). Pressing the [HLP] key again causes the text page defined before
to be displayed. [ARROW UP] (with the [HLP] key pressed) allows you to switch back to the main lines.
The arrow key LEDs indicate whether successive lines or main lines can be reached (if bit 15 of word 13 is logically set to 0).
The help text for the default priority is only available when communication is in progress. In other cases (only after a RESET
or power off/power on), constant texts are displayed for diagnostic purposes. Refer to section Diagnostic text.
5 Texts
5.9 Error priority
The highest priority level described here is activated through various errors. The respective texts can not be modified. These
texts exist as English abbreviations. A listing of possible messages you can find in chapter 12.
Warning!
After a communication loss, all actions which should have been performed by the programmable controller
during the communication interruption are transmitted by the PCS to the programmable controller. The
correct action/reaction of the programmable controller and the PCS have to be checked after a restart!
6 Menus
There are a total of 127 menus available. The menus are numbered from 1 to 127. A menu consists of one or more nodes
(1...255), an operating text (0...127) is allocated to every node.
The actual node number is displayed in word 6, bit 8...15.
Further nodes can be reached within the menus via the arrow keys. Here the structure is freely programmable. The first specified
node is the initial node, i.e., start node. This initial node is displayed by calling the menu through the appointed operating
text.
By means of the status of bit 7 from the command word B (W14), the operator can determine at any time whether the nominal-
P-variables are alterable or not. If bit 7 = 0, then only a pure nominal value can be altered. If the bit D7 = 1, then the nominal
and nominal-P-variables can be altered.
If the cursor is positioned on a nominal-P-value and at the same time bit 7 in word 14 is logic 0, then this nominal value can
be changed. When a nominal value is entered withing the appropriate limiting values and transfered to the PLC and read again
by the PCS, the editor field is then free. The editing position is initially set on the first nominal value of the display page that
is eligibe to be edited. If there are no nominal values, then all variables will be treated as actual values.
Starting up the menus

The PLC programme writes a menu number (1 to 127) on the lower valued byte of the command word B (W14), bit 0...6.
Bit 7 of the command word B (W14) determines whether a nominal-P-value can be altered or not. If bit 7 is logic 0, then
this will still be written and finally depart from the variables position, if it is the case that the currently edited nominal
value concerns a nominal-P-value.
Termination of the menus

Termination of the menus takes place with the PLC, the menu number of the command word B (W14) bits 0...6 are set to
logic 0.
The menu can however only bed exited when an altered nominal value has been read twice out of the data area of the
PLC and that it is checked with the previously written value. The PLC therefore can recognize and reject (dynamic limiting
value examination) locking or minimum and maximum overlapping. Should the nominal value not be taken over by the
PLC and therefore immediately written over, then the input field remains active (flashing) with the current PLC variable
values. The menu can only be terminated when the comparison of the written nominal value with the read nominal value
are checked with one another. In order to show the operator that this nominal value input is not possible an INFORMA-
TION text could be displayed for example. It has to be acknowledged with the CLR key. This acknowledgement doesn't
influence the nominal value in any manner (it functions similar to an interruption).
There is an exception for variables, which are presented with inverse fields. In this case, the menu can still be left as long
as no editing follows.
The actual menu end can be recognized with the negative edge of bit 0 in word 6 (PCS-status).
6 Menus
6.1 Build-up of the menus

Each one of the maximum 127 possible menus (1...127) can possess a particular structure. If complex structures are to be used,
then it is recommended to procede in the following manner (separate for each menu):
First the structure is put down on paper, where the node connections are joined with several coloured lines (a different
colour for every arrow key).
Finally an operating text number is allocated to every node. Similar operating texts can be readily used in several menus
(furthermore this saves storage space!).
In conclusion every node is given a particular number (1...255).
Branches are decided for every node, where every parameter is taken from the sketches. The initial node, also called start
up node, must appear first (only when applying software PCSPRO. The sequence of the remaining nodes is random
(provided they belong to a menu).
Programming of the menu nodes is written in the manual PCSPRO. The compiler programme checks the plausibility of the menu
definition during the translation. If the programming software PCSPRO is used, the syntax control will be already carried out
during the editing of the menus. Care is to be taken that menus do not fail. In detail this means that every menu node must
be accessible via a path from the start node. There are no further restrictions, i.e., within every node, a given target node within
the same menus can be allocated to every arrow key.
When formulating the operating text, it is important to think out a satisfactory operating procedure. It is certainly feasible to
consider node points without variables, which only serve the operating procedure. Clarity should be achieved with the
application of (programmable) special characters ARROW UPWARDS, ARROW BELOW, as well as ARROW TO THE RIGHT and
ARROW TO THE LEFT (refer to character set) (e.g. character $0E = Arrow upwards, $0F = Arrow downwards, <, >).
As long as the arrow key LEDs in the menus (for the PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1) are free; that is bit 5 of command word
A (W13) is logic 0, the operator is additionally guided with optical displays through the menu. If an arrow key lights up statically,
it means that another additional variable can be selected within the same menu node. If an LED flashes, activation of this key
will cause departure from the currently displayed menu node.
6 Menus
6.2 Variables in the menu

On calling one of the new menus or menu nodes, the first nominal value; after it has been read out of the PLC; will first appear
flashing. Should this predetermined value be outside the defined limiting values, then an inverse field instead of a nominal
value be displayed. A single activation of the editor key CLR (also + or -) gives a permissible value. This is the maximum or
minimum value depending on high or low PLC value. With the ASCII variables "?" is presented as a default value.
Should the sign be altered except for offset input, then the input position is marked by a flashing cursor.
For refreshing variables, the following rules apply: The flashing variable will be picked up once. Every other one on the same
display page with nominal and actual values will be continually refreshed. Should the variable be left after an alteration with
a flashing cursor, then as early as possible in an PLC cycle and later, the value be read again and compared with the edited
value. The input field can be left when the written nominal value is in agreement with the later re-read nominal value. In this
way nominal values; dependant on the situation; can be applied within a menu node.
Attention!
As long as the cursor is flashing, the presentation of an intermediate result is taking place. That means
that the value in the display is not in agreement with the value in controlling operation!
Numerical values can also be altered in the addition and subtraction mode (also known as offset inputs):
<numeric character>, <numeric character>, ...<plus>, possible with BCD(0) and BIN(0)-1,2,A,B.
Afterwards the editor is again in the basic condition (variable flashing). It deals likewise here with an
intermediate result which cannot yet be written back!
The following rules apply in writing nominal-P-values.

Basically only altered values are written back (even after ENTER!). If a value is not written, then an acoustic alarmsignal
rings. An exception applies in terminating a menu: here the last activated nominal value will at least be written.
BIT- and CSTRING variables will be written into the transfer area of the PLC with every alteration.
Should the variables refer to smaller sizes than in the word (as with BCD(0)-1: 1...max. 3 digit, BCD(0)-2: 1...max. 7 digit,
STRING and CSTRING), the leading bits will be processed according to the following logic: leading bits are ignored when
reading in the predetermined values (i.e., if they are set, then they do not lead to the presentation of inverse fields). On
writing back they are set back to zero. This can be evaluated in the PLC for example, in order to be able to react to
nominal value inputs.
The word 8 stands at disposal as status for every variable. The latest edited word number is registered here in higher
valued byte. The number of bytes which were last written stand in the lower valued byte. This word can for example be
zeroed by the PLC and in conclusion monitored on ><0, in order to wait for an input of the PCS operator.
With bit variables, except for the edited ones, they all remain free for alteration. The respective altered bit is additionally
registered in word 9 with logic 1. In this manner it can be found out which bit within the registered bits in word 8 has
changed. The new state of the bits can be registered through and together with the bit mask as registered in word 9 as
well as the amended word number which is registered in word 8.
6 Menus
6.3 Arrow keys in menus

The arrow keys are permitted in a node to direct to further nodes as at the same time to further variables. If a non valid arrow
key is pressed, an acoustic warning signals rings an error. A valid arrow key with LED is displayed, so long as bit 5 of word 13
is logic 0. Should an LED illuminate statically, then an additional variable can be selected from the same page. If on the other
hand an LED flashes, then you can leave this node. These LED functions are only for the PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1.
If several nominal value variables are applied in a text, then these can be reached via the arrow keys. If there are several nodes
in the activated menu, the arrow keys have a double significance (variables-, node exchange). If this is not required then only
one nominal value variable per node or only one node per menu may be declared.
"ARROW-LEFT" "-RIGHT": If several nominal value variables are used in the text, then every line of a display page will be
considered as lying side by side and the next variable will be looked for. In the case the arrow key LEDs are released and
further nominal value variables to be edited are present, then the relevant LED lights up statically. If the actual variable
had just been the last or the first, then the next node is looked for. If this is available, then position will be takten on the
1st variable top left. When the arrow key LEDs are active and a sequence node is available in the direction of the arrow,
then this LED flashes. If there is no node in the direction of the arrow, an acoustic error signals rings.
"CURSOR UP" "-DOWN": If variables are distributed on several display lines, then the first variable in that line will be
selected (left) which is in the direction of the arrow. If the arrow key LEDs active, then the corresponding LED will light up.
If there is no nominal value variable in this line, then the next node in the direction of the arrow will be looked for. In so
far as the arrow key LEDs are free, the relevant LED will flash in this case. If there is no node there, then pressing this key
will sound an acoustic warning.
"CURSOR UP" in the last line and "CURSOR DOWN" in the first line always look for the next node.
Termination of a menu can be recognized in word 6, bit 0. If the bit is logic 0, the menu is no longer active. The exact point
in time of the termination can be found through the negative edge triggering.
The functions of the arrow LEDs have been extended in the following hardware versions:
PCS 009 from V2030 onwards,
PCS 090 from V206C onwards,
PCS 095.1 from V4079 onwards, 4 data records,
PCS 095 from V5079 onwards, 1 data record,
PCS plus
DW12,7 internal LEDs/controlled by PLC(status LEDs in menu, help, and message priority)
DW12,6 static menu LED
Bit 12,7=0 Bit 12,6=0 Arrow LEDs entirely controlled internally.
Bit 12,7=0 Bit 12,6=1 Arrow LEDs entirely controlled internally,

menu LEDs for node change permanently lit (instead of flashing).
Bit 12,7=1 Bit 12,6=x Arrow LEDs controlled externally via lowbyte DW26,
the internal LED functions are always completely separated.
Bits 15, 14 and 5 in DW13 are of no effect.
6 Menus
6.4 Permissible keys in menus
Operation of the integrated editors
Variable Type Key Function
BIT PLUS A bit that was logic 0 sets to logic 1 (at once written in the PLC).
MINUS Deletes a bit that was logic 1 to logic 0 (at once written in the PLC).
* ARROWS Leaves this variable if allowed. The next variable or node in arrow
direction is looked for.
STRING * PLUS Increments the value of a variable, so long as value is still within limiting
values.
* MINUS Decrements the value of a variable, as long as value is still within
limiting values.
CLR Restore the old value in the display; (the last value read by the PLC).
ENTER Writes the selected value in the PLC as long as it has been amended and
not yet written.
* ARROWS Write the selected value, if it has been modified and not yet sent and
then look for the next variables, i.e., the next menu nodes in direction
of arrow.
CSTRING * PLUS Increments the value of a variable, so long as the value is still within the
limiting value (in contrast to STRING at once stored in the PLC).
* MINUS Decrements the value of a variable, so long as the value is still within
the limiting value (in contrast to STRING at once stored in the PLC).
CLR Restore the old value into the display; (the last read value of the PLC).
* ARROWS Leave these variables if allowed to. The next variable or node in arrow
direction looked for.
* = Auto repeat
Keypad
for set value input
Control keys for set

value input
6 Menus
BCD-1 * PLUS/MINUS Adds/subtracts n within the limiting values (Offset input),

BCD-2 whereby
BCD0-1 * n = 1 if no numeral input follows, i.e.,
BCD0-2 * n = given value, if numerical input follows.
CLR Restores old value in the display; (last read value by PLC)
ENTER Writes the selected value in the PLC, if it has been changed and not
yet written.
* ARROWS Write the selected value, if it has been changed and not yet written
and seeks the next variable, i.e., the next node in the arrow
direction.
* NUMBERS Permit direct input.
BIN-A * PLUS/MINUS Adds/subtracts n within the limiting values (Offset input),

BIN-B whereby
BIN0-A * n = 1 if no numeral input has occured, i.e.,
BIN0-B * n = value input, when numerical input has just been entered.
CLR Restores the old value in the display; (last value read by PLC).
yet written.
and seeks the next variable, i.e., the next menu node in arrow
direction.
* NUMBERS Enables direct input. Numbers moved from right to left (even
beyond a decimal point).
BIN-1 * PLUS/MINUS Adds/subtracts n within the limiting values (Offset input),

BIN-2 whereby
BIN0-1 * n = 1 if no numerical input follows, i.e.,
BIN0-2 * n = given value, if numerical input follows.
yet written.
direction.
* NUMBERS Enables direct input. Numbers are entered according to the pocket
calculator principle.
(*) POINT Changes to after decimal point position, if after decimal point
positions are defined.
* = Auto repeat; (*) = Auto repeat, though without significant meaning
6 Menus
VBIN-A * PLUS Gives the operational sign "+".

VBIN-B * MINUS Gives the operational sign "-".
VBIN0-A CLR Restores old value in the display; (last read value by PLC).
VBIN0-B ENTER Writes the selected value in the PLC, if it has been changed and not
yet written.
and seeks the next variable, i.e., the next node in the arrow
direction.
* NUMBERS Permit direct input. Numbers moved from right to left (even
beyond a decimal point).
VBIN-1 * PLUS Gives the operational sign "+".

VBIN-2 * MINUS Gives the operational sign "-".
VBIN0-1 CLR Restores the old value in the display; (last value read by PLC).
VBIN0-2 ENTER Writes the selected value in the PLC, if it has been changed and not
yet written.
and seeks the next variable, i.e., the next node in arrow direction.
* NUMBERS Enables direct input. Numbers entered according to the pocket
calculator principle.
(*) POINT Changes to after decimal point positions, if after decimal point
positions are defined.
WORD * PLUS Moves the cursor one bit position to the right in direction of lowest
value bit LSB.
* MINUS Moves the cursor one bit position to the left in the direction of the
highest bit MSB.
yet written.
direction.
* NUMBERS Only the keys <0> and <1> are significant:
<0> Sets a bit to 0 and moves the cursor, if possible one position
tho the right. If the cursor finds itself at end of the variables,
then it will be positioned on the highest bit (MSB).
<1> Sets a bit to 1 and moves the cursor, if possible one position
to the right. If the cursor finds itself at end of the variables,
then it will be positioned on the highest bit (MSB).
* = Auto repeat; (*) = Auto repeat, though without significance
6 Menus
ASCII * PLUS Presents the character with the next higher displayable character
code.
If the end of the character table has been reached, the first
presentable character is returned.
* MINUS Present the character with the next smaller displayable character
code.
If the begining of the character table has been reached, the last
character out of the character table is returned.
yet written.
* CURSOR Write the selected value, if it has been changed and not yet written
direction.
* POINT Moves the cursor one place to the right. If the variable end has been
reached, then the cursor will again be set on the first position of
the variables.
WORD-KH * PLUS Increments the digit by 1 the cursor is positioned on.

* MINUS Decrements the digit by 1 the cursor is positioned on.
CLR Restores the previous displayed value.
ENTER Writes the selected value into the PCS, if it has been modified, but
not sent yet.
* ARROWS Write the selected value, if it has been modified, but not sent yet
and search for the next variable in the direction of the arrow.
* NUMBERS Used to directly enter numbers (0..9) on the corresponding digit.
* POINT Moves the cursor from left to right. If the rightmost cursor position
is reached, the cursor is repositioned on the left digit.
WORD-KY * PLUS Increments the digit by 1 the cursor is positioned on.

* MINUS Decrements the digit by 1 the cursor is positioned on.
CLR Restores the previous displayed value.
ENTER Writes the selected value into the PCS, if it has been modified, but
not sent yet.
* ARROWS Write the selected value, if it has been modified, but not sent yet
and search for the next variable in the direction of the arrow.
* NUMBERS Used for direct entry: Numbers are shifted from right to left
(calculator entry).
* POINT Switches between high byte and low byte of the data word
(decimal format).
* = Auto repeat
7 Message texts
7.1 Message priorities

In these priority classes (4, 6 and 8) texts are called by the setting of a bit in the message area word 15 up to maximum word
22. A message text with maximum 32 lines is allocated to each of the 128 bits. An individual MESSAGE PRIORITY can be
determined for each of the 128 texts (fixed through programming). Here they are individually.
■ INFORMATION PRIORITY (Priority 4)
■ WARNING PRIORITY (Priority 6)
■ FAULT PRIORITY (Priority 8)
These priority classes differenciate themselves only on the priority level and not in there function. For every priority class there
is an individual storage behaviour (word 12 bit 0...5) and an individual display behaviour (word 12 bit 8...10) which is controlled
by the PLC (and therefore can be changed over at any time). Refer to the following section for further information on this matter.
Should a message bit be set, to which no message text has been declared, then there will be no reaction.
7.1.1 Storage behaviour - message block 0
FIRST VALUE MESSAGE WITHOUT THE POSSIBILITY OF MANUAL SELECTION:

The oldest message text remains in the display until it is deleted.
FIRST VALUE MESSAGE WITH THE POSSIBILITY OF MANUAL SELECTION:
The first bit that has a positive edge (0 > 1 transmission) brings its text in the display. If additional bits are set, then these
texts can be reached with the key "ARROW-RIGHT". Reverse is achieved with "ARROW-LEFT". The text inputs can at any
time and randomly (depending on their cancel modes) be deleted from the memory. If the bit 14 in word 13 is logic 0,
then the manual selectibility, in so far as more than one message is active, will also be displayed with the arrow key LEDs
(left and right).
LAST VALUE MESSAGE WITHOUT THE POSSIBILITY OF MANUAL SELECTION:
Every 0 > 1 transmission brings its text immediately into the display, the older inputs remain in the storage. In case the
most recent message text is deleted, the next most recent message text will appear in the display.
CYCLICAL DISPLAY WITHOUT THE POSSIBILITY OF MANUAL SELECTION:
This kind of storage is in accordance with the first value message. If however several texts are switched on, then the
inputs cycle with a programmable scroll time. If further switching is made to the help texts, then the scroll time will be
started from new (stopping time = 0,5 s). In principle all cancel possibilities are also possible here. Nevertheless as there
is no prohibitive time for keys within a priority, only cancel possibility 1 (no manual deletion) should be chosen (in order
to avoid operation errors).
For example:
The cyclic display is activated. At the moment there are more than two messages of the same priority active. Every
message is programmed with deletion characteristics 2 (therefore can be deleted manually). The operator ascertains that
the currently displayed message can be quitted and he/she presses the CLR key. At the same time, for example, the cyclical
display switches to the next message, the false message is now quitted!
The written storage behaviour is at any time individually adjustable with the bits 0...5 in word 12 for every priority (information,
warning and fault). In this way it is also possible for example to amend the storage behaviour by means of a priority change.
Changing the storage behaviour only influences the display characteristics and not the input behaviour. In order to avoid
incorrect operation, a blocking time of 0.5 seconds for the controlling keys is built in after a priority changeover.
Basically an attempt is being made to also register the chronological appearance of the flags into the correct chronological
sequence. The following limitations are however also imposed. The reading off of the bits has a relatively low priority in
comparison with the other tasks of the PCS.
Should several bits be set in a cycle, the lower text numbers have a higher priority.
7 Message texts
7.1.2 Storage behavior of message blocks 1-7 (PCS plus devices only)
Message blocks 1-7 can be individually released in DW 27. Each 0 -> 1 edge in a released message block activates the
appropriate message. The edge has no effect if no message was programmed. The sequence in which the messages occur
are not stored. This only applies to message blocks 1-7, i.e. for messages 128 - 1023. Instead of the temporal sequence, the
messages is always displayed and stored according to the text numbers where the lowest number corresponds to the first
value message of message block 0 and the highest number to the last value message of message block 0. The cyclic display
and the display with selection option occur accordingly.
The lower text numbers have a higher priority when several bits are set in one cycle. When messages from message block 0
and messages from message blocks 1-7 are available, the messages from message block 0 are displayed first (in the correct
temporal sequence). The first 128 messages have a higher priority with regard to the first value and the last value message
than the following 896 messages. The number of the currently displayed message is output in DW 28.
Note!
We recommend to release only those message blocks that are required. This helps to relieve the commu-
nication between the PCS and the PLC from unnecessary loads.
Computation time can be saved for message blocks 1-7 by avoiding to mix the different message priorities.
Example:
65 notes, 34 warnings and 6 faults are required in message block 1.
Optimum structure:
M128 - M133: Faults
M134 - M167: Warnings
M168 - M232: Notes
7 Message texts
7.2 Cancel modes

The cancel mode is individually programmable for every message bit. It is determined by programming with the programming
software PCSPRO. There are 4 kinds of deletion:
Cancel mode 1, or deletion through the PLC:

The text remains switched on as long as the relevant bit is = 1. If the PLC resets the bit, then the message text
will be cancelled. The bit is merely read by the PCS. The operation required LED (?) is switched off.
Cancel mode 2, or manual deletion by resetting the message bit:
The text is switched on with an 0 > 1 transfer and can be quitted with <CLR>. Thereby the message bit is
cancelled in the PLC and as a result of the deleted message bit, the text is switched off. Reversing the message
bit, on the part of the PLC, has the same effect as pressing the <CLR> key.
The message bit in the PLC programme may only be set once in order to obtain this deletion behaviour (no
current assignment "!"), since the message would again be displayed after the <CLR>.
After activating the <CLR>, the operation requirements LED (?) immediately goes out.
Cancel mode 3, or manual deletion without reversing the message bit:
The text is switched on with an 0 > 1 transfer. Switching off of the text is possible at any time with the <CLR>
key independent of the status of the message bit. The message bit itself (in the PLC) must be reversed with the
PLC programme.
After activating the <CLR>, the operation requirements of the LED (?) goes out immediately.
Cancel mode 4, or manual deletion, if the message bit is 0:
The text is switched on with every 0 > 1 transfer. The text can be switched off with the <CLR>, when the PLC
sets the message bit to 0. The state of the message bit is displayed through the operational requirements-LED
(?).
Flashing: The bit is still log 1, deletions not possible.
Continual light: The bit is log 0, the message may be deleted.Löschverhalten
7.3 Display behaviour

An individual display mode can be controlled at any time by the PLC for any of the priorities 4, 6 and 8, also INFORMATION
(bit 8 of word 12), WARNING (bit 9 of word 12) and FAULT (bit 10 of word 12). Through evaluating word 7 (displayed text
number), for example, can be defined dependent of message texts.
There are two display characteristics:
The bit is logic 0: the message text is static
The bit is logic 1: the message text flashes
7.4 Variables in message texts

Basically every variable within INFORMATION and WARNING priority are treated as actual values. They are continually
refreshed. Editing of the variables is not possible.
7 Message texts
7.5 Diagnostic text

After successful initialization (no "internal error" of the PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1), a diagnostic test can be called
without the communication running to the PLC (LED-"ERR" displays a continual light).
This happens by pressing the HLP key. It is possible to page forward after pressing the ARROW DOWN key onto the additional
lines. Application of the ARROW UP key again presents the main lines. Releasing the HLP key, the display is suspendend and
will be again be actuated by pressing the key. This procedure is however not retentive.
The following diagnostic information, which you should have to hand if possible for telephone enquiries can be read as follows:
Equipment identification and version number of the EPROMS
Information on the data record DAT: name of data record, number of least version EPROM, date and time of the creation
of the data record and software name, with which the texts are made (PPCS or PCSPROX.X).
Information on the driver DRV: Project driver name with date and time, number version EPROM, with which the driver
runs, driver version and every available driver variation with actual settings.
Especially the driver variables "AC...AF", mainly occupied with baud rates and interface types, inform on the possible
interface settings. The currently position of the DIL switch 5, 6 is marked at the beginning of the line with the arrow ">".
Information on the functions (should these be available) FKT: Project function name with date and time, original function
time with date and time, the least number of the version EPROM, with which the function runs, function versions and
every available function variables with actual settings.
Information on the bus modules (only PCS plus), version bus module: version number of the bus module with date and
time.
8 Date/time (PCS plus only)
This section only applies to devices of the PC

PCSS plus series!
The devices of the PCS plus series feature an integrated software clock.
Leap years are calculated correctly. The year 00 is considered to be a leap year, resulting in a correct display of the year 2000.
Time and date can only be calculated if a basic address for the transfer range has been defined in PCSPRO (see section
Transfer range between PCS and PLC). To save computation time, no DW number should be entered if neither the date nor
the time are required.
The following data are provided:

Date (day, month, year)
Day of the week
Time (hour, minute, second)
Note!
The date and the time are cleared when the device is switched off!
The clock's software controller may cause minor time inaccuracies!
The date format can be selected as follows in the PCSPRO Project Times menu:
EU dd.mm.yy
US mm/dd/yy
MIL yy-mm-dd
The display (ACTUAL values) of day of the week, time and date uses the following internal variables:
Z22 WEEKDAY_ACTUAL
Z23 TIME
Z24 DATE
To set the date and the time:

[Z15] CLOCK_SECONDS
[Z16] CLOCK_MINUTES
[Z17] CLOCK_HOURS
[Z18] DATE_DAY
[Z19] DATE_MONTH
[Z20] DATE_YEAR
[Z21] WEEKDAY_NOMINAL
These nominal values can be used to change the date and the time in the PCS.
When variables are used in operator texts, the current values are adopted upon opening of a text. These values can then be
edited and are only adopted after a node or menu change.
8 Date and time (PCS plus only)
Transfer range between PC

PCSS and PLC
The entire date and time information is stored in 4 contiguous data words. The basic address of the first data word (DW m)
can be set in PCSPRO in the Project Times menu.
Transfer range assignment
High byte Low byte

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DWm Reserved Year
DW m+1 Month Day
DW m+2 Day of the week Hour
DW m+3 Minute Second
Transferring the data from the PC

PCSS to the PLC
The date and the time can be transferred to the PLC and constantly updated.
Access occurs using the transfer range by help of the defined DW addresses.
Condition: DW13 / bit 6 = 1 Release for DW12
DW12 / bit 13 = 1 Updates the date/time
Note!
Only data words that have changed will be transferred.
Transferring the data from the PLC to the PCPCSS

It is also possible to transfer the date and the time from the PLC to the PCS. This is useful when the PLC is equipped with a
hardware clock. PLC and PCS can thus be easily synchronized.
Access occurs using the transfer range by help of the defined DW addresses.
Condition: DW13 / bit 6 = 1 Release for DW12

DW12 / bit 12 = 1 Read command
Note!
The PCS automatically clears the bit when all 4 data words have been transferred.
Please ensure beforehand that bit 13 in DW 12 is cleared as otherwise the wrong data are sent to the
PCS.
9 Softkey bar
Up to128 softkey bars can be defined in the PCS. For each of the function keys of each softkey bar, a softkey action can be
assigned for pressing and releasing the key. Each of the softkey actions can comprise up to 8 definable write commands. A
comment text can be assigned each of the defined softkey bars by means of the softkey text line variable. This text can then
be displayed during communication of the device. The high byte of data word 26 of the PLC contains the softkey bar to be
requested.
The PCS 009/009plus also features 8 softkey actions of which, however, only 4 can be selected at a time (either F1...F4 or
F5...F8). The softkey actions are used to change the default page (by writing to the high byte of DW14) or to control function
key LEDs via the PCS.
9.1 Softkey actions

Softkey functions 1..255 are called external softkey actions. Up to 8 different wite operations may be defined for each of
these actions which are used to change the contents of data words in the PLC. Thus, a softkey action could be used to call up
a menu. The following commands are available:
The WRITE command

This command transfers constant values to a word in the PLC. Thus, a speed could be set to the value of 870 each time
a key is pressed.
The OR command
This command serves for replacing specific bits in a data word in the PLC without affecting other bits.
The AND command

This command serves for resetting specific bits in a data word without affecting other bits.
9 Softkey bar
9.2 Example of a softkey bar and softkey actions
Press a single button

button!!
To make your PLC program even smaller and faster!

An operating concept without an additional PLC program!
Word 10 = 00000000 10000000

Word 13 = 00001111 11001000
Word 14 = 00000000 00000000
Word 26 = 00000000 00000000
Word 100 = + 54
Word 101 = 01100000 00100001
Word 10 = 10000000 00000000

Word 13 = 00000001 11001000
Word 14 = 00000000 10000001
Word 26 = 00000001 00000000
Word 100 = + 870
Word 101 = 01100000 00100000
9 Softkey bar
Faster results with softkeys!

This tool allows you to call up and operate all the PCS functions without an additional PLC program. A function key can be
assigned up to 128 different tasks, and it is of no importance whether this task is to trigger a machine operation, a PCS
function change or both.
Example:
An F1 key is to make the green LED light up and to switch off the yellow LED. A menu (hand) is to be called up and the
softkey bar is to be changed to allow the menu to be left later with the F1 key (using a new action). The priorities are to
be locked, the decimal machine parameters (e.g. in word 100) are to be set to a specific value (870 rpm) and the bit for
Auto (e.g. in word 101 bit 0) is to be reset.
All of this can be stored in one key without programming a single PLC command.
The PCSPRO programming interface features a convenient editor for softkey actions that allows our example to be simply
programmed by completing a table.
PCSPRO Menu Softkey action 1
NONE WRITE AND OR DW BIN DEC HEX VALUE

1) ( ) ( ) () ( ) 10 () ( ) ( ) 11111111 01111111
2) ( ) ( ) ( ) () 10 () ( ) ( ) 10000000 00000000
3) ( ) ( ) () ( ) 13 () ( ) ( ) 00000001 11111111
4) ( ) () ( ) ( ) 14 () ( ) ( ) 00000000 10000001
5) ( ) ( ) () ( ) 26 () ( ) ( ) 00000000 11111111
6) ( ) ( ) ( ) () 26 () ( ) ( ) 00000001 00000000
7) ( ) () ( ) ( ) 100 ( ) () ( ) 870
8) ( ) ( ) () ( ) 101 () ( ) ( ) 11111111 11111110
1) AND word 10 with value 11111111 01111111 = switches off the yellow LED for F1
2) OR word 10 with value 10000000 00000000 = switches on the green LED for F1
3) AND word 13 with value 00000001 11111111 = resets the priorities on the menu level
4) Write to word 14 the value 00000000 10000001 = calls up menu 1 with release of the NOMINAL-P bit
5) AND word 26 with value 00000000 11111111 = sets the softkey bar to zero but does not affect the
cursor LEDs
6) Now OR word 26 with value 00000001 00000000 = calls up softkey bar 1
7) Write 870 to word 100 = sets the speed in word 100 to 870
8) AND 101 with value 11111111 11111110 = resets bit 0 in word 101 for Auto operation
Once the action table for action 1 is completed, it can be simply inserted in softkey bar 0 using the softkey bar editor.
To ensure that the operator always has an exact overview, the internal variable SOFTKEY_TEXT_LINE_1 is integrated in
every text. When the softkey bar is changed, SOFTKEY_TEXT_LINE_1 is automatically updated and immediately displays
the new key function.
9 Softkey bar
10 Recipes (PCS plus only)

PCSS plus series!
10.1 Introduction
The PCS 009plus, 090plus and 095plus devices contain a recipe management unit with:
127 recipe texts
up to 32 lines each
up to 4 variables per line
The recipes are permanently stored in a separate EEPROM memory.
Display of recipes:
External variables are always read from the recipe memory (not from the PLC).
Internal variables are always displayed with their current values.
The data can always be changed in the PCS.
Restrictions
The line cannot hold another variable if an ASCII variable is used.
Allocation of recipe variables: use each data word only once per recipe.
(no multiple usage of data words)
Allocation of bit variables: use each data bitonly once per recipe.
(no multiple usage of data bits)
Data transmission possibilities:

From the PCS to the PLC (download)
From the PLC to the PCS (upload)
10.2 Operation
Recipe texts are exclusively selected by means of the data words in the transfer range. This provides two possibilities for selection:
Write to the transfer range from the PLC

Write to the transfer range from the PCS, e.g. using a softkey action assigned to a function key
The arrow keys are used for scrolling the lines.

Arrow down key: scroll down in steps of 2 (PCS 090plus) or 4 (PCS 009plus, 095plus) lines
Arrow up key: to the top line
10.3 Selecting recipes

Two internal variables are available for defining and displaying recipes:
Name Contents Format Length Act/Nom
Z25: RECIPE_NO_ACTUAL BIN 4 Act
Z26: RECIPE_NO_NOMINAL BIN 4 Nom
The variables are copied to the communication data chip. The address of the first variable (DW m) is given in the Rezepttexte
window of the programming software. Starting with this address, a block of 3 contiguous data words will be reserved.
Transfer range
High byte Low byte

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DWm RECIPE_NO_ACTUAL
DW m+1 RECIPE_NO_NOMINAL
NOM.-- Status
DW m+2
R BIT display Reserved Display Abort Recipe command
The control word is structured as follows:

Bit 0-5 Recipe command (see below).
Bit 6 Abort bit: 1 = terminates all actions triggered by the recipe command.
Is reset by the PCS after the abort.
Bit 7 1 = displays the recipe with the RECIPE_NO_ACTUAL number.
0 = displays a menu.
Bit 8-13 Reserved.
Bit 14 1 = recipe in the display.
0 = no recipe in the display (the menu is displayed if no higher priority is active).
Bit 15 NOMINAL-R bit: NOMINAL-P variables in recipe texts can only be edited as long as this bit is set.
The following values in the recipe command trigger the actions:

Value Action
0 No action.
1 Upload (load recipe data from the PLC to recipe RECIPE_NO_ACTUAL)PLC---> PCS
2 Download (load recipe data of recipe RECIPE_NO_ACTUAL to the PLC) PCS ---> PLC
3 Print recipe RECIPE_NO_ACTUAL. PCS ---> Printer
4-63 Internal, reserved.
The PCS clears the recipe command (bit 0 - 5) when the action has been completed.
Note!
The values above are decimal values that must be entered, and not bits that must be set!
Actions can be performed independently of the recipe display. When an action is triggered during editing of a recipe text,
the PCS does the following:
When downloading or printing, only values that have already been saved are used.
When uploading, the editor is locked and then the value loaded from the PLC is displayed in the editor.
Uploading therefore has a higher priority than the editor!
Selecting a recipe
1. Write the desired recipe number to DW m+1 (RECIPE_NO_NOMINAL).
2. The PCS checks the recipe number.
3. Valid recipe number: The PCS selects the recipe
Invalid recipe number: The recipe selected last remains active
4. RECIPE_NO_ACTUAL contains the current recipe number.
5. Write the recipe control word.
Recipe command = 1: Upload
= 2: Download
= 3: Print
6. The PCS clears the recipe command when the action has been performed.
10.4 Programming
1. Create recipe texts (1...127).

Up to 32 lines
Constant texts that cannot be changed
Insert external and internal variables
Select the Edit Recipe texts menu in PCSPRO (see section 17.10).
2. Define defaults for external variables.

Click the Form button in PCSPRO
Enter the values according to the format of the variable (see section 17.10)
3. Create the help texts for the recipes.

Up to 32 lines
Constant texts that cannot be changed
Insert external and internal variables
Select the Edit Operating text menu in PCSPRO (see section 17.6).
11 Daily history (PCS plus only)

PCSS plus series!
11.1 Introduction
It is useful to view the last fault texts that may have been issued during an operation fault to analyze the error.
The daily history (abbreviated to history) allows 50 messages that have disappeared or were acknowledged to be redisplayed.
A new entry in the history memory clears the oldest memory entry (FIFO). Messages are stored when they are cleared (e.g.
when they are acknowledged, when the message has the clear attribute 4).
11.2 Important details

The daily history implemented here has been specially adapted to the characteristics of the PCS plus series and in parts differs
from the history display of other PCS series.
There are no specific texts for the daily history; rather, the already defined message texts are used. For the history display, the
full length of the message texts is available, i.e. up to 32 lines.
The variables in the history texts always carry their current value which can differ from the value at the time the message was
issued or cleared.
The daily history memory is cleared when the device is switched off or reset (e.g. when switching to another data record).
The history display does not have a priority level of its own. The history texts are displayed together with default texts on priority
level 0.
11.3 Operation
Control of the daily history display occurs with three bits in the transfer range. Another bit is required for the status display.
DW 27, bit 0: History display bit

A history text is displayed instead of the default text on priority level 1 if the user sets this bit to 1 and daily history entries
are available. The PCS keeps status bit 4 in DW 6 set to 1 as long as a history text is being displayed. Whenever the daily
history display described here is started, the most recent of the history texts appears. The history display bit is ignored if
the history memory is empty.
DW 27, bit 1: Lock history bit

New messages will not be written to the daily history memory as long as the user keeps this bit set to 1. This bit can be
set when the daily history function is not required or when you want to prevent current messages from being overwritten
by new messages while you are analyzing a fault.
DW 27, bit 2: Clear history bit

The entire daily history memory is cleared when the user sets this bit to 1. The PCS then clears this bit again.
11 Daily history (PCS plus only)
The following functions can be used if a history text is displayed:

[Arrow UP]: The upper text lines (main lines) are displayed.
[Arrow DOWN]: The lower lines (additional lines) of this text are displayed.
[Arrow RIGHT]: The next older history text is displayed.
[Arrow LEFT]: The next more recent history text is displayed.
If bit 7 of W12 is set to 0, thus releasing the internal LED controller (see also section LEDs), the LEDs indicate whether or not
pressing a key has an effect (not for PCS 009plus) by lighting up and flashing.
The CLR key can be used in addition to the arrow keys.

[CLR]: Whenever the key is pressed, the display alternately jumps from to the oldest or to the most recent daily
history entry.
The dark LED of the Arrow LEFT key indicates that the display holds the most recent history text. Likewise, the dark LED of the
Arrow RIGHT key indicates that the display holds the oldest history text.
While being displayed (without a key being pressed), a history text can be replaced by new entries in the history memory.
The history text number can be retrieved from DW 28 bit 0 to bit 9 (message text number) as the respective message texts are
used for the history texts.
The user can distinguish between history and message text by referring to the ! LED that is always dark in case of a history text
and always lit in case of a message text.
12 BIOS
BIOS setup
setup and
and off-line
off-line menus
menus (only
(PCS PCS
plus plus)
only)
12.1 Overview
To configure the PCS devices of the Plus series, the BIOS setup menu is used. It replaces the DIL switch present in the PCS 009,
PCS 090 and PCS 095.x devices. All devices of the PCS plus series feature the same BIOS setup menu.
The PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2 and PCS plus devices allow several data records to be programmed that can be selected as desired
in the off-line menu (see section 12.6).
12.2 Calling up the BIOS setup menu

The BIOS setup menu can be activated as follows:
By powering on
1. Switch the device off
2. Press the CLR key and hold it down
3. Switch the device on while holding the CLR key down until the text BIOS SETUP MENU appears.
In case of a BIOS error message (exception: hardware fault).
- Press the CLR key
12.3 Leaving the BIOS setup menu

You can only leave the BIOS setup menu in the last menu page.
SAVE CHANGES ?
[X] NO [ ] YES
To save changes:
1. Use the [+] key to mark the 'Yes' field
2. Press the Enter key
Note!
Leaving the BIOS setup menu always causes the device to be reset whether or not changes were made.
12.4 Operation
To select the menu pages

Use the [Arrow UP] and [Arrow DOWN] keys to select the desired menu page.
Changes made to other menu pages are retained when you change the menu page.
To change parameters
Use the [+] and [-] keys to change parameters on a menu page.
To change the display contrast

To change the display contrast, first press the [HLP] key (and keep it down). Then use the [+] and [-] keys to increase or
decrease the display contrast.
12 BIOS setup and off-line menus (PCS plus only)
12.5 Description of the menu pages

The following text appears after entering the BIOS setup menu:
==== BIOS SETUP ====

==== MENU ====
Press the [arrow DOWN] key to enter the first menu page.
To set the baud rate for data transmission

Data transmission rate for programming the PCS: SLOW (38.4 kBd)
FAST (115 kBd)
SELECT BAUD RATE
[X] SLOW [ ] FAST
To select the active data record

OLD = Data record active until now
NEW = Data record to be activated
To select: use the [+] and [-] keys
SELECT DATA RECORD

OLD: 0 NEW: 0
To set software DIL switches 1 through 4

Configuration according to the function of PCS 009 / 090 / 095 (see section DIL switch).
DIL NO. 1 (CUSTOM)

[X] OFF [ ] ON
through
DIL NO. 4 (CUSTOM)
[X] OFF [ ] ON
To select the driver parameter record

Select the active driver parameter record. Configuration according to PCS 009 / 090 / 095 (see section DIL switch).
DIL NO. 5 (DRIVER)

[X] OFF [ ] ON
and
DIL NO. 6 (DRIVER)

[X] OFF [ ] ON
12.6 Off-line menu

The PCS 095.1 and PCS 095.2 operating panels feature all functions of the PCS 095 and 4 additional data records (banks)
that can be selected as desired. For the PCSplus, the number of available data records depends on the device variant and the
device configuration:
PCS 009plus 1 or 2 data records

Selection occurs with an off-line menu.

You reach this menu with the [HELP] and [CLR] keys. The PCS displays the current data record (old bank).
[+] / [-] key: Select a new data record (new bank).

[ENT] key: Reset and restart with the selected data record.
[] key: Quit the off-line menu without changes.
To lock the off-line menu:

Set bit 15 of DW12 to 1 while communication is in progress.
Note!
PCS 095.1 and PCS 095.2 do not memorize the selected data record after power-off.
When one of these PCS devices has been switched off and on or reset by a hardware RESET (at the rear
of the PCS 095.1), the PCS will select the data record set with DIL switches 11 and 12.
The PCS plus devices memorize the current data record selection in the configuration EEPROM.
13 System error messages
13.1 Firmware messages

The following errors can only appear when switching on (self tests):
====== INTERNAL ERROR ======

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
There appears for XXXX in the second line:

INVALID CHECK SUM IN DA
INVALID DATTA MEMORY
MEMORY::
An invalid data record is included in the flash EEPROM as the check sum is not correct.
NO PLC DRIVER FOUND:
The driver which is necessary for the communication with the PLC is not present.
UNUSABLE DIRECTORY
DIRECTORY::
The logical data structure in the EEPROM is not correct.
INITIALIZATION FFAILED:
INITIALIZATION AILED:
On running through the initialization programme of a driver or function, an error occurs for one or other reason. Have
you loaded the correct driver?
FIRMW
FIRMWAREARE ARE NOT COMP
COMPA ATIBLE:
A data record, function or driver is loaded which is not compatible with the EPROM version. For example, some PLC
drivers require a specific EPROM version.
DRIVER IS NOT SUPPORTED:
A data record, function or driver is loaded which cannot run with this hardware. Check out the hardware in use.
RECIPE IS NOT A VAILABLE
AV (only for PC
PCSS plus):
The recipe data (file project_name.REC) were not transferred to the PCS.
Please select Transfer recipe data in the Transfer window of the PCSPRO.
FIRMW ARE AND RECIPE ARE NOT COMP
FIRMWARE COMPA ATIBLE (only for PC
PCSS plus!):
The sequence and/or the number of variables in the recipe text and in the recipe data memory differ. The components
cannot cooperate. Adapt the recipe data or the recipe text accordingly.
HARDW
HARDWAREARE ERROR: RECIPE MEMORY DEFECT (only for PC
PCSS plus!):
Writing to the recipe memory is not possible. The device can only be operated with projects without recipe. Please
contact the Systeme Lauer service department.
Basically the data record should once again be thoroughly checked out after one of these failures has appeared. After
transmission, for safety reasons, the DIL switch 9 should certainly be switched to "off".
If this error occurs again, then it is the result of a hardware fault.
13.2 BIOS messages
Only applies to PC
PCSS plus!
Hardware failure
==== BIOS ERROR ====
HARDWARE FAILURE
A serious fault has occurred during initialization of the device.
Invalid configuration
CONFIG INVALID
The contents of the configuration EEPROM is invalid. This error message can occur when data transmission to the PCS was
incomplete. In most cases, this error can be corrected by transferring the data record/recipe/firmware again.
Invalid firmware
FIRMWARE INVALID
The firmware in the device is invalid. This error message can occur when the checksum of the loaded firmware is invalid or
when no firmware was loaded into the device. The error can be corrected by loading the firmware.
Invalid firmware version

FIRMWARE VERSION
The loaded firmware and the BIOS version of the PCS are incompatible. This error message can occur when an old firmware
version is loaded into the device. Perform a firmware update when this error occurs.
Invalid driver
DRIVER INVALID
The driver in the device is invalid. This error message can occur when the checksum of the loaded driver is invalid or if no
driver was loaded at all. The error can be corrected by loading the driver.
Invalid data record

DATA RECORD INVALID
The data record in the device is invalid. This error message can occur when the checksum of the loaded data record is invalid,
when the data record was not completely loaded or when the device does not contain any data record. The error can be
corrected by loading the data record.
EEPROM write error

EEPROM WRITE ERROR
Writing to the firmware/data record EEPROM or the recipe EEPROM is no longer possible. Please contact the Systeme Lauer
service department.
13.3 Communication error
In addition to the permanently defined firmware and BIOS messages, loadable drivers and function programs can also issue
error messages. All error messages use a common first line:
===== COMMUNICATION ERROR =====

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
This is a communication driver message indicating an interruption of the communication link to the PLC or heavy interferences.
The second line is reserved for messages generated by the special drivers. See the appropriate PCS 91.xxx driver manual.
Restart PC
The message Restart PCSS or press reset button
button is generated by the communication driver. For reasons of compatibility, it
can also appear in the PCS plus devices. In such a case, the PCS must be briefly deenergized (the PCS plus has no reset
button).
Warning!
PCS actions that fall due while communication is interrupted will be transferred to the PLC when the PCS
has been started again. Make sure that the actions/reactions of the PCS and the PLC are correct after a
restart!
14 Activation of the PCS micro, mini and the PCS plus
Activation of the PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1 is done over a transmission area which has a maximum number of
256 words and lies in the PLC.
In this manner the operator controls every function of the PCS. With "writing" and "reading" he/she controls this data.
Activities which lead to the communication between the PLC and the PCS are organized by the accompanying PLC software,
which is in the respective manual PCS 91.xxx. Data security and communication records are taken care of by the
communication's processor (e.g., PCS 810.1), i.e., the operating system of the PLC and the PCS.
As the transfer area (e.g., its position, size and functionality) is dependent on the parameterized driver, the corresponding
"Driver manual" PCS 91.xxx) should be used as well.
Basically two principles of the data exchange are available:

First principle: An expander enabling all functions of the PCS is required for the PLC. Only the size of the transfer area varies
depending on the driver. At any time It is possible (except for interrupt programs) to access data of the transfer area. It is the
task of the expander to process the coded data packages of the PCS. Only the currently required data and task are transmitted
via the interface.
Second principle: Direct drive (e.g. AS511.DRV). It has the advantage that it reads and writes data from/into fixed data
areas in the PLC. This principle is used for systems having no commands for indirect addressing or which require a relatively
large amount of PLC cycle time for processing the expander. Below, you will find a brief description of the data exchange.
The PCS writes data into a data area of constant length in the receiving area of the PLC. At a later point in time the PCS reads
data from a data area of constant length in the sending area of the PLC. Please note that the sending and receiving area are
located in different data areas.
Words written by the PCS are stored In the receiving area of the PLC. Examples for the written data are key words, PCS status
information, and external variables (set values).
Words read by the PCS are located in the sending area of the PLC. Examples for the read data are LED status, command words,
message area, and external variables (set and actual values!).
Special attention must be paid to the reading and writing of data from/into the sending/receiving areas (especially for set
values). Since the PCS reads and compares the set value twice after writing, the application program must transfer the written
data from the receiving area of the PLC into the sending area. This can be only be done at a certain time slot since only then
all data of the receiving area are (consistently) valid. For this purpose, a special block (subroutine) is available in the handling
software of the PLC which is timely executed between writing into the receiving area of the PLC and reading from the sending
area of the PLC. Only during this time slot, data of the sending/receiving area should be accessed. Especially set values must
be reflected during this time. If access to these words must be possible at any time, then the data must be copied into/from
temporary flag(s).
With this method, the functionally and the number of variables is reduced in comparison to the first principle. Deletion be-
haviour 2 for messages and modifying of a bit in the transfer area cannot be realized. This applies only for using the unsyn-
chronized operation.
The remaining chapter 3 describes the operation independent of the programmable controller. It is to be supposed that the
full functionality is available. The transfer area is consecutively numbered from word 0 to word 255 - in short W0 .. W255.
Warning!
Take care to use the appropriate driver for the programmable controller. Otherwise, malfunctions can be
caused in the PCS and in the programmable controller!
14.1 Overview
1. System area: W0...3

W0...2 used internally, barred from the user.
W3 Error word for the communication display. Details in the respective "Driver Manual" PCS 91.xxx.
2. Fixed function area: W4...14
Direction:
KEYS: PCS PLC
W4 Key bits F1...F8, DIL 1...4, HLP, ., 8, 9 >
W5 Key bits 0...7, ARROWS, +, -, CLR, ENT >
PCS STATUS: PCS PLC

W6 Node number and active priority >
W7 Displayed priority and text number >
W8 Word number nominal value and nominal value length
(byte number) >
W9 Bit mask high and low (only for bit variables) >
LED STATUS, DISPLAY AND STORAGE MODES: PCS PLC

W10 LED activation F1...F8 green and yellow <
W11 LED flashing status F1...F8 green and yellow <
W12 Display and message mode (storage behaviour) <
COMMAND WORDS: PCS PLC

W13 Release of priorities and transmission <
W14 Default text number and menu number <
3. Message area: W15...22

PCS PLC
Cancel mode 1 <
Cancel mode 2 <>
Cancel mode 3 <
Cancel mode 4 <
4. Extension area: W 23...29

PCS PLC
W23.. 29 currently used for variables in the PCS 009 and PCS 090 <>
ADDITIONAL KEYS (ONLY PCS 095, PCS 095.1): PCS PLC
W23 key bits F9...F16 in high byte (only PCS 095, PCS 095.1) >
ADDITIONAL LED STATUS (ONLY PCS 095, PCS 095.1): PCS PLC
W24 LED activation F9...F16 green and yellow <
(only PCS 095, PCS 095.1)
W25 LED flashing status F9...F16 green and yellow <
(only PCS 095, PCS 095.1)
W26...29 currently available for variables <>
PCS plus
W27 Message block release, daily history bits <
W28 Message exts number >
W29 Reserved <>
5. Area of variables: W30...255

PCS PLC
W30...255 free for variables <>
PCS plus
W30-W85 Message bit area
W86-W255 free for variables
Key bits
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 DIL4 DIL3 DIL2 DIL1 HLP . 9 8
W5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ê é è ç - + CLR ENT
PC
PCSS status
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Help History S W H Menu

W6 X X
active active active
actual node number (only if menu active) recognized
Mess. Hard
Printer F5..F8 8 4 2 1 M/B 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
W7 (only
ready PCS009
print copy
0/1
active end displayed priorities displayed text number
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 16 8 4 2 1
W8 X X X
latest written nominal value word number written nominal value (Byte)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W9
Bit mask HIGH-Byte (only with BIT variables) Bit mask LOW-Byte (only with BIT variables)
LED status, Display and Storage modes
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
W10
LED activation green LED activation yellow
W11
LED activation "flashing" green LED activation "flashing" yellow
Date/ Date/ S W H Faults Warnings Information
Offl. Switch/ time time
W12 shift
disab. (PCS009) write to load in
X Arrow LED
PLC PCS Display modes activation
Message modes (storage behaviour)
Commando words
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Arrow Arrow Mess. Hard- S W H Menu LED W12- Arrow Keys * 8 4 2 1
W13 LEDs LEDs print copy LEDs rep. number message words; transfer/read
Help Mess. Release of priorities Transfer Menu click (only message block 0)
W14 Stat/ 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 NOM. 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

Blink Default text number (0... 127) -P Menu number (0... 127)
* at PC
PCSS plus series without effect
Message words, Message block 0

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W15
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
up to
bis
W22
Extra key words (only PC

PCSS 095, 095.1, 095.2, 095plus)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 X X X X X X X X

W23
Key bits (only PCS 095) at moment free, will be zeroed on writing
Extra LED status and softkey bar number (only PC

PCSS 095, 095.1, 095.2, 095plus)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W24
LED activation green (only PCS 095) LED activation yellow (only PCS 095)
W25
LED activation "flashing" green (only PCS 095) LED activation "flashing" yellow (only PCS 095)
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
ê é è ç ê é è ç
W26
Softkey bar number Arrow LEDs static Arrow LEDs flashing
}
History History History
MB7 MB6 MB5 MB4 MB3 MB2 MB1 X X X X X X
W27 delete lock displ. Only
PCS plus
X X X X X X
W28
Message text number
Variable area
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ab optional external variables optional external variables
W30 BIT, (C)STRING, (V)BIN.., BCD.., WORD, ASCII BIT, (C)STRING, (V)BIN.., BCD.., WORD, ASCII
PC Splus:
PCSplus:
}
W30
bis Message block 1-7
W85
ab
W86 } Variable area
See chapter "Message area, Message block 1-7" (only PCSplus devices).
14.2 System area

The words W0...2 are reserved for driver dependent functions.
14.3 Key bits
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 DIL4 DIL3 DIL2 DIL1 HLP . 9 8
W5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ê é è ç - + CLR ENT
These key bits are log 1, so long as the respective key is pressed and the communication runs without fault. The control keys
in the LOW byte of W5 should only be used with care, as they are also required for the editing of nominal values in several
priorities, especially in the menu priority for editing.
Mint:
The ENT key should not be used for the termination of menus, as it is also used for the transfer of
nominal values. A function key as menu end key is better suited for this purpose. Termination of a menu
occurs simply by writing logic 0 on bit 0...6 of word W14. The final menu node can be checked through
the PCS status W6 bit 0 (negative edge).
14.4 PCS status
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Help History S W H Menu

W6 X X
active active active
actual node number (only if menu active) recognized
HIGH byte, bit

0...7:actual node number (binary)
The actual node number (1...255) is only active as long as a menu is active. Whether a menu is active or not can be read in
the same word in bit 0.
LOW byte, bit

6...7: not used at present
5: log 1, as long as a Help text is displayed
4: not used at present
3: log 1, if at least one fault is active
2: log 1, if at least one warning is active
1: log 1, if at least one information is active
0: log 1, if one menu is active
If the HLP key is pressed by the operator, the programmed help text appropriate for the currently displayed priority is set for
the bit 5, as long as the help key is pressed. If there is a message bit log 1 in the message area W15...22, and at the same
time a message text is programmed, then the (H) information, (W) arning, or (S) fault respective to the programmed priority
of the message, will be recognized. A prerequisite for this is however that the message word transfer is free, refer to LOW
byte of command word A (W13)!
If a menu was started with the command word B (word 14; bit 0...6), that is filed in the data record, then the bit will be log
1. This bit can also be brought in as end criterion (negative edge) for a menu.
Several priorities can be active and therefore several bits can set. The presently displayed priority can be evaluated in the
HIGH byte of word 7.
Example:
A message (fault) is active, however barred through the bit 11 in command word A (W13) (not displayed). At present
menu 15 and the node number 28 is in the display. In addition the HLP key is not depressed. Content of word 6:
00011100 xx0x1001.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Mess. Hard- 8 4 2 1 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Printer F5..F8 M/B
W7 ready (PCS009)
print copy
0/1
active end displayed priorites displayed text number
HIGH byte, bit

12 logic. 1 if printing has been finished. This bit is kept at 1 until bit 12 DW 13 Request bit is set to
0 (PCS 095.1 with printer interface only).
13 logic. 1 if message printing is active.
14 active F-key level. 0 corresponds to F0 .. F4, 1 corresponds to F5 .. F8 (only PCS 009).
15 logic. 1 if printer is ready for operation. Only with RTS/CTS handshaking, the Ready printer state is
clearly defined. With XON/XOFF handshaking, Busy will only be signaled after receiving XOFF.
Without handshaking Ready will always be signaled (only PCS 095.1 with printer interface)
8..11: priority currently used for display (binary, possible 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12)
The actual displayed priority is displayed as binary coded. This is the highest valued, free and active priority in command word
A (W13). The following values are possible:
0 0000: Default priority

2 0010: Menu priority
4 0100: Information priority
6 0110: Warning priortiy
8 1000: Fault priority
12 1100: Help priority
LOW byte, bit

7: log 0 if a message text and log 1 if an operating text is in the display.
0..6: presently displayed text number (binary), only valid if the displayed priority is 0...8.
The currently displayed text number is shown here binary coded. It can be ascertained by checking of bit 7 whether a message
text or an operating text is in the display. This bit is log 0 with message texts and log 1 with operating texts.
Example 1: Default text 3 is in the display -> word 7 (binary) = xxxx0000 10000011
Example 2: Operating text 34 (e.g. in the menu) -> word 7 (binary) = xxxx00010 101000010
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 16 8 4 2 1
W8 X X X
latest written nominal word number written nominal value length (Byte)
HIGH byte, bit

0...7: latest written set value word number (binary)
The word number of the latest edited set value can be read in binary here. If an PLC programme is waiting on
the input of a specific set value, W8 (or only the HIGH byte) can be zeroed before. As soon as the byte is <>
0 the set or nominal value can be evaluated in the PLC programme. If this doesn't correspond to the expected
set value, then the W8 is to be zeroed again and waiting will continue.
LOW byte, bit

5...7: at present not in use
0...4: latest written set value length (binary, number of bytes)
If a set value is written by the PCS, the type of the variables on evaluation of the bits 0.4, the number of written
bytes and those of the subsequent written bit masks can be evaluated.
Number of bytes:
0: BIT variable
2: 16 bit variable as (C)STRING; BCD(0)-1; (V)BIN(0)-1, A; WORD; ASCII
4: 32 bit variable as (C)STRING; BCD(0)-2; (V)BIN(0)-2, B; ASCII
[4: ASCII variable
If a bit variable (number of bytes = 0) is written, the amended bit number can be verified with the displayed bit
mask in W9.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W9
Bit mask HIGH-Byte (only at BIT variables) Bit mask LOW-Byte (only at BIT variables)
The bit number from the bit mask of W9 can be ascertained. The corresponding bit that has changed is reported in the bit
mask with a logic 1. All remaining bits appear with logic 0. The new condition of the respective bits can be decided upon in
conjunction with the word number entered in W8 and the bit mask.
Example:
A bit variable which was programmed on word 40 (bit 11) as a set value is adjusted in a menu (previously logic 0, after
pressing "+" key logic 1). Afterwards the following values are present in W8 and W9:
W8: 00101000 xxx00000

W9: 00001000 00000000
Through a logical link up of the words W9 and W40, you have the values 00001000 000000, that is to say <> 0. Whereupon
the bit is set to logic 1.
14.5 LED status, display and storage behaviour
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W10
LED activation green LED activation yellow
W11
LED activation "flashing" green LED activation "flashing" yellow
A green and a yellow LED (not for PCS 009)per function key F1...F8 is available. Every LED can take on 4 conditions, as each
LED has 2 bits at its disposal:
■ off
■ on
■ flashing (75% bright phase, 25% dark phase)
■ inverse flashing (25% bright phase, 75% dark phase)
If an LED is flashing and another one is flashing inverse, then they light up alternately. A bright phase with an LED is a dark phase
with another one and reversed.
The state of an LED is dependent on the 2 respective bits of word W10 and W11 (with the red LED via the function key "F6" these
are e.g., bit 2 of W10 and W11).
Arrangement of the LED status:
W10, bit no. x W11, bit no. x Condition
0 0 off
0 1 inverse flashing
1 1 on
1 1 flashing
Example:
W10: 00001111 00001111

W11: 00000000 11111111
-> green LEDs over F1...F4: off

-> green LEDs over F5...F8: on
-> yellow LEDs over F1...F4: inverse flashing (not for PCS 009)
-> yellow LEDs over F5...F8: flashing (not for PCS 009)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Switch/ Date/ Date/ S W H Faults Warnings Information
Offl. shift time time
W12 disabl. (PCS 009 write to load in
X Arrow LED
009plus) PLC PCS Display modes activation
Message modes (storage behaviour)
H-Bit L-Bit H-Bit L-Bit H-Bit L-Bit
HIGH byte, bit

15: logic. 1 if offline menu should be disabled
11..13: currently not used
14:*) Mode keys s logical 0 corresponds to the switch function F1..F4/F5..F8,
t logical 1 corresponds to the shift function F1..F4/F5..F8
10: logic 1, if a displayed fault should be flashing
9: logic 1, if a displayed warning should be flashing
8: logic 1, if a displayed information should be flashing
DISPLAY MODES:
The display mode bits determine, whether a message text should be presented statically or flashing. A logic 1
means flashing presentation for the entire message text and a logic 0 represents a static presentation. These bits,
separated for (H) information, (W) arning and (S) fault, can be altered at any time by the PLC.
LOW byte, bit

7**: logic. 1, arrow LEDs were not adressable through the display priorities but directly from the user
through DW26 (low byte). This bit has a higher priority as the influence of the LEDs through the display
modes.
6**: logic. 1, arrow LEDs in menus were presented at node changing static not flashing
4...5: storage behaviour for faults
2...3: storage behaviour for warnings
0...1: storage behaviour for information
STORAGE BEHAVIOUR:
HL bit:
■ 00: First message without selection possibility
■ 01: First message with selection possibility
■ 10: Last message without selection possibility
■ 11: Cyclic display (without selection possibility)
Continued switching to other messages by hand (with arrow right & left) is only possible in mode 01 (first message selection
possibility). If paging is to continue in another mode, then mode 01 should be set first of all. At this moment the text currently
visible in the display can be either paged with the "Arrow-left" to the oldest, i.e., "Arrow-right" to the latest message.
If the bit 14 logic 0 is in the command word A (W13), then the arrow key LEDs show in addition the paging possibility within
the message text page and from the oldest to the youngest message (manual selection possibility).
The various cancel possibilities and the paging to the help lines are written in section "MESSAGE PRIORITIES".
*) only for PCS 009 and PCS 009plus

** Not at PCS 009/009plus!
14.6 Command word

Release
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Arrow Arrow Mess. Hard- S W H Menu LED W12- Arrow Keys * 8 4 2 1
W13 LEDs LEDs print copy LEDs rep. number message words; transfer/read
Help Mess. Release of priorities Transfer Menu click (only message block 0)
HIGH byte, bit

15: logic 1, if arrow LEDs in the help priorities not to be active
14: logic 1, if arrow LEDs in the message priority (H, W, S) not to be active
13: logic. 1 if the message word area should be checked for 0 -> 1 transitions and to earmark messages
for printing. Logic. 0 deletes all earmarked messages.
12: logic. 1 initiates the hardcopy function for the current display contents (only PCS 095.1 with printer
interface).
11: logic 1, if the fault priority may be interrupted by a lower one (W, H, M, R)
10: logic 1, if the warning priority may be interrupted by a lower one (H, M, R)
9: logic 1, if the information priority may be interrupted by a lower one (M, R)
8: logic 1, if the menu priority may be interrupted by a lower one (R)
LOW byte, bit

7: logic 1, if the LEDs (W10...11, with PCS 095, PCS 095.1 also W24...25) must be read
6: logic 1, if the display and storage behaviour W12 is considered
5: logic 1, if the arrow LEDs should not be active in the menu priority
4: logic 1, if the acoustic signal (repeat click and error signal) should not be active
0..3: gives binary (0...8) the number of the message words, which have to be transfered (read)
1: logical 1 if at least 1 info is active
0: logical 1 if a menu is active
Interlocked Arrow Key LEDs: (only PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1)
The arrow key LEDs in the bits 15, 14 and 5 can be activated according to help, message (H, W, S) and menu priority. If the
respective bit is on logic 0, the corresponding LEDs light up via the permitted "Arrow keys". More detailed information can be
found in chapter "LIGHT DISPLAYS" and "ARROW KEYS IN MENUS". Here is a summary:
LED Arrow... Menu priority Message priority Help priority

lit above variable accessible select main lines select main lines
flashes above menu node accessible
right lit up variable accessible latest report
right flashes menu node accessible
lit below variable accessible select next lines select next lines
flashes below menu node accessible
left lit up variable accessible next older message
left flashes menu node accessible
Release Priorities:
The priorities in the bits 8...11 (menu, information, warning, error) can be blocked individually. Please note that the priorities
8 (HELP) and 12 (communication errors) are not blockable. If on entering the set value into a menu, the priorities
information, warning and fault are blocked, then only default texts and menus are allowed in the display (High byte =
xxxx0001), the menus cannot interrupt the messages (H, W, S). Nevertheless they are activated in the background (LED "!"
then flashes).
Release Data Transfer:

If certain words of the function area, such as LEDs, messages, displays and storage behaviour, are not required or do not
have to be continually refreshed, then it is recommended that the transfer between PCS and PLC in the LOW byte should
be kept to a minimum. The blocking of the transfer of data saves time in the PLC cycle and accelerates the transfer for other
services such as data!
For example a logic 0 in bit 7 blocks the reading (transfer) of all the LED STATUS WORDS (W10...11 and with the PCS 095,
PCS 095.1 also W24...25).
A logic 0 in bit 6 blocks the reading (transfer) of the display and storage behaviour. The number of message words in the
bit 0...3, which should be read (transfered) can be set binary coded. Here, a value range between 0 and 8 is sensible.
Example: You require only 35 messages (35/16 = 2, 18...), therefore it is enough to be able to read 3 word messages.
This can through writing xxxxxxxx xxxx0011 in W13. Please note that this setting can at any time (dynamic)
be altered by the PLC.
Warning!
Blocking of the transfer can lead to problems, if it is carried out at the wrong moment. For example
after blocking transfer (assuming deletion behaviour 4), of a set message, it cannot be deleted for
the time being, even though the message in the PLC is on logic 0. Therefore only use the blocking
facilities of the transfer when you are sure that this will not lead to any undesired consequences.
Default ext and menu

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W14 Stat/ 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 NOM. 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

flash. Default text number (0... 127) -P Menu number (0... 127)
HIGH byte, bit

15: logic 1, if a displayed default text should be flashing
8...14: binary coded the default text number (0...127)
Default Text Number:

This is the operator text number, when the default text priority is activated that will be displayed. By writing the value xxxxxxx
xxxx0000 into W13 the default text priority is displayed. Only a filed help text or a communications error can interrupt the
default text. The default text number which is identical with the operator text number, can be altered at any time by the PLC.
The variables (set value) contained in the text are not adjustable (cannot be edited).
If bit 15 is logic 1, then the entire default text can be flashed. If the bit 15 is logic 0, then the default text appears static.
Example: Default text 23 is to be displayed. Therefore the value 1001011 x0000000 is to be written on the word W14.
LOW byte, bit

7: logic 1, if the NOM-P-variables in the menu priorities may be edited
0...6: the activated menu number as binary coded (1...127, as 0 = end of menu)
Menu number:
In writing a value on bit 0...5, you can activate a menu and end one. The requirement is that no higher priority (H, W, S, HLP
or communications error) is active. By writing a binary coded value > 0, i.e., 1...127 on bit 0...6, a menu can be started. The
first text to arrive in the display is the defined operating text for the initial node or start node. If there are already one or more
nominal variables in a menu node, they will be activated first of all. They then appear flashing. Now set values can be entered
and the menu, depending on the definitions which you have set in it, be branched out with the "Arrow keys". A valuable help
to you at any time are the arrow key LEDs provided bit 5 of this word, logic 0.
If you want to end a menu, then simply zero the bits 0...6. In the case that a set value was just activated; indicated by flashing
or with a cursor; this can still be written in the PLC within the permitted limiting values! The NOM-P-variables in the actual
displayed menu nodes can be altered at any time with bit 7 = logic 1. This enables the formation of keyswitch dependent menus
or variables. NOM-P-variables are then treated as ACTUAL values. A very special case arises when a NOM-P-variable is being
edited and the PLC during this time sets the bit 7 on logic 0. This then develops in such a way that this variable is then written
in the PLC. If the present edited value or intermediate result happens to be outside the limiting values, whether minimum or
maximum, then the PCS waits until a reliable value is entered. In conclusion the first NOM variable is searched for by the
beginning of the text and presented in a flashing manner. If there is no NOM variable in this menu node, then all variables will
be presented as ACTUAL values.
Released and vacant arrow key LEDs in menus, are able to show at any time and in dependent of the bit 7, the actual valid arrow
keys.
Example: Menus 15 can be started at any time by writing xxxxxxx x0001111 on W14.
14.7 Message area, Message block 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W15 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
Every message text (0...127, with a max. of 32 characters each) can be allocated to a bit. In addition a specific priority (4
= information, 6 = warning, 8 = fault) and a specific cancel mode (1...4) is assigned to each text. If a message bit is set,
to which no message text has been programmed, then it will be ignored.
The continuation of the message area for the PCS plus series is described in chapter "Message area, Message block 1-7
(only for PCS plus devices)".
14.8 Extension area

At the moment only extension area W23...W29 is occupied used by the PCS 095, PCS 095.1 (W23...W25). It is reserved for
later additions and is therefore used for variables with caution. If however variables are used, then incompatibility with the
PLC programme is to be expected.
As the PCS 095, PCS 095.1 already uses this area (extra keys W23 and additional LEDs W24 and W25), the PCS 009 or PCS 090
cannot be exchanged against a PCS 095, PCS 095.1, without amending the PLC programme.
Extra function key words (only PC

PCSS 095, 095.1, 095.2, 095plus)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 X X X X X X X X

W23
Key bits (only PCS 095) at moment free, will be zeroed on writing
These key bits are log 1, as long as the corresponding key is pressed and the communication runs without fault.
Extra LED status F9..F16 (only PC

PCSS 095, 095.1, 095.2, 095plus)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W24
LED activation green (only PCS 095) LED activation yellow (only PCS 095)
W25
LED activation "flashing" green (only PCS 095) LED activation "flashing" yellow (only PCS 095)
For each functions' key "F8...F19", there is a green and a yellow LED available. As there are 2 bits available to every
LED, every LED can take on 4 conditions:
■ off
■ on
■ flashing (75% bright phase, 25% dark phase)
■ inverse flashing (25% bright phase, 75% dark phase)
If one LED is flashing and another is flashing inverse, then they light up on an exchange basis. A bright phase of one LED
corresponds to a dark phase of the other one and reversed.
The state of an LED is set by 2 bits from word W24 and W25 (for the red LED via the function key F11, they are bit 5 of W24
and W25).
Arrangement of the LED states:
W24, bit no. x W25, bit no. x Condition
0 0 off
0 1 inverse flashing
1 1 on
1 1 flashing
Example:
W24: 00001111 00001111

W25: 00000000 11111111
-> green LEDs over F9...F12: off

-> green LEDs over F13...F16: on
-> yellow LEDs over F9...F12: inverse flashing
-> yellow LEDs over F13...F16: flashing
Externally controlled softkey bar number and arrow LEDs

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
W26 ê é è ç ê é è ç
Softkey bar number Arrow LEDs static Arrow LEDs flashing
The high byte of data word 26 is used to set the desired softkey bar. Values between 0 and 127 are possible. The low byte
of DW26 is used to set the arrow LEDs to a permanently lit or flashing state.
Message block release, message text number (only PC

PCSS plus devices)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
History History History
MB7 MB6 MB5 MB4 MB3 MB2 MB1 X X X X X X delete lock displ.
W27
X X X X X X
W28
Message text number
W 27 Bit 3-8 Reserved

Bit 9-15 Releases message blocks 1 ... 7
W 28 Bit 0-9 Current message text number
Bit 10-15 Reserved
Word 27, low byte, bit

0: Setting this bit allows the history display to be activated.
1: The daily history memory does not accept any new entries as long as this bit is set.
2: Setting this bit clears the entire daily history memory.
The PCS then sets this bit back to 0.
For each of the message blocks 1..7, a bit has been provided in W27 that is used to release the transmission. Each message
block bit releases the transmission of 8 words. We recommend to only release those message blocks that you need because
the communication speed is greatly affected by this!
Message block 1 = W30..W37 M128..255

14.9 Message area, message block 1-7 (only for PCS plus)
W30-W37: Message block 1

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W30
up
bisto
W37

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W38
up to
bis
W45

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W46
up
bisto
W53

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W54
up
bisto
W61

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W62
up to
bis
W69

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W70
up
bisto
W77

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
W78
up
bisto
W85
Each bit is assigned a MESSAGE TEXT (128...1023, up to 32 lines each); each text can have a specific priority (S,W,H) and a
specific clearance behavior (1-5).
Conversion of message text numbers to DW numbers (valid for message blocks 0-7)
DW number = digits before decimal point of (message text/16) (+ 7 if message text > 127) + 15
Bit position = digits after decimal point of (message text/16) x 16
Example: To find the bit position of message text 165
165 / 16 = 10.3125
i.e. we must add 7 because 165 >127:
10 + 7 = 17
17 + 15 = 32
0.3125 x 16 = 5
Message text number 165 corresponds to W32, bit 5.
Assessment
A maximum of 1 message block is fetched during each PLC cycle. To reach the maximum possible assessment speed, only
one message block may be released.
Transmission
The transmission length (from word 15 onwards) for message block 0 can be released on a word-by-word basis in bit 0..3
of W 13. The bits are weighted as follows:
Number of transferred words: bit3 x 8 + bit2 x 4 + bit1 x 2 + bit0
Equal to or greater than 8 means that all 8 words of message block 0 are transmitted.
Example: W13 = xx.x3 (hex)
The three values 15..17 are sent.
For each of the message blocks 1..7, W27 provides one bit for releasing transmission. Changes to these bits during
operation should only occur when all bits in the block are set to zero (as messages that have been set can no longer be
cleared by the PLC). Normally, these bits are only set when the device is restarted and will not be changed.
Warning!
Locking of transmissions may have undesired effects when this is done in the wrong moment. Example:
a set message can at first not be cleared after transmission is locked (if clearance behavior 4 is assumed)
although the message bit in the PLC is logically set to 0! We recommend that you only use the transmission
locking function only when you are sure that no undesired effects can occur!
Note!
The messages used should be programmed contiguously, i.e. without gaps to increase the processing
speed.
Message blocks that are not required can be used for variables (except message block 0).
14.10 Variables area

The variable range is between word W30 and maximum word W255. If this area is not sufficient, then the extension area can
also be used (PCS 009, PCS 090: W23...W29 and PCS 095, PCS 095.1: W26...W29). This area is however intended for necessary
modifications and therefore is to be used with care (PLC programming!).
If all messages are not required, then the words 15...22 can be used for the variables.
More detailed information about the various variable types can be found in the chapter "VARIABLES/TEXTS/MENUS".
Before the exchange of data, every variable set and actual value must be written in the corresponding words. After the data
exchange only the set values must be read back from the respective words.
It is recommended to address variables of the same display page in packets! This also saves PLC cycle time.
The addressing order to the individual variables occurs by programming (PCSPRO) of PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1.
The variable formats STRING, CSTRING, BCD, BIN, WORD and ASCII use the words right aligned and ascending, e.g., BIN-2
on W30...W31 (W30 is HIGH word and W31 is LOW word). The format bit can be used on every individual bit (in order to use
every 16 bit in a bit-by-bit manner, 16 bit variables have to be declared). One and the same word can be source and target
for several variables even with different format. As a set value, it is recommended to only allot one variable format to a word.
One or more actual value variables with differing formats can however at the same time be allocated to this word.
Leading and non used bits in the set values of the types STRING, CSTRING, BCD(0)-1 (length 1...3) and BCD(0)-2 (lengths 1...7)
are ignored on reading and on writing back they are set at 0 in the PLC. The type bit only changes the currently addressed bit!
Set values should be occupied as far as possible corresponding to their permitted min-/max-values, before the new start, as
they are required as a standard value on which to base the editing. If they are outside the min-/max area, then inverse displays
will be presented in the display. As set values, they can first be relinquished after correction procedure.
With a 32 bit variable, the word with the lower number is the higher valued word, and the word with the higher number is
the lower valued word.
Variables of the type BIT and CSTRING are written into the PLC immediately after their adjustment. All the others are written
first after ENT or on leaving the variable range.
15 Printer (PCS 095, PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2 und PCS plus)
The PCS 095, PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2 and PCS plus series features a printer interface and supports a printer protocol. The printer
parameters are selected using the setup software PCSPRO (version 2.1 and up).
15.1 Printer parameters

You define the printer parameters using the PCSPRO setup software. Some of these parameters are internal variables which are
modifiable via a set value menu. An automatic initialization of the printer interface is performed if the PCS 095.1 encounters
a change.
The following printer parameters (Zx) are internal variables:

ZA: printer timeout 1 .. 999 seconds. After this time, the programmable controller is informed about a non-operational
printer. This is specially important for printers, e.g. the LCA 710 since this printer sets the RTS line to 0 during printing
of a line. Specify a timeout time of 5 seconds for the LCA 750 printer.
ZB: Selection of the RS232/TTY interface.
ZC: handshake selection: NONE, XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS. With handshake set to NONE, the characters to be printed are sent
without confirmation - the printer always signals ready. With XON/XOFF, sending of the characters is only interrupted
after receiving XOFF. With RTS/CTS handshaking, sending is only performed if the RTS line is set to 1 level.
ZD: printer output direction UP or DOWN. Depending on the physical orientation of the printer you can select if the
first or last line is transmitted to the printer first. For the LCA printers it is preferable to send the last line first. Thus
UP has to be selected.
ZE: baudrate of the printer - selectable between 1200 and 19200 baud.
ZF: number of data bits of the printer - selectable are 7 or 8 data bits.
ZG: number of stop bits of the printer - selectable are 1 or 2 stop bits.
ZH: parity of the printer - selectable are NONE, EVEN, and ODD parity.
In the PCSPRO additional functions can be choosen:

Printer init. After reset, communication failure to the PLC or after printer parameter changing 0 up to 8 characters where
sended to the printer. Default adjustment is "OD, 0A", --> line feed
Substitute characters for free definable display characters. It can be 8 characters free defined in the PCS display, but not
printed. Therefore are for this 8 characters to define substitute characters. Select in the PCSPRO menu Project - Printer
parameter and enter the HEX codes of the wanted characters in the fields 1-8.
Tip!
At PCS plus is only RS 232 operation possible!
15.2 Printer status

The programmable controller is informed about the status of the printer using bit 15 of DW7. Only with RTS/CTS handshaking,
the Ready printer state is clearly defined. With XON/XOFF handshaking, Busy will only be signaled after receiving XOFF.
Without handshaking Ready will always be signaled
A communications loss with the programmable controller will always result in aborting the printing.
15 Printer (PCS 095, PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2 and PCS plus)
15.3 Hardcopy
From the programmable controller you can initiate a printout of the current display contents via a hardcopy function. For this,
the 0 -> 1 transition of bit 12 of DW 13 is monitored. The contents of the display is copied to the printer buffer and printing
is started if the rising edge is detected. Bit 12 of DW 7 is set if the printout has been completed. This bit (12 of DW7) stays set
until the requesting bit 12 of DW 13 is reset to 0.
15.4 Printing of messages

From the programmable controller you can initiate a printout of all marked messages. The message word area DW 15 .. 22 is
checked for 0 -> 1 transitions if bit 13 of DW 13 is set to 1. The corresponding message(s) are marked for printing if one or
more transitions are detected. A currently active printout is signaled via bit 13 (set to 1) of DW 7. All markings are deleted if
bit 13 of DW 13 is set to 0. All lines of the messages are printed. The printing process as well as fetching the variables from
the programmable controller is line orientated, i.e. the variables are inserted at the time the corresponding line will be printed.
15.5 Connector assignment RS 232/TTY

Connector assignment (rear view on the female connector)
Warning!
If external current loop sources are used, the maximum e.m.f. may not exceed 15V. Furthermore, real
current sources with a maximum of 22 mA are required. Otherwise malfunctions may occur in the PCS
and in the programmable controller!
16 Technical data
16.1 Datas PCS 009 and PCS 009plus

Dimensions: front panel cut out: 131+1 mm x 199+1 mm
mouting depth without connector: 52 mm
external dimensions 147.2 mm x 215 mm
insertable foil: 98 mm x 13.5 mm
Weight: 1000 g
Operating voltage: +24 V DC + 20% - 15%, protected against reversed polarity
Current consumption: lav = 250 mA at 24 volt
Noise immunity: see manufacturer information
Protection class: according to IEC 529, rear: IP 20
front: IP 65 (in a built-in condition)
Humidity: 0...75% without condensing on the rear
Vibration resistance: 3 g at 50 Hz in all directions, min 5 hrs
3 g at 100 Hz in all directions, min 1 hr
Temperature: storage: -25...+70°C
operation: 0...+50°C
Data storage: Flash-EEPROM, min 10,000 write cycles
Front foil: polyester
Keys: mechanical with tactile feedback
Display: 4 x 20 characters, 5 x 8 matrix, 5 mm character height
Fuse: PCS 009: 630 mA, small fuse, slow-blow, 1 spare fuse
PCS 009plus: aA, slow-blow
16 Technical data
Measurement drawing PC
PCSS 009 and PC
PCSS 009plus
16 Technical data
16.2 Datas PCS 090 and PCS 090plus

Dimensions: front panel cutout: 194+1 mm x 128+1 mm
distances of the borings (4.5 mm): horizontal 207 mm, vertical 90 mm
mounting depth without connector: 50 mm
external dimensions: 215 mm x 144 mm
insertable foil: 186 mm x 14 mm
Weight: 1000 g
Operating voltage: +24 VDC ± 20%, protected against polarity reversal
Current consumption: Iav = 250 mA at 24V
front: IP 65 (in a built-in condition)
Humidity: 0..75% without condensing on the rear
Vibration resistance: 3g at 50Hz in all directions, min. 5 hrs
3g at 100Hz in all directions, min. 1 hr
Temperature: storage: -25..+70°C
operation: 0..+50°C
Data storage: Flash-EEPROM, min. 10,000 write cycles
Pushbuttons: mechanical with tactile feedback
Fuse: PCS 090: 400 mA, small fuse, slow-blow, 1 spare fuse
PCS 090plus: 1A, slow-blow
16 Technical data
PCSS 090 and PC
PCSS 090plus
Tip!
At the PCS 090plus are no drillings necessary!
16 Technical data
16.3 Datas PCS 095, PCS 095.1, PCS 095.2 and PCS 095plus
Dimensions: front panel cutout: 204+1 mm x 188+1 mm
distances of the borings (4.5 mm): horizontal 216 mm, vertical 128 mm
mounting depth without connector: 50 mm
external dimensions: 224 mm x 202 mm
insertable foil: 192 mm x 26 mm
Weight: 1480 g
Operating voltage: +24 VDC ± 20%, protected against polarity reversal
Current consumption: Iav = 400 mA at 24V
front: IP 65 (in built-in condition)
Humidity: 0..75% without condensing on the rear
Vibration resistance: 3g at 50Hz in all directions, min. 5 hrs
3g at 100Hz in all directions, min. 1 hr
Temperature: storage: -25..+70°C
operation: 0..+50°C
Data storage: Flash-EEPROM, min. 10,000 write cycles
Pushbuttons: mechanical with tactile tfeedback
Fuse: PCS 095: 1 AT, small fuse, slow-blow, 1 spare fuse
PCS 095plus: 1A, slow-blow, no spare fuse
16 Technical data
PCSS 095, PC
PCSS 095.1, PC
PCSS 095.2 and PC
PCSS 095plus
Tip!
At the PCS 095plus are no drillings necessary!
16 Technical data
16.4 Memory organization

A Flash-EEPROM (electrical erasable static memory) with 32 KB is available in the PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1 for
storing the program (data record), the driver, and other possible functions. Initially a detailed memory map of the required
storage space is not available since the occupation depends on the driver (different memory requirements), the possibly used
functions, and the number of used variables, texts, and menus. An exceeding of the available memory is already noticed by
the comfortable programming software PCSPRO. Therefore, you can react well in time.
The following applies for the setting up of texts, menus and variables:
■ The texts for communication errors are partly in the EPROM programme and in the driver. They cannot be
amended. They are set up in the version G in the English language note from.
■ The total amount of lines cannot be given, as the texts are filed in a compressed form and the memory for texts,
menu nodes and variable inscriptions are dynamic.
■ Similar variable inscriptions (character strings) as well as different variables are simply filed. If storage space is
limited, then by using similar inscriptions instead of texts space will be saved.
■ Every variable occupies 7 bytes in the head, in the trailer, numerous variables require between 6 and 22 bytes.
BIT-, STRING- and CSTRING- need 2 bytes per inscription.
■ 3 further bytes are necessary per text line (in addition to those for the text itself).
■ Every created menu node occupies 8 bytes.
Memory organization at PCS plus:
The available memory sizes dependent on the number of the projected data sets.
Memory for Memory for Memory for

data sets separate recipes common recipes
PCS 009 1 with 32 kByte - -

PCS 095.1 4 with per 32 kByte - -
PCS 095.2 4 with per 32 kByte - -
2 with per 32 kByte 2 with per 4 kByte
PCS 009plus 8 kByte
1 with 64 kByte 1 with 8 kByte
2 with per 32 kByte 2 with per 4 kByte

PCS 090plus 8 kByte
1 with 64 kByte 1 with 8 kByte
6 with per 32 kByte 6 with 4 kByte

PCS 095plus 32 kByte
3 with 64 kByte 3 with per 10 kByte
16 Technical data
16.5 Programming cable PCS 733

You require the following cable for the transfer of the program, i.e., of the data record (driver, functions, variables, texts and
menus). In addition this cable can be used for the simulation of the PLC to the PC.
Connection PC/PG - PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1:
16.6 Maintenance
The PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, PCS 095.1 do not require any regular maintenance.
Warning!
Static charge of the front panel is possible. Clean only with a moist cloth.
This is especially important, when using the PCS 009, PCS 090, PCS 095, and PCS 095.1 in an Ex area.
Warning!
The LCD display contains poisonous substances. Do not touch the display, if it is damaged.
16 Technical data
16.7 Using the PCS in an Ex area
Warning!
The PCS can be pre-setup for use in Ex area 1 or 2. Depending on the application, the device must be
installed according to VDE 0165 or VDE 170/171. For installation in an encapsulated enclosure with
pressure protection - including test certifications which may be required - Systeme Lauer offers cooperating
companies on request..
This must be specified when ordering the device. A subsequent release or certified declaration by the manufacturer is not
possible. The devices can be pre-setup for use in Ex area 1 or 2.
An overpressure encapsulation with a low-pressure system is available. This means that a difference in atmospheric pressure
of 2-4mbar exists between the interior space and the outside of the front. Higher pressures may cause damages to the display.
For use of the devices in Ex area 2, please refer to the specifications of the manufacturer and an explanatory memorandum
published by Systeme Lauer. The specifications of the manufacturer may be used as basic documentation for the certification
of the device in Ex area 2.
16 Technical data
Index
Symbole Cyclic display ...............................................................0-11

Cyclic display without manual selection .......................... 7-1
[ARROW DOWN] key ................................................... 11-2 Cyclic display without selection ................................... 14-11
[ARROW LEFT] key ....................................................... 11-2
[ARROW RIGHT] key .................................................... 11-2
D
[ARROW UP] key ......................................................... 11-2
[CLR] key ....................................................................11-2 Daily history (only PCS plus) ......................................... 11-1
[ENT] key ....................................................................4-11 DAT ............................................................................. 7-4
[F] keys ........................................................................ 2-2 Data exchange cycle ...................................................... 5-1
[HLP] key ..................................................................... 5-5 Data loss ...................................................................... 2-3
Data record ................................................................. 16-7
A Data record invalid ....................................................... 13-2
Data storage ................................................................ 16-1
Abbreviations ................................................................ 5-6 Data transfer ................................................................ 0-11
Acoustic alarm .............................................................. 2-4 Date/time ..................................................................... 8-1
Acoustic fault message ........................................... 2-1, 2-6 Decimal point inclusion ................................................. 4-5
Acoustic signal ...................................................... 2-1, 2-6 Default text ........................................................ 5-4, 14-14
Activate a menu ......................................................... 14-14 Default text priority ....................................................... 5-4
Activated order of priorities ............................................ 2-4 Default value ................................................................ 6-3
Actual value variable .................................................. 14-22 Delete behaviour .......................................................... 0-11
AND ............................................................................ 9-1 Diagnostic text .............................................................. 9-1
Arrow down ................................................................. 6-2 DIL switch .................................................................... 3-1
Arrow key LEDs ................................................. 6-2, 14-11 Dimensions ................................................................. 16-5
Arrow key LEDs in menus .............................................. 2-5 Direct driver ................................................................ 14-1
Arrow keys ................................................................... 6-1 Display behaviour .................................................. 5-5, 7-1
ASCII ................................................................... 4-12, 5-1 Display mode ............................................................ 14-11
Driver .......................................................................... 16-7
B Driver is not supported ................................................. 13-1
BCD ............................................................................. 4-5 Driver variables "AC...AF" ............................................... 7-4
BIN .............................................................................. 4-7 DRV ............................................................................. 7-4
BIT ............................................................ 4-2, 6-5, 14-22
Build-up of the menu .................................................... 6-2 E
Editor key ..................................................................... 6-3
C Empty fileds ................................................................ 4-17
Cancel mode ................................................. 2-4, 7-1, 7-3 End of menu ............................................................. 14-14
Character set ................................................................ 2-6 Equipment and accessiries ............................................. 1-2
Character table ............................................................. 2-6 Error priority ................................................................. 5-6
Clear history bit ........................................................... 11-1 Examination of the limiting values ................................. 4-17
Commando word B ................................................... 14-14 Example for softkey bar and softkey action ...................... 9-2
Communication ..................................................... 0-9, 5-4 Expander ..................................................................... 14-1
Communication Error ................................................... 13-3 Extended area ............................................................ 14-16
Communication error .................................................... 2-4 Externe Variablenformate ............................................... 4-1
Complex structures ........................................................ 6-2 Extra key word (only PCS 095, PCS 095.1) ................... 14-16
Configuration invalid .................................................... 13-2
Connections ................................................................. 3-1 F
Connector assignment .................................................. 15-2 F01 until max. F16 .......................................................0-11
Contrast ....................................................................... 2-3 Firmware are not compatible ........................................ 13-1
CSTRING .................................. 4-4, 4-17, 5-1, 6-5, 14-22 Firmware is not compatible .......................................... 13-1
Current consumption ......................................... 16-3, 16-5 First message ................................................... 0-11, 14-11
Cursor .......................................................................... 6-8 First value message without manual selection .................. 7-1
Cursor keys LEDs in menus ............................................ 2-5
© Systeme Lauer GmbH & Co KG Kelterstr. 59 D-72669 Unterensingen Phone +49 7022 96 60-0 Fax +49 7022 96 60-103 I-1
Index
FKT .............................................................................. 7-4 M

Flashing .............................................................. 0-11, 2-4
Function ............................................................ 0-11, 16-7 Mantissa ...................................................................... 4-1
Function area ............................................................... 14-2 Memory organization ................................................... 16-7
Function key ........................................................ 2-1, 14-6 Menu .................................................................... 2-4, 4-3
Fuse ........................................................ 16-1, 16-3, 16-5 Menu end ........................................................... 4-17, 6-1
Menu end key ............................................................. 14-6
G Menu nodes ................................................................. 6-2
Menu number ........................................................... 14-14
General procedures ....................................................... 1-1 Message bit .................................................................. 7-3
Message priorities ......................................................... 5-5
H Message text ......................................................... 5-1, 7-1
Message word transfer ................................................. 14-7
Hardcopy ........................................................ 14-12, 15-2
Minus sign ................................................................... 4-9
Hardware failure .......................................................... 13-2
Most significant bits ..................................................... 4-11
Help priorities ............................................................ 14-12
Help texts .............................................................. 2-5, 5-1
Higher value bits ........................................................... 4-5
N
History display bit ........................................................ 11-1 No PLC driver found ..................................................... 13-1
HLP key .......................................................................14-7 Nodes ................................................................... 5-4, 6-1
HLP text ....................................................................... 5-5 Nominal value variable ........................................... 4-9, 6-4
Humidity ................................................. 16-1, 16-3, 16-5 Numeric input .............................................................. 4-9
Numerical keypad ......................................................... 2-1
I
Information .................................................................. 2-4
O
Information priority ................................................ 5-5, 7-1 Off-line menu .............................................................. 12-3
Initial node ............................................................ 5-4, 6-1 Offset input ......................................................... 4-9, 4-17
Initialization failed ........................................................ 13-1 Operating procedure ..................................................... 6-2
Input required ............................................................... 2-4 Operating text (0...127) ................................................. 5-4
Inscription .................................................................... 4-4 Operating text number .................................................. 6-2
Integrated editor ........................................................... 6-5 Operating texts .............................................. 5-1, 5-4, 6-2
Interface ....................................................................... 3-1 Operating voltage ................................................ 3-1, 16-3
Interlocked arrow key LEDs ......................................... 14-12 Operator text number ................................................. 14-14
Internal error ................................................................ 13-1 OR ............................................................................... 9-1
Internal variables .......................................................... 4-15
Invalid check sum in data memory ................................ 13-1 P
Inverse fields ................................................................ 4-17
Inverse flashing ............................................................ 0-11 Package length optimization ......................................... 0-11
Paging to the help lines .............................................. 14-11
K Password ...................................................................... 4-6
PCS 009 ....................................................................... 0-9
Key ..................................................................... 4-2, 4-10 PCS 095 ....................................................................... 0-9
Keyboard click .............................................................. 2-1 PCS 733 ................................................................ 1-2, 3-1
PCS 91.xxx .................................................................... 1-2
L PCSPRO ........................................................................ 3-1
PLC cycle time ....................................... 4-17, 14-1, 14-22
Last message ............................................................... 0-11
PLC cycle time saving ................................................. 14-22
Last message without selection ................................... 14-11
Pocket calculator input .................................................. 4-7
Last value message without manual selection .................. 7-1
Power supply ................................................................ 3-1
Leave the input field ...................................................... 4-3
Pre-zeroes ..................................................................... 4-5
Limiting values ............................................................. 4-3
Printer parameter ......................................................... 15-1
Line current sources ...................................................... 3-2
Printer status ................................................................ 15-1
Lock history bit ............................................................ 11-1
Printing of messages .................................................... 15-2
Priority change .............................................................. 7-1
I-2 © Systeme Lauer GmbH & Co KG Kelterstr. 59 D-72669 Unterensingen Phone +49 7022 96 60-0 Fax +49 7022 96 60-103
Index
Priority classes ........................................................ 5-3, 7-1 U

Priority levels ............................................................... 0-11
Priority management .................................................... 0-11 Unusable directory ....................................................... 13-1
Programming cable PCS 733 ......................................... 16-8 User program ............................................................... 1-2
Protection class ............................................................ 16-1
Protective conductor ..................................................... 3-1 V
V24 ............................................................................. 3-1
R Variable area .............................................................. 14-22
Range of values ............................................................ 4-9 Variable behaviour ....................................................... 4-17
Rapid flashing ............................................................... 2-4 Variable definition ......................................................... 4-1
Receipes ...................................................................... 10-1 Variable description ....................................................... 4-1
Refressing of variables .................................................. 4-17 Variable format .......................................................... 14-22
Release data transfer ................................................... 14-13 Variable lengths ............................................................ 4-1
Release priorities ........................................................ 14-13 Variable types ............................................................... 4-1
Restoring previous values ............................................... 4-5 VDE regulations ............................................................ 3-1
RS 232 ......................................................................... 3-1 Vibration resistance .................................. 16-1, 16-3, 16-5
RS 422/RS 485 .............................................................. 3-1
W
S W0 .. W255 ................................................................. 0-9
Scaling .................................................................. 4-1, 4-7 W0...2 ........................................................................ 14-2
Scroll time .................................................................... 7-1 W10 ............................................................... 14-2, 14-10
Set value ..................................................................... 4-17 W11 ............................................................... 14-2, 14-10
Sign keys ...................................................................... 4-5 W12 ........................................................................... 14-2
Softkey actions ............................................................. 9-1 W13 ........................................................................... 14-2
Softkey bar ................................................................... 9-1 W14 ............................................................... 14-2, 14-14
Specific cancel mode .................................................. 14-15 W15...22 .................................................................... 14-2
Specific priorities ........................................................ 14-15 W23 ........................................................................... 14-3
Start node ............................................................. 5-4, 6-1 W23.. 29 .................................................................... 14-3
Start up and termination of a menu ................................ 5-1 W24 .................................................... 14-3, 14-16, 14-17
State of running of the PCS ............................................ 2-4 W25 .................................................... 14-3, 14-16, 14-17
Static memory ............................................................. 16-7 W26 ......................................................................... 14-17
Storage behaviour ......................................................... 7-1 W26...29 .................................................................... 14-3
STRING ......................................................... 4-3, 5-1, 6-5 W3 ............................................................................. 14-2
Structure ...................................................................... 6-2 W30...255 .................................................................. 14-3
System area ................................................................. 14-2 W5 ............................................................................. 14-2
W6 ................................................................... 14-2, 14-7
T W7 ............................................................................. 14-2
W8 ................................................................... 14-2, 14-9
Technical datas PCS 009 ............................................... 16-1 W9 ................................................................... 14-2, 14-9
Technical datas PCS 090 ............................................... 16-3 Warning ....................................................................... 2-4
Technical datas PCS 095, PCS 095.1 .............................. 16-5 Warning priority ..................................................... 5-5, 7-1
Temperature ............................................ 16-1, 16-3, 16-5 Weight .................................................... 16-1, 16-3, 16-5
Time ............................................................................ 8-1 WORD ........................................................ 4-10, 5-1, 6-7
TIMER ................................................................. 4-14, 5-1 WRITE .......................................................................... 9-1
Transfer area ...................................... 0-11, 5-2, 6-3, 14-1
Transfer range ............................................................... 0-9
Treatment of variables ................................................... 4-17
Troubleshooting ............................................................ 5-5
TTY .............................................................................. 3-1
© Systeme Lauer GmbH & Co KG Kelterstr. 59 D-72669 Unterensingen Phone +49 7022 96 60-0 Fax +49 7022 96 60-103 I-3
Index
I-4 © Systeme Lauer GmbH & Co KG Kelterstr. 59 D-72669 Unterensingen Phone +49 7022 96 60-0 Fax +49 7022 96 60-103
Bauer Antriebstechnik GmbH
Postfach 10 02 08
Einzelteilverzeichnis
und Schnittzeichnung
ET-D 08
D-73726 Esslingen
Eberhard-Bauer-Straûe 36 ± 60 Parts list
D-73734 Esslingen and sectional drawing
Telefon (0711) 35180 Motor-Typ
Telefax (0711) 3518381 Liste des pieÁces
www.bauer-gear-motors.de et dessin en coupe Motor type
Despiece y seccioÂn Moteur type
SpeciFikaciq detalej Motor tipo
i shema w razreze Dwigatelx tip
A.5-6/98-ET-D 08 Printed in Germany

ET-D 08 Motor-Typ / Motor type / Moteur type / Motor tipo / Dwigatelx tip ET-D 08
Teil-Nr. / Part-No. / PieÁce No. / Pieza No± / Detalx ð
Bestell-Nr. / Order No. / Comm. No. / CoÂdigo No± / Zakaz ð
StuÈck / Quantity / PieÁces / Cantidad / [t.
Benennung Designation DeÂsignation DesignacioÂn Naimenowanie
44 S 2513480* 1 Speedi-Sleeve-HuÈlse Speedi-Sleeve spacer Douille Speedi-Sleeve Casquillo Speedi-Sleeve Wtulka ¹Speedi-Sleeveª
43 * 0/1 Gleichrichter, komplett Rectifier, complete Redresseur Rectificador, completo Wyprqmitelx per.
napr. w komplekte
42 2515067 1 FuÈllstuÈck Packing piece Joint passe-fils Relleno Prostawka
41 * 1 Leistungsschild Rating plate Plaque signaleÂtique Placa de caracterõÂsticas [ilxdik
40.2 1492781* 0/1 V-Ring V-seal Joint d'eÂtrancheÂite Aro en V Zub~atoe kolxco
40.1 2502267 0/1 Spritzring Centrifugal washer DeÂflecteur Aro centrifugador Maslootrava`}ee
kolxco
39 S 1242351* 0/1 Schutzleiterklemme Stator earth terminal Borne de masse exteÂrieure Toma de tierra Klemma aazwmleniq
38 1271407* 0/2 Anschluûscheibe Connection disc Rondelle de serrage Arandela Prisoedinitelxnaq
klemma
37 2504197 2 KlemmbuÈgel Clamping unit EleÂment de blocage Estribo presor Klemmnaq skoba
36 * 1 Klemmbrett, vollsta
È ndig Terminal board, complete Plaque aÁ bornes Regleta, completa Klemmnaq kolodka w
sbore
35 1024191 1 Kula-Ausgleichscheibe Kula-Shim Kula-Rondelle de Kula-Arandela de Kula-Kompensiru`}aq
compensation compensacioÂn {ajba
34 ± Wuchtgewicht Balancing weight Masse d'eÂquilibrage Contrapeso Protiwowes
33 1013416 1 FluÈgelrad Fan Ventilateur Aspa ventilador Wentilqtor
32.2 1493434* 0/1 LuÈfterhaube Fan cowl Couverde du ventilateur Casquete Kolpak wentilqtora
32.1 1013432 0/1 LuÈfterhaube Fan cowl Couverde du ventilateur Casquete Kolpak wentilqtora
31 * 1 Preûguûla
È ufer Pressure diecast rotor Toles rotor Rotor Zapresowannyj rotor
30 * 1 Statorpaket Statorpacket Toles stator Paquete del estator Statornyj paket
29 1010476 4 Federring Spring washer Rondelle ressort Anillo de muelle Pruvinnoe kolxco
28 * 2 Verschluûschraube Cover screw Vis de fermeture TapoÂn roscado Rezxbowaq probka
27 * 1 Ringschraube Eye bolt Anneau de levage CaÂncamo Rym-bolt
26 1491792 1 Sechskantmutter Hexagon nut Ecrou hexagonal Tuerca hexagonal [estigrannaq gajka
25 1307550 1 Sechskantmutter Hexagon nut Ecrou hexagonal Tuerca hexagonal [estigrannaq gajka
24 1232657* 0/2 Zylinderschraube Allen screw Vis aÁ teÃte cylindrique Tornillo cilõÂndrico Wint s cilindri~eskoj
golowkoj
23 1483471 1 Gewindeform-Schraube Thread forming screw Vis auto-taraudeuse Tornillo moldeador de Fasonnyj bolt
rosca
22 1425579 4 Sechskantschraube Hexagon bolt Vis aÁ teÃte hexagonale Tornillo hexagonal [estigrannyj bolt
rosca
rosca
rosca
18 2506327* 0/1 Thermistorklemme Thermistor terminal Bornier pour thermistance Clema para termistor Klemma termistorow
17 2513676 1 O-Ring O-Ring Joint torique Junta toÂrica Uplotnitelxnoe kolxco
kruglogo se~eniq
16 2513684 1 O-Ring O-Ring Joint torique Junta toÂrica Uplotnitelxnoe kolxco
kruglogo se~eniq
15 2506319 1 Dichtung Gasket Joint Junta Proklodko
14 1354418 1 Wellendichtring Shaft seal Bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ d'ar- ReteÂn Manveta
bre
13.2 2517485* 0/1 Wellendichtring Shaft seal Bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ d'ar- ReteÂn Manveta
bre
13.1 S 2505088 0/1 Wellendichtring Shaft seal Bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ d'ar- ReteÂn Manveta
bre
12 1011243 1 Sicherungsring Retainer ring Circlips Anillo de seguridad Stopornoe kolxco
11 S 1000373 0/1 Sicherungsring Retainer ring Circlips Anillo de seguridad Stopornoe kolxco
10 S 1011278 0/1 Sicherungsring Retainer ring Circlips Anillo de seguridad Stopornoe kolxco
9 2504979 2 Zylinderstift Parallel pin Goupille Pasador cilõÂndrico Cilindri~eskij {tift
8 1315943 1 Rillenkugellager Ball bearing Roulement Rodamiento Pod{ipnik
7 S 1354957 1 Rillenkugellager Ball bearing Roulement Rodamiento Pod{ipnik
6 1000675* 0/1 Paûfeder Key Clavette Chaveta Prizmati~eskaq {ponka
5 * 1 La
È uferwelle Rotor shaft Arbre du rotor Eje del rotor Wal rotora
4 2506343 1 B-Lagerschild End shield Flasque Escudo del motor ]it pod{ipnika
3 2506262 1 Klemmenkastendeckel Terminal box cover Couvercle de boõÃte aÁ Tapa de la caja de Kry{ka klemmnoj
bornes bornas korobki
2 2506220 1 Sta
È ndergeha
È use Stator housing Carcasse du stator Carcasa del estator Korpus statora
1.2 S * 0/1 Systemdeckel System cover Couvercle intermeÂdiaire Tapa integral Perednij }it
1.1 S 2515211* 0/1 Zwischendeckel Intermediate cover Couvercle intermeÂdiaire Tapa intermedia Promevuto~naq
kry{ka
S Diese Teile entfallen bei S These parts are not required S Ces pieÁces n'apparaissent S Con el reductor BS 03 se S \ti ~asti ne ispolxzu`toq
Anbau an Getriebe BS 03. when attached to gearbox pas pour montage du BS 03. carece de estas piezas. pri sborke s reduktorom
BS 03. BS 03.
* ACHTUNG * ATTENTION * ATTENTION * ATENCION * Wnimanie

Bei Bestellung unbedingt Please clearly state serial En cas de commande En caso de pedido Pri zakaze
Konstruktionsa
È nderungen Right to change the Construction sous reÂserve Nos reservamos el derecho a intro- Ostawlqem za soboj prawo Motor-Nr. angeben. number when ordering these veuillez indiquer indicar el nuÂmero obqzatelxno ukazywatx
vorbehalten. design reserved. de modifications. ducir modificaciones constructivas. na izmenenie konstrukcii. spare parts. le numeÂro du moteur. de motor. nomer dwigatelq.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
7.0 ELEKTROUNTERLAGEN 7.0 ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTATION

===================== ============================
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KOMMISSION: 509849 ANLAGE: MUFFAUTOMAT KK 70/2A

order number: machine: socketing unit KK 70/2A

LAND: Vietnam ZEICHNUNGSNR: MU919902

STEUERUNG: SIEMENS S5-95U NETZSPANNUNG: 3 x 400V + N + PE / 50 Hz

control system: supply voltage:
BEDIENUNG: LAUER PCS 095 ANSCHLUSSLEISTUNG: 6 KW

control unit: supply voltage:
BUSSYSTEM: STEUERSPANNUNG: 24 V/DC

bus system: control voltage:
BEARBEITET: Frank Meyer GEPRšFT: Frank Meyer BAUJAHR: 2004 VERSION:

2
Datum 02.Nov.2004 Ident-Nr. Benennung Zeichnungs-Nr. Bl.
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 1
DECKBLATT MU919902
Frank Meyer
cover page + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ALLGEMEINE HINWEISE
LEITUNGSFARBEN DRAHTQUERSCHNITTE VORSCHRIFTEN

HAUPTSTROMKREIS AC SCHWARZ (BK) HAUPTSTROMKREIS AC 1,5 mmý (AWG 14) DIE SCHALTANLAGE IST NACH DIN VDE 100, VDE113
SOWIE EN 90. . ff ERSTELLT UND ERFUELT SOMIT DIESE NORMEN

STEUERSTROMKREIS AC (L) ROT (RD) STEUERSTROMKREIS AC (L) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
( 115V / 230V ) ( 115V / 230V ) TEILE DIE AUCH BEI AUSGESCHALTETEM HAUPTSCHALTER UNTER
(N) ROT/WEISS (RD/WH) (N) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
SPANNUNG STEHEN; SIND ENTSPRECHEND ABZUDECKEN UND
STEUERSTROMKREIS AC (L) BRAUN (BN) STEUERSTROMKREIS AC (L) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16) ZU KENNZEICHNEN ! !
( 24V ) ( 24V )
(0V) BRAUN/WEISS (BN/WH) (0V) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16) DIE VERDRAHTUNG MUSS MIT DEN PLAENEN UEBEREINSTIMMEN:
ZU VERDRAHTEN IST VON OBEN NACH UNTEN UND VON LINKS

STEUERSTROMKREIS DC (L+) BLAU (BU) STEUERSTROMKREIS DC (L+) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
( 24V ) NACH RECHTS (ZIELVERDRAHTUNG):
( 24V )
(L-) BLAU (BU) (L-) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
IN REGELMAESSIGEN ZEITABSTAENDEN (MIN 1/1 JAHR) SOWIE NACH
VERRIEGELUNGSKREISE ORANGE (OG) SPS-EIN-/AUSGNGE 0,5 mmý (AWG 20) JEDEM TRANSPORT SIND ALLE ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUESSE AUF
FESTEN SITZ UND FUNKTION ZU UEBERPRUEFEN:

MESSKREISE WEISS (WH) VERRIEGELUNGSKREISE 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
FREMDSPANNUNG ORANGE (OG) MESSKREISE 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
VOR HAUPTSCHALTER GELB (YE) FREMDSPANNUNG 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
VOR HAUPTSCHALTER 2,5 mmý KURZSCHLUSSFEST (AWG 12)
ALLE ANGABEN GELTEN; SOWEIT IM PLAN
NICHT ABWEICHEND BESCHRIFTET ! !
* AENDERUNGEN; DIE NICHT VON FA. SGGT ODER VON IHR AUTORISIERTEN PERSONEN DURCHGEFUEHRT WERDEN;
STELLEN AUTOMATISCH DIE FA. SGGT GEGENUEBER RECHTSANSPRUECHEN IN JEDWEDER FORM FREI !!!!
* ES DUERFEN NUR VON FA. SGGT FREIGEGEBENE ERSATZTEILE VERWENDET WERDEN: BEI ZUWIEDERHANDLUNG
KANN FA. SGGT NICHT FUER EINE BETRIEBSSICHERE FUNKTION DER ANLAGE GARANTIEREN:
* SEITENS DER FA. SGGT WIRD DARAUF HINGEWIESEN, DASS DIE EINSPEISUNG FUER 100A AUSGELEGT WURDE:
SOLLTE ES SEITENS DES BETREIBERS NOTWENDIG SEIN DIE EINSPEISSUNG ZU AENDERN, SO IST AUF DIE MAXIMAL
ZULAESSIGEN STROEME UND QUERSCHNITTE DER SCHALTANLAGE ZU ACHTEN !!!
1 3
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 2
ALLGEMEINE HINWEISE MU919902
Frank Meyer
general instructions + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
WIRE COLOURS WIRE CROSS SECTION REGULATIONS

main circuit AC black (BK) main circuit AC 1,5 mmý (AWG 14) The switching device has been produced according to
DIN VDE100, VDE113, EN 90xx also IEC and therefore

control circuit AC (L) red (RD) control circuit AC (L) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
satisfies these norms.
( 115V / 230V ) ( 115V / 230V )
(N) red/withe (RD/WH) (N) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
Parts that are live even while the main switch is
STEUERSTROMKREIS AC (L) brown (BN) control circuit AC (L) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16) deactivated must be effectively shielded and designated ! !
( 24V ) ( 24V )
(0V) brown/withe (BN/WH) (0V) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16) After regular intervals (min of one year) and after each
transport. Check all electrical connections for tightness

control circuit DC (L+) blue (BU) control circuit DC (L+) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
( 24V ) and function.
( 24V )
(L-) blue (BU) (L-) 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
The wiring must correspond to the diagrams.
locking circuit orange (OG) PLC in-/output 0,5 mmý (AWG 20) Wiuring must proceed from top to bottom and from left
to right (target wiring).

measuring circuit withe (WH) locking circuit 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
external voltage orange (OG) measuring circuit 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
before main-switch yellow (YE) external voltage 1,0 mmý (AWG 16)
before main-switch 2,5 mmý short circuit proof (AWG 12)
all instructions apply unless the
diagramm provides different data ! !
* Changes not carried out by SGGT Co. or their autorized third parties, shall automatically
release SGGT Co. from any and all legal claims !!
* You may only use spare parts approved by SGGT Co. any violation of this clause makes it
impossible for SGGT Co. to guarantee the safty and operability of the installation.
* SGGT Co. point out that the power supply has been designed for 100 ampere.
Should the operating company need to change the power supply, the maximum allowable amperages
and cross section of the switching installation must be observed !!
2 4
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 3
ALLGEMEINE HINWEISE MU919902
Frank Meyer
general instructions + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

DECKBLATT EINGNGE TRANSPORT

1 1 21 23
cover page inputs conveying
ALLGEMEINE HINWEISE EINGNGE TRANSPORT

2 2 22 24
general instructions inputs conveying
ALLGEMEINE HINWEISE AUSGNGE ALLGEMEIN

3 3 23 27
general instructions outputs general
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS AUSGNGE ALLGEMEIN

4 4 24 28
table of contents outputs general
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS AUSGNGE PNEUMATIK

5 5 25 29
table of contents outputs pneumatic
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS AUSGNGE PNEUMATIK

6 6 26 30
table of contents outputs pneumatic
KLEMMLEISTENLISTE AUSGNGE PNEUMATIK

7 8 27 31
teminal strip list outputs pneumatic
EINSPEISUNG RESERVE AUSGNGE

8 9 28 32
power supply spare outputs
LEISTUNG HEIZUNG RESERVEKLEMMEN

9 10 29 35
power supply heater spare terminals
REGLER OFEN SPS šBERSICHT 1A0

10 11 30 36
controller heater PLC overview 1A0
MOTOREN SPS šBERSICHT 1A1

11 12 31 37
motors PLC overview 1A1
220V AC / MOTOREN SPS šBERSICHT 1A2

12 13 32 38
220V AC / motors PLC overview 1A2
24V DC VERSORGUNG INSTALLATIONSPLAN

13 14 33 40
24V DC supply installation drawing
24V DC ENDSCALTER INSTALLATIONSPLAN

14 15 34 41
24V DClimit switch installation drawing
24V DC EIN- AUSGNGE STšCKLISTEN-INFORMATION

15 16 35 42
24V DC in- outputs part list information
Not - Aus BESCHRIFTUNG STEUERUNG

16 17 36 43
emergency stop lettering control
EINGNGE šBERWACHUNG BESCHRIFTUNG

17 18 37 44
inputs monitoring lettering
EINGNGE MUFFGERT AUFBAUPLAN SCHALTSCHRANK

18 19 38 45
inputs socketing station mountig control cabinet
EINGNGE MUFFGRRT AUFBAUPLAN SCHALTSCHRANK

19 21 39 46
inputs socketing station mounting control cabinet
EINGNGE TRANSPORT AUFBAUPLAN BEDIENPULT

20 22 40 47
inputs coveying mounting control panel
3 5
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 4
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS MU919902
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AUFBAU MONTAGEPLATTE KLEMMLEISTE 1X5

1 48 21 76
mounting mounting plate terminal strip 1X5
AUFBAUPLAN BEDIENPULT KLEMMLEISTE 5X3

2 49 22 77
mounting control panel terminal strip 5X3
BEWEGUNGSANWAHL KLEMMLEISTE 5X3

3 53 23 78
selection of functions terminal strip 5X3
BEWEGUNGSANWAHL KLEMMLEISTE 5X4

4 54 24 79
selection of functions terminal strip 5X4
SONDERFUNKTIONEN KLEMMLEISTE 5X4

5 55 25 80
special functions terminal strip 5X4
ZEITEN EINGEBEN ELEKTRO-STšCKLISTE

6 56 26 90
times set electrical part list
PROGRAMMANWAHL ELEKTRO-STšCKLISTE
7 57 27 91
program selection electrical part list
ST™RUNGSANZEIGE ELEKTRO-STšCKLISTE
8 58 28 92
error display electrical part list
9 59 29 93
10 60 30 94
11 61 31 95
VERRIEGELUNG HAND ELEKTRO-STšCKLISTE

12 62 32 96
locking hand electrical part list
VERRIEGELUNG HAND ELEKTRO-STšCKLISTE

13 63 33 97
locking hand electrical part list
VERRIEGELUNG TRANSPORT ELEKTRO-STšCKLISTE

14 64 34 98
locking conveying unit electrical part list
KLEMMLEISTE 1X0 ELEKTRO-STšCKLISTE

15 70 35 99
terminal strip 1X0 electrical part list

16 71 36 100

17 72 37 101
KLEMMLEISTE 1X2 ELEKTRO-BESTELLSTšCKLISTE

18 73 38 110
terminal strip 1X2 electrical order list

19 74 39 111

20 75 40 112
4 6
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 5
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ELEKTRO-BESTELLSTšCKLISTE
1 113 21
electrical order list
2 114 22
3 115 23
4 24
5 25
6 26
7 27
8 28
9 29
10 30
11 31
12 32
13 33
14 34
15 35
16 36
17 37
18 38
19 39
20 40
5 8
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 6
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1X0 = KLEMMLEISTE 1X0 1XE0 = EINGNGE 1A0 1XPG = STECKER CPU

terminal strip 1X0 inputs 1A0 connector PLC
1X1 = KLEMMLEISTE 1X1 1XE1 = EINGNGE 1A1 3XPCS = STECKER PCS

terminal strip 1X1 inputs 1A1 connector PCS
1X2 = KLEMMLEISTE 1X2 1XE2 = EINGNGE 1A2

terminal strip 1X2 inputs 1A2
1X3 = KLEMMLEISTE 1X3

terminal strip 1X3

terminal strip 1X4

terminal strip 1X5
1XA0 = AUSGNGE 1A0 6X01 = STECKER ROHREINZUG

outputs 1A0 connector diving gear
5X01 = KLEMMLEISTE 5X01 1XA1 = AUSGNGE 1A1 6X02 = STECKER QUERTRANSPORT

terminal strip 5X01 outputs 1A1 connector conveying unit
5X02 = KLEMMLEISTE 5X02 1XA2 = AUSGNGE 1A2 6X03 = STECKER H™HENVERSTELLUNG

terminal strip 5X02 outputs 1A2 connector height adjustment
5X3 = KLEMMLEISTE 5X3 6X04 = STECKER TRANSPORTSYSTEM

terminal strip 5X3 connector conveying system
5X4 = KLEMMLEISTE 5X4 6X05 = STECKER VENTILE

terminal strip 5X4 connector valves
6X06 = STECKER HEIZUNG OBEN

connector heater up
6X07 = STECKER HEIZUNG UNTEN

connector heater down
6 9
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 8
KLEMMLEISTENLISTE MU919902
Frank Meyer
teminal strip list + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L1/10.0
L2/10.0
L3/10.0
N/10.0
4mmý BK
1 3 5
1F1
25A 2 4 6
10mmý BK
T1 T2 T3
1Q1
63A L1 L2 L3
10mmý OR
0/L1
0/L2
0/L3
0/PE
0/N
1X0 PE-BAR
EINSPEISSUNG
3X400V N PE 50Hz
power supply
3X400V N PE 50cps
8 10
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 9
EINSPEISUNG MU919902
Frank Meyer
power supply + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9.9/L1 L1/11.0
9.9/L2 L2/11.0
9.9/L3 L3/11.0
9.9/N N/11.0
4mmý BK 2,5mmý BU 4mmý BK 2,5mmý BU
1 11 1 11
1F2 1F3
16A 2 14 16A 2 14
18.3 18.3
2,5mmý BK 2,5mmý BK
W1X0/6X51 Oelflex 3x2.5mmý
W1X0/6X52 Oelflex 3x2.5mmý

1 1
1KL2 1KL3
11.2 11.7
2 2
1X0 1 2 PE 3 4 PE
6X06 1 2 6X07 1 2
R2 R3
1750W 1750W
230V 230V
LEISTUNG LEISTUNG
HEIZUNG HEIZUNG
OBEN UNTEN
power power
heater heater
up down
9 11
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 10
LEISTUNG HEIZUNG MU919902
Frank Meyer
power supply heater + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10.9/L1 L1/12.0
10.9/L2 L2/12.0
10.9/L3 L3/12.0
10.9/N N/12.0
4mmý BK 1,5mmý BU
15.2 1 11
L+S9 1F4
10A 2 14
18.3
1,5mmý BK
L220/13.0
1X0 21
N220/13.0
1X0 25
1 3
1K4 1K4
27.3 27.3
2 4
Range Range
Temp.Bereich : 0 (0-200øC)
3A2 Temp.Bereich : 0 (0-200øC)
3A3
7 9 10 7 9 10
Alarm : 1 (oberer + unterer E5CS-R1KJX Alarm : 1 (oberer + unterer E5CS-R1KJX

Grenzwert) Grenzwert)
8 1 2 8 1 2
ON ON
W1X0/A2 NiCr/Ni W1X0/A3 NiCr/Ni
OFF 2x1,5mmý OFF 2x1,5mmý
P X 1 2 3 4 5 6 1X2 1 2 P X 1 2 3 4 5 6 1X2 3 4
W1X0/6X06 NiCr/Ni W1X0/6X07 NiCr/Ni

2x1,5mmý 2x1,5mmý
6X06 3 4 6X07 3 4
3 3
1KL2 1KL3
4 gn wh 4 gn wh
B2 B3
M-BAR
REGLER REGLER
HEIZUNG HEIZUNG
OBEN UNTEN
1 2 10.1 1 2 10.3
4 5 18.7 4 5 18.8
cotroller controller
heater heater
up down
10 12
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 11
REGLER OFEN MU919902
Frank Meyer
controller heater + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11.9/L1 L1/13.0
11.9/L2 L2/13.0
11.9/L3 L3/13.0
11.9/N
4mmý BK 4mmý BK
1 3 5 1 3 5
13 1 11 13
1F6
1QM5 14 0,5A 2 14 1QM7 14
0,63-1,0A 18.5 18.3 2,5-4,0A 18.5
2 4 6 2 4 6 16.6
L+L29 M-BAR
1,5mmý BK
1,5mmý BK
1 3 5 1 1 3 5 13
1KL5 1KL6 1KL7 1KL7
28.1 28.2 28.6 28.6
2 4 6 2 2 4 6 14
W1X0/6X01 Oelflex 4x1,5mmý

1X0 5 6 7 PE 8 9 PE 1X0 10 11 12 13 14 PE
W6X02/M7-Y7 Oelflex 7x1,5mmý

6X01 5X3 6X02
W6X01/M5 Oelflex 4x1,5mmý
1 2 3 24 25 PE 1 2 3 4 5

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
M5
M M6
M M7
M
3 1 3 Y7
400V/50Hz ~ HAEWA ~ 230V/50Hz ~
0,18KW/0,63A PE WW2000 0,75KW/2,1A PE
ROLLGANG MUFFE QUERTRANSPORT BREMSE

ROHREINZUG KšHLEN QUERTRANSPORT
brake
rollers socket conveying unit conveying
driving gear cooling unit
11 13
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 12
MOTOREN MU919902
Frank Meyer
motors + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
12.9/L1 L1/14.0
12.9/L2 L2/14.0
12.9/L3 L3/14.0
4mmý BK
1 3 5
13
1QM8 14
1,0-1,6A 18.5
2 4 6 1,5mmý BK
11.9/L220
1X0 22 23 24
11.9/N220
1X0 26 27 28 PE PE
1 3 5 1 3 5
1KL8R 1KL8V
28.4 28.5
2 4 6 2 4 6
W1x0/6X03 Oelflex 4x1,5mmý

1X0 15 16 17 PE 18 19 20 PE

PE 6X03 1 2 3
U1 V1 W1
M8
M
M 3
1E1 1M1
1 400V/50Hz ~
~ 0,37KW/1,35A PE
STECKDOSE SCHALTSCHRANK- TRANSPORTEINHEIT

220V AC LšFTER HEBEN / SENKEN
socket fan conveying unit

220V AC control cabinet up / down
12 14
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 13
220V AC / MOTOREN MU919902
Frank Meyer
220V AC / motors + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
13.9/L1
13.9/L2 15.0
13.9/L3 L+
2,5mmýBU
4mmý BK
1
1F11
6A 2
1 3 5
1F10
3A 2 4 6
1X1 2 3
M-BAR
4
M-BAR
5 6 7
1,5mmý BK
1A0 3A0
PG X1
L+ M L+ M
1G10
220V AC
1XPG 1 2 6 7 9 3XPCS 10 12 19 13 16 21 24 14 1
24V DC/10A
1A1
2,5mmýBU
W1XPG/3XPCS LiYCY 4x0,34mmý

ws ge gn br BN GN YE WH
1A2
1X1 1 PE
L+5 L+6 L+7

17.0 18.0 27.8
M-BAR
NETZTEIL STEUERUNG BEDIENTERMINAL VERSORGUNG šBERWACHUNG ANLAGE

400V/24V DC S5-95U PCS 095 NOT-AUS EIN
power pack CONTROL operating panel supply monitoring unit

400V/24V DC S5-95U PCS 095 emerg. stop on
13 15
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 14
24V DC VERSORGUNG MU919902
Frank Meyer
24V DC supply + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
14.9
L+
2,5mmýBU
1
1K1
27.1
2 16.0
L+S
1 11
1F12
6A 2 14
18.3
1X1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
22.0
L+S11
19.0
L+S10
11.0
L+S9
VERSORGUNG
ENDSCHALTER
supply
limit switch
14 16
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 15
24V DC ENDSCALTER MU919902
Frank Meyer
24V DClimit switch + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
15.9
L+S
2,5mmýBU 2,5mmýBU
1 11 1 11
1F13 1F14
6A 2 14 6A 2 14
18.3 18.4
13
1K1N
17.7
14
1X1 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
32.8
L+L34
31.8
L+L33
30.8
L+L32
24.8 29.8
L+S21 L+L31
22.8 28.8
L+S20 L+L30
19.8 12.8
L+S19 L+L29
VERSORGUNG VERSORGUNG VERSORGUNG

SPS-EINGNGE SPS-EINGNGE SPS-EINGNGE
(PASSIV) (AKTIV)
supply supply supply

PLC inputs PLC inputs PLC inputs
(passive) (active)
15 17
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 16
24V DC EIN- AUSGNGE MU919902
Frank Meyer
24V DC in- outputs + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
14.7
L+5
33
1K1N 1K1N
.7
34
A1 Y21 Y32
SNO 2002
Y12 Y31 Y11 Y13 A2
1X4 27 28 29 30
1X4 23 25
W5X4/2S1N Oelflex 3x1,0mmý
6X04 23
5X4 22
21 21
3S1N 2S1N
22 22
5X4 23
6X04 24
1X4 24 26 PE
M-BAR
NOT-AUS TASTER NOT-AUS TASTER NOT-AUS NOT-AUS

BEDIENTABLEAU EXTRUSIONSACHSE RELAIS EXTERN
emerg. stop emerg. stop emerg. stop emerg. stop

control panel extrusion axis contactor extern
13 14 16.4
33 34 .9
41 42 18.2
16 18
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 17
Not - Aus MU919902
Frank Meyer
emergency stop + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11 11 13
1F2 1F14 1QM5
10.1 16.4 12.2
14 14 14
11 13
1F3 1QM7
10.4 12.7
14 14
11 13 4 4
1F4 1QM8 3A2 3A3
11.3 13.6 11.3 11.8
14 14 5 5
11
1F6
12.4
57 41 14 13
1K1 1K1N 1K4
27.1 17.7 27.3
58 42 11 14
1F12
15.1
14
11
1F13
16.1
14
L+6
14.8
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1XE0 2
1A0
E32.0 E32.1 E32.2 E32.3 E32.4 E32.5 E32.6 E32.7
36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2
ANLAGE NOT - AUS SICHERUNGS- HEIZUNG ANWRM- ANWRM-

EIN šBERWACHUNG EIN TEMPERATUR TEMPERATUR
OBEN NICHT UNTEN NICHT
ERREICHT ERREICHT
unit emergency fuse heating heating heating

on stop monitoring on temperature temperature
up not down not
reached reached
17 19
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 18
EINGNGE šBERWACHUNG MU919902
Frank Meyer
inputs monitoring + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
21.0
L+5X3
5X3 2/+ 3/+ 4/+ 5/+ 6/+ 7/+ 8/+ 9/+
21.0
L-5X3
5X3 2/- 3/- 4/- 5/- 6/- 7/- 8/- 9/-

br bl br bl br bl br bl
2S3R 2S3V 2S6R 2S6V 16.3 M-BAR

L+S19
sw sw sw sw
5X3 1/+ 1/- 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
L+S10
15.2 M-BAR
1XE0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 20
1A0
E33.0 E33.1 E33.2 E33.3 E33.4 E33.5 E33.6 E33.7 L+/EW32 M/EW32
36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2
SPANNBACKEN SPANNBACKEN RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE OFEN OFEN RESERVE

ZURšCK VOR ZURšCK VOR
clamping jaws clamping jaws spare spare spare heater heater spare
backward forward backward forward
18 21
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 19
EINGNGE MUFFGERT MU919902
Frank Meyer
inputs socketing station + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
19.9 27.7
L+5X3 L+5X3
5X3 10/+ 11/+ 12/+ 13/+ 14/+ 15/+ 16/+ 17/+
19.9 27.7
L-5X3 L-5X3
5X3 10/- 11/- 12/- 13/- 14/- 15/- 16/- 17/-
br bl br bl
2S8R 2S8V
sw sw
5X3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1X3 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1XE1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1A1
E64.0 E64.1 E64.2 E64.3 E64.4 E64.5 E64.6 E64.7
37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2
WERKZEUG- WERKZEUG- RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE

SCHLITTEN SCHLITTEN
ZURšCK VOR
tool tool spare spare spare spare spare spare

carriage carriage
backward forward
19 22
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 21
EINGNGE MUFFGRRT MU919902
Frank Meyer
inputs socketing station + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
23.0
L+5X4
5X4 2/+ 3/+ 4/+ 5/+ 6/+ 7/+ 8/+ 9/+
23.0
L-5X4
5X4 2/- 3/- 4/- 5/- 6/- 7/- 8/- 9/-

br bl br bl br bl br bl br bl br bl
13 13
2S10TK 2S11TK 2S10R 2S10V 2S11R 2S11V 2S5V 2S5R 16.3 M-BAR
14 14
L+S20
sw sw sw sw sw sw
W5X4/2S10TK Oelflex 3x1mmý
W5X4/2S11TK Oelflex 3x1mmý

5X4 1/+ 1/- 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6X04 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1X4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
L+S11
15.2 M-BAR
1XE1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 20
1A1
E65.0 E65.1 E65.2 E65.3 E65.4 E65.5 E65.6 E65.7 L+/EW65 M/EW65
37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2
FREIGABE FREIGABE EXTRUSION 1 EXTRUSION 1 EXTRUSION 2 EXTRUSION 2 ROHR ROHR

ACHSE 1 ACHSE 2 GESCHLOEEEN OFFEN GESCHLOEEEN OFFEN POSITIONIEREN POSITIONIEREN
VOR ZURšCK
release release extrusion 1 extrusion 1 extrusion 2 extrusion 2 pipe pipe

axis 1 axis 2 closed open closed open positioning positioning
forward backward
21 23
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 22
EINGNGE TRANSPORT MU919902
Frank Meyer
inputs coveying + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
22.9 24.0
L+5X4 L+5X4
5X4 10/+ 11/+ 12/+ 13/+ 14/+ 15/+ 16/+ 17/+
22.9 24.0
L-5X4 L-5X4
5X4 10/- 11/- 12/- 13/- 14/- 15/- 16/- 17/-
br bl br bl br bl br bl br bl br bl
2S12R 2S13R 2S12TK 2S13TK 2S14R1 2S14R2
sw sw sw sw sw sw
5X4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
6X04 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1X4 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1XE2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1A2
E72.0 E72.1 E72.2 E72.3 E72.4 E72.5 E72.6 E72.7
38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2
ANDRUCKROLLE ANDRUCKROLLE TEILKONTROLLE TEILKONTROLLE ROHREINZUG ROHREINZUG RESERVE RESERVE

ACHSE 1 ACHSE 2 ACHSE 1 ACHSE 2 ACHSE 1 ACHSE 2
ZURšCK ZURšCK STOP STOP
back up roller back up roller part control part control driving gear driving gear spare spare
axis 1 axis 2 axis 1 axis 2 axis 1 axis 2
backward backward stop stop
22 24
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 23
Frank Meyer
inputs conveying + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
23.9 28.6
L+5X4 L+5X4
5X4 18/+ 19/+ 20/+
23.9 28.6
L-5X4 L-5X4
5X4 18/- 19/- 20/-
br bl br bl
2S2R 2S2V 16.3 M-BAR

L+S21
sw sw
5X4 18 19 20
6X04 19 20 21
1X4 19 20 21
1XE2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 20
1A2
E73.0 E73.1 E73.2 E73.3 E73.4 E73.5 E73.6 E73.7 L+/EW73 M/EW73
38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2
QUERTRANSPORT QUERTRANSPORT RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE

ZURšCK FREIGABE
STATIONEN
coveying unit conveying spare spare spare spare spare spare

backward unit release
stations
23 27
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 24
Frank Meyer
inputs conveying + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1A0
36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2
A32.0 A32.1 A32.2 A32.3 A32.4 A32.5 A32.6 A32.7 L+/AB32 M/AB32
1XA0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 10
W5X3/3H1 Oelflex 3x1,0mmý

1X3 19
5X3 18
L+7 M-BAR
14.9
A1 A1 X1
1K1 1K4 3H1

24 DCV A2 24 DCV A2 X2
21.9 28.8
L-5X3 5X3 18/-

L-5X3
28.0
L- 21.9 28.8
M-BAR
L+5X3 5X3 18/+
L+5X3
ANLAGE RESERVE HEIZUNG RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE ST™RANZEIGE

EIN EIN AUF
SCHALTSCHRANK
unit spare heating spare spare spare spare error

on on display
on
1 2 15.1 1 2 11.2
3 4 3 4 11.3 machine
5 6 5 6
13 14 13 14 18.6
21 22 21 22
57 58 18.1
65 66
24 28
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 27
AUSGNGE ALLGEMEIN MU919902
Frank Meyer
outputs general + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1A0
36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2 36.2
A33.0 A33.1 A33.2 A33.3 A33.4 A33.5 A33.6 A33.7 L+/AB33 M/AB33
1XA0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 11 20
W1X4/2S31R Oelflex 3x1,0mmý
W1X4/2S31V Oelflex 3x1,0mmý

1X4 31 33
21 21
2S31R 2S31V
22 22
1X4 32 34
1X4 22 1X3 20 21 22
6X04 22
21 21
1KL8V 1KL8R
.5 .4
22 22 5X4 21 5X3 19 20 21
L+L30 M-BAR
16.6
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
2Y61
1KL5 1KL6 1KL8R 1KL8V 1KL7
24 DCV A2 24 DCV A2 24 DCV A2 24 DCV A2 24 DCV A2
24.9 35.0 27.9 35.0

27.4 L-5X4 5X4 21/-
L-5X4 L-5X3 5X3 19/- 20/- 21/-
L-5X3
L-
24.9 35.0 27.9 35.0
L+5X4 5X4 21/+

L+5X4 L+5X3 5X3
19/+ 20/+ 21/+
L+5X3
ROHREINZUG KšHLEN RESERVE TRANSPORT TRANSPORT MOTORQUER- ROHR RESERVE

EIN MUFFE EINHEIT EINHEIT TRANSPORT ABBLASEN
SENKEN HEBEN EIN
driving socket spare coveying coveying motor pipe spare

gear on cooling unit unit conveying blowing
down up unit on off
1 2 12.1 1 2 12.3 1 2 13.5 1 2 13.6 1 2 12.6

3 4 12.1 3 4 3 4 13.5 3 4 13.7 3 4 12.6
5 6 12.1 5 6 5 6 13.6 5 6 13.7 5 6 12.6
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 12.8
21 22 21 22 21 22 .5 21 22 .4 21 22
27 29
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 28
AUSGNGE ALLGEMEIN MU919902
Frank Meyer
outputs general + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1A1
37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2
A64.0 A64.1 A64.2 A64.3 A64.4 A64.5 A64.6 A64.7 L+/AB64 M/AB64
1XA1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 11 20
1X5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
br ws ge gn rs gr sw rt
6X05 C1 B1 C2 B2 C3 B3 C4 B4
L+L31 M-BAR
2Y10V 2Y11V 2Y12V 2Y13V
16.6
6X05 A1 A2 A3 A4
bl rt/bl ws/rs rs/br

30.0
1X5 17 18 19 20
L-1X5
M-BAR
EXTRUSIONS- RESERVE EXTRUSIONS- RESERVE ANDRUCK- RESERVE ANDRUCK- RESERVE

ACHSE 1 ACHSE 2 ROLLE ROLLE
™FFNEN ™FFNEN ACHSE 1 ACHSE 2
VOR VOR
extrusions spare extrusions spare back up spare back up spare

axis 1 axis 2 roller roller
opening opening axis 1 axis 2
forward forward
28 30
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 29
AUSGNGE PNEUMATIK MU919902
Frank Meyer
outputs pneumatic + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1A1
37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2
A65.0 A65.1 A65.2 A65.3 A65.4 A65.5 A65.6 A65.7 L+/AB65 M/AB65
1XA1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 10
1X5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
gr/rs vt br/gn ws/gn ge/br ws/ge gr/br ws/gr
6X05 C5 B5 C6 B6 C7 B7 C8 B8
L+L32 M-BAR
2Y6V 2Y3V 2Y3R 2Y8V 2Y8R 2Y5V 2Y5R
16.6
6X05 A5 A6 A7 A8
ws/bl br/bl ws/rt br/rt

29.9
L-1X5 1X5 21 22 23 24
OFEN RESERVE SPANN- SPANN- WERKZEUG- WERKZEUG- ROHR ROHR

VOR BACKEN BACKEN SCHLITTEN SCHLITTEN POSITIONIERER POSITIONIERER
VOR ZURšCK VOR ZURšCK VOR ZURšCK
heater spare tool tool pipe pipe

forward clamping clamping carriage carriage positioner positioner
jaws jaws forward backward forward backward
forward backward
29 31
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 30
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1A2
38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2
A72.0 A72.1 A72.2 A72.3 A72.4 A72.5 A72.6 A72.7 L+/AB72 M/AB72
1XA2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 11 20
L+L33 M-BAR
16.6
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
spare spare spare spare spare spare spare spare
30 32
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 31
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1A2
38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2
A73.0 A73.1 A73.2 A73.3 A73.4 A73.5 A73.6 A73.7 L+/AB73 M/AB73
1XA2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 10
L+L34 M-BAR
16.6
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
spare spare spare spare spare spare spare spare
31 35
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 32
RESERVE AUSGNGE MU919902
Frank Meyer
spare outputs + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1X3 23 24 PE
5X3 22 23 PE
28.9
L-5X3 5X3 22/- 23/-
28.9
L+5X3 5X3 22/+ 23/+
1X4 PE PE
1X5 PE
28.7
L-5X4 5X4 22/- 23/-
28.7
L+5X4 5X4 22/+ 23/+
5X4 PE
32 36
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 35
RESERVEKLEMMEN MU919902
Frank Meyer
spare terminals + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1A0
2
E32.0 18.1 ANLAGE EIN unit on
3
E32.1 18.2 NOT - AUS emergency stop
4
E32.2 18.5 SICHERUNGSšBERWACHUNG fuse monitoring
5
E32.3 18.6 HEIZUNG EIN heating on
6
E32.4 18.6
7
E32.5 18.7 ANWRMTEMPERATUR OBEN NICHT ERREICHT heating temperature up not reached
8
E32.6 18.8 ANWRMTEMPERATUR UNTEN NICHT ERREICHT heating temperature down not reached
9
E32.7 18.9
12
E33.0 19.1 SPANNBACKEN ZURšCK clamping jaws backward
13
E33.1 19.2 SPANNBACKEN VOR clamping jaws forward
14
E33.2 19.3 RESERVE spare
15
16
17
E33.5 19.6 OFEN ZURšCK heater backward
18
E33.6 19.7 OFEN VOR heater forward
19
2
A32.0 27.1 ANLAGE EIN unit on
3
A32.1 27.2 RESERVE spare
4
A32.2 27.3 HEIZUNG EIN heating on
5
6
7
8
9
A32.7 27.7 ST™RANZEIGE AUF SCHALTSCHRANK error display on machine
12
A33.0 28.1 ROHREINZUG EIN driving gear on
13
A33.1 28.2 KšHLEN MUFFE socket cooling
14
15
A33.3 28.4 TRANSPORT EINHEIT SENKEN coveying unit down
16
A33.4 28.5 TRANSPORT EINHEIT HEBEN coveying unit up
17
A33.5 28.6 MOTORQUERTRANSPORT EIN motor conveying unit on
18
A33.6 28.7 ROHR ABBLASEN pipe blowing off
19
35 37
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 36
SPS šBERSICHT 1A0 MU919902
Frank Meyer
PLC overview 1A0 + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1A1
2
E65.0 22.1 FREIGABE ACHSE 1 release axis 1
3
E65.1 22.2 FREIGABE ACHSE 2 release axis 2
4
E65.2 22.3 EXTRUSION 1 GESCHLOEEEN extrusion 1 closed
5
E65.3 22.4 EXTRUSION 1 OFFEN extrusion 1 open
6
E65.4 22.5 EXTRUSION 2 GESCHLOEEEN extrusion 2 closed
7
E65.5 22.6 EXTRUSION 2 OFFEN extrusion 2 open
8
E65.6 22.7 ROHR POSITIONIEREN VOR pipe positioning forward
9
E65.7 22.7 ROHR POSITIONIEREN ZURšCK pipe positioning backward
12
E64.0 21.1 WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN ZURšCK tool carriage backward
13
E64.1 21.2 WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN VOR tool carriage forward
14
15
16
17
18
19
2
A65.0 30.1 OFEN VOR heater forward
3
4
A65.2 30.3 SPANNBACKEN VOR clamping jaws forward
5
A65.3 30.4 SPANNBACKEN ZURšCK clamping jaws backward
6
A65.4 30.5 WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN VOR tool carriage forward
7
A65.5 30.6 WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN ZURšCK tool carriage backward
8
A65.6 30.7 ROHR POSITIONIERER VOR pipe positioner forward
9
A65.7 30.7 ROHR POSITIONIERER ZURšCK pipe positioner backward
12
A64.0 29.1 EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 ™FFNEN extrusions axis 1 opening
13
14
A64.2 29.3 EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 ™FFNEN extrusions axis 2 opening
15
16
A64.4 29.5 ANDRUCKROLLE ACHSE 1 VOR back up roller axis 1 forward
17
18
A64.6 29.7 ANDRUCKROLLE ACHSE 2 VOR back up roller axis 2 forward
19
36 38
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 37
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1A2
2
E73.0 24.1 QUERTRANSPORT ZURšCK coveying unit backward
3
E73.1 24.2 QUERTRANSPORT FREIGABE STATIONEN conveying unit release stations
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
E72.0 23.1 ANDRUCKROLLE ACHSE 1 ZURšCK back up roller axis 1 backward
13
E72.1 23.2 ANDRUCKROLLE ACHSE 2 ZURšCK back up roller axis 2 backward
14
E72.2 23.3 TEILKONTROLLE ACHSE 1 part control axis 1
15
E72.3 23.4 TEILKONTROLLE ACHSE 2 part control axis 2
16
E72.4 23.5 ROHREINZUG ACHSE 1 STOP driving gear axis 1 stop
17
E72.5 23.6 ROHREINZUG ACHSE 2 STOP driving gear axis 2 stop
18
19
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
37 40
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 38
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SCHALTSCHRANK
control cabinet
1X0
1A0 1X2 1X2 1X0 1X2 1X0 1X2 1X0 1X0
LIYCY NiCr/Ni NiCr/Ni OELFLEX NiCr/Ni OELFLEX NiCr/Ni OELFLEX OELFLEX

4x0,34mmý 2x1,5mmý 2x1,5mmý 3x2,5mmý 2x1,5mmý 3x2,5mmý 2x1,5mmý 4x1,5mmý 4x1,5mmý
6X06 6X06 6X07 6X07 6X01

Han6E Han6E Han6E Han6E Han6E
DISPLAY REGLER REGLER

PCS 095 controller controller
3S1N R2 R3 M
3A2 3A3 B2 B3 M6 M M5
3
~ ~
BEDIENTABLEAU OBERE HEIZUNG UNTERE HEIZUNG MUFFE KšHLEN ROHREINZUG

control panel upper heating lower heating socket cooling driving gear
38 41
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 40
INSTALLATIONSPLAN MU919902
Frank Meyer
installation drawing + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SCHALTSCHRANK
control cabinet
1X0
1X0 1X0 1X3 1X4 1X4 1X4 1X5
OELFLEX OELFLEX OELFLEX OELFLEX OELFLEX OELFLEX

7x1,5mmý 4x1,5mmý 25x1mmý 3x1mmý 3x1mmý 25x1mmý
6X02 6X03 6X04 6X05

Han6E HAN6E HAN24E 48-pol.
300x200x120 300x200x120
5X3 5X4
1x280-577 1x280-577
22x280-570 22x280-570
2x281-907 2x281-907
M7 2S31R 2S31V
M M8
M
3 3
Y7 ~ ~
QUERTRANSPORT H™HENVERSTELLUNG MUFFGERT H™HENVERSTELLUNG TRANSPORT VENTILE

conveying unit height adjustment socketing station height adjustment conveying valves
40 42
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 41
INSTALLATIONSPLAN MU919902
Frank Meyer
installation drawing + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
99_SZ1 99_PE1
SCHALTSCHRAK ZUBEH™R PE - BAR SCHALTSCHRANK
control cabinet accessories earth - BAR cotrol cabinet
99_PE2
PE - BAR Maschine
earth - BAR machine
99_MZ1 99_M-BAR
MASCHINEN ZUBEH™R M - BAR SCHALTSCHRANK
machine accessories M - BAR control cabinet
99_MZ2
MASCHINEN ZUBEH™R
machine accessories
41 43
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 42
STšCKLISTEN-INFORMATION MU919902
Frank Meyer
part list information + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A 32.0 E 32.0 A 65.0 E 65.0 A 73.0 E 73.0
1A1
1A2
1A0
A 32.7 E 32.7 A 65.7 E 65.7 A 73.7 E 73.7
A 33.0 E 33.0 A 64.0 E 64.0 A 72.0 E 72.0
A 33.7 E 33.7 A 64.7 E 64.7 A 72.7 E 72.7
42 44
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 43
BESCHRIFTUNG STEUERUNG MU919902
Frank Meyer
lettering control + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BEZ. SCHILD 8 MK001097
16.0
UPPER
HEATING
50.0 25.0
BEZ. SCHILD 9 MK001098

16.0
LOWER
HEATING
50.0 25.0
BESCHRIFTUNGSSTREIFEN 4 Stck. 50mm x 16mm

labelling field 4 piece. 50mm x 16mm
MATERIAL : GRAVO II SELBSTKLEBEND, WEISS

material : GRAVO II self-adherment, white
SCHRIFTART : SCHWARZ, GRAVIERT NACH ZEICHNUNG

font : black, engrave to drawing
43 45
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 44
BESCHRIFTUNG MU919902
Frank Meyer
lettering + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RITTAL AP2670
RITTAL AP - STANDPULT
1000 x 960 x 480
RITTAL AP - control board

1000 x 960 x 480
210
245
292
245
292
210
44 46
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 45
AUFBAUPLAN SCHALTSCHRANK MU919902
Frank Meyer
mountig control cabinet + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
280
RITTAL AP2670
1000 x 960 x 480

1000 x 960 x 480
1Q1
660
45 47
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 46
AUFBAUPLAN SCHALTSCHRANK MU919902
Frank Meyer
mounting control cabinet + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RITTAL AP2670
1000 x 960 x 480

1000 x 960 x 480
675
500
22,5
45
40
=
340
188
40
=
45
170
= =
204
46 48
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 47
AUFBAUPLAN BEDIENPULT MU919902
Frank Meyer
mounting control panel + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RITTAL AP2670
1000 x 960 x 480
410 910

780
1000 x 960 x 480 30x80 765
LC1-D09
LC1-D09
LC1-D09
LC1-D09
LC1-D09
LC1-D09
LC1-D09
1KL8R
1KL8V
MONTAGEPLATTE: 930 x 780
1KL5
1KL6
1KL7
1K1
1K4
695
mounting plate: 930 x 780
6ES5 482-8MA13
6ES5 482-8MA13
630
S5-95U
625 30x80
1A0
1A1
1A2
40x80
30x80
G3PA 420B
G3PA 420B
SNO 2002
1KL2
1KL3
1K1N
1E1
550
40x80 465
1,0-1,6A
0,53-1A
M-BAR
2,5-4A
1F6 0,5A
1QM5
1QM7
1QM8
375
1F1 25A
1F2 16A
1F3 16A
1F4 10A
1F11 6A
1F12 6A
1F13 6A
1F14 6A
1F10 3A
26924
26924
26924
26924
26924
26924
26924
40x80
300
40x80
250
1X3
1X4
1X5
1X2
1X1
190
40x80
PE-BAR
1G10
1X0
120
SITOP
6EP 434-2BA00 (10A)
75
30 60x80
0,0
0 575 930
47 49
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 48
AUFBAU MONTAGEPLATTE MU919902
Frank Meyer
mounting mounting plate + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RITTAL AP2670
1000 x 960 x 480
RITTAL AP - control board 3S1N
1000 x 960 x 480
UPPER
3A0
BEWEGUNGSANWAHLSCILD HEATING
SGGT
legend at operator's panel socket forming 3A2
KK 70/2A
Masch.-Nr. 176
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 LOWER
HEATING
3A3
F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16
1 2 3 CLR + HLP
4 5 6
7 8 9 0 - ENT
48 53
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 49
AUFBAUPLAN BEDIENPULT MU919902
Frank Meyer
mounting control panel + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BEWEGUNGSANWAHL R: ZURšCK V: VOR X: BELIEBIG F: TEILKONTROLLE FREI B: TEILKONTROLLE BELEGT H: SIGNAL VORHANDEN H: KEIN SIGNAL VORHANDEN
backward FORWARD any partcontrol off partcontrol on signal existing no signal existing
movement selection
ANWAHL GRUNDSTELLUNG ANWAHL GRUNDSTELLUNG

selection normal position selection normal position
NR. FUNKTION 01 02 03 04 05 NR. FUNKTION 01 02 03 04 05

no. function no. function
01 17
02 QUERTRANSPORT R R 18
conveying unit
03 SPANNBACKEN R R 19
clamping jaws
04 ROHRTRANSPORT KOMPLETT X X 20
pipe conveying complete
05 ROHR POSITIONIEREN R R 21
pipe positioning
06 OFEN R R 22
heater
07 ANWAERMZYKLUS R R 23
heating cycle
08 WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN R R 24
tool carriage
09 KšHLZYKLUS R R 25
cooling cycle
10 EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 R R 26
extrusion axis 1
11 EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 R R 27
extrusions axis 2
12 ANDRUCKROLLE 1 R R 28
back up roller 1
13 ANDRUCKROLLE 2 R R 29
back up roller 2
14 ROHREINZUG R R 30
driving gear
15 31 TRANSPORTEINHEIT HEBEN / SENKEN X X

conveying unit up / down
16 32
49 54
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 53
BEWEGUNGSANWAHL MU919902
Frank Meyer
selection of functions + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
movement selection


E FREIGABE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 F F
65.0 release extrusion axis1
E TEILKONTROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 F F
81.6 part control extrusion axis 1
E ROHREINZUG EXTRUSIONACHSE 1 STOP F F

81.6 driving gear extr. axis 1 stop
E FREIGABE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 F F
81.6 release extrusion axis1
E TEILKONTROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 F F
34.0 part control extrusion axis 1
E ROHREINZUG EXTRUSIONACHSE 1 STOP F F

81.3 driving gear extr. axis 1 stop
53 55
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 54
BEWEGUNGSANWAHL MU919902
Frank Meyer
selection of functions + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
movement selection


101 ANFFASEINHEIT EIN/AUS R R 111 STATUSANZEIGE X X

chamfering unit on/off status display
102 112 SCHRITTKETTENANZEIGE X X

step chain display
103 RESET STUECKZAEHLER X X 113 TAKTZEIT/ABTASTZEIT X X

reset part counter cycle time/scan time
104 LAMPENTEST X X 114 DATEN LESEN/SCHREIBEN X X

light check data read/write
105 FUNKTIONSTEST R R 115

operation test
106 116
107 117
108 118
109 119
110 120
54 56
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 55
SONDERFUNKTIONEN MU919902
Frank Meyer
special functions + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ZEITEN EINGEBEN
times setting
NR. ZEIT NR. ZEIT NR. ZEIT

no. time no. time no. time
00 16 32
01 HEIZZEIT 17 33
heazing time
02 KUEHLZEIT 18 34
cooling time
03 VERZ™GERUNGSZEIT ROHREINLAUF 19 35
delay time pipe inlet
04 20 36
05 21 37
06 22 38
07 23 39
08 24 40
09 25 41
10 26 42
11 27 43
12 28 44
13 29 45
14 30 46
15 31 47
55 57
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 56
ZEITEN EINGEBEN MU919902
Frank Meyer
times set + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PROGRAMM ANWAHL
program selection
NR. PROGRAMM NR. ZEIT NR. ZEIT

no. program no. time no. time
00 KEIN PROGRAMM ANGEWAEHLT 16 32

no program selected
01 KLEBEDORN 17 33
straight mandrel
02 DURCHLAUF OHNE MUFFEN 18 34

pipe conveying only
03 19 35
04 20 36
05 21 37
06 22 38
07 23 39
08 24 40
09 25 41
10 26 42
11 27 43
12 28 44
13 29 45
14 30 46
15 31 47
56 58
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 57
PROGRAMMANWAHL MU919902
Frank Meyer
program selection + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ST™RANZEIGE
error display
NUMMER
number
NUMMER
number
NUMMER
number
ST™RUNGSURSACHE ST™RUNGSURSACHE ST™RUNGSURSACHE
error reason error reason error reason
01 17 33
02 18 34 HEIZUNG AUS
heating off
03 SCHUTZORGAN 19 35 TEMPERATUR OBERER OFEN NICHT ERREICHT

protective device temperature upper heater not reached
04 NOT - AUS 20 36 TEMPERATUR UNTERER OFEN NICHT ERREICHT

emergency stop temperature lower heater not reached
05 ENDSCHALTER QUERTRANSPORT 21 38
limit switch conveying unit
06 22 40
07 ENDSCHALTER SPANNBACKEN 23 41 PROGRAMMANWAHL NICHT MOEGLICH

limit switch clamping jaws MASCHINE NICHT IN BETRIEBSART HAND
program selection not possible
08 24
machine not at at mode hand
09 ENDSCHALTER ROHR POSITIONIEREN 25 42 GRUNDSTELLUNG (F7) NICHT MOEGLICH

limit switch pipe positioning MASCHINE NICHT IN BETRIEBSART HAND
normal position (F7) not possible
10 ENDSCHALTER OFEN 26 BETRIEBSARTENANWAHL
machine not at mode hand
limit switch heater selection of operation mode
11 ENDSCHALTER WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN 27 43 AUTOMATIK START NICHT MOEGLICH

limit switch tool carriage MASCHINE NICHT IN BETRIEBSART AUTOMATIK
automatic start not possible
12 ENDSCHALTER EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 28
machine not at mode automatic
limit switch extrusion axis 1
13 ENDSCHALTER EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 29 44 AUTOMATIK START NICHT MOEGLICH

limit switch extrusion axis 2 MASCHINE NICHT IN GRUNDSTELLUNG
14 30
machine not at normal position
15 31 KEIN PROGRAMM ANGEWHLT 45 AUTOMATIK START NICHT MOEGLICH

no program selected STOERUNG VORHANDEN
16 32
error existing
57 59
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 58
ST™RUNGSANZEIGE MU919902
Frank Meyer
error display + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ST™RANZEIGE
error display
SCHRITTNUMMER
SCHRITTNUMMER
SCHRITTNUMMER
LAUFZEITFEHLER LAUFZEITFEHLER LAUFZEITFEHLER
step number
step number
step number
SCHRITTKETTE 00 SCHRITTKETTE 01 "EXTRUSIONSACHSE1" SCHRITTKETTE 02 "EXTRUSIONSACHSE2"
time out time out time out

step chain 00 step chain 01 "extrusion axis 1" step chain 02 "extrusion axis 2"
01 01 EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 ™FFNEN 01 EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 ™FFNEN

extrusion axis 1 opening extrusion axis 2 opening
02 02 TEILKONTROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 BELEGT 02 TEILKONTROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 BELEGT

part control extrusion axis 1 on part control extrusion axis 2 on
03 03 EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 SCHLIESSEN 03 EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 SCHLIESSEN

extrusion axis 1 closing extrusion axis 2 closing
04 04 ANDRUCKROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 VOR 04 ANDRUCKROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 VOR

backup roller extrusionaxis 1 forward backup roller extrusionaxis 2 forward
05 05 ROHREINZUG EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 05 ROHREINZUG EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2

driving gear extrusion axis 1 driving gear extrusion axis 2
06 06 ANDRUCKROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 ZURšCK 06 ANDRUCKROLLE EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 ZURšCK

backup roller extrusionaxis 1 backward backup roller extrusionaxis 2 backward
07 07 < FREIGABE AN TRANSPORT > 07 < FREIGABE AN TRANSPORT >

< release to conveying ? > < release to conveying ? >
08 08 08
09 09 09
10 10 10
11 11 11
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
58 60
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 59
Frank Meyer
error display + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ST™RANZEIGE
error display
SCHRITTNUMMER
SCHRITTNUMMER
SCHRITTNUMMER
step number
step number
step number
SCHRITTKETTE 03 "ROHR POSITIONIEREN" SCHRITTKETTE 04 "OFEN" SCHRITTKETTE 05 "MUFFSTATION"

step chain 03 "pipe positioning" step chain 04 "heater" step chain 05 "socketing station"
01 ROHR POSITIONIEREN VOR 01 OFEN VOR 01 SPANNBACKEN VOR

pipe positioning forward heater forward clamping jaws forward
02 < WARTEZEIT> 02 < HEIZZEIT > 02 WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN VOR

< waiting time> < heating time > tool carriage forward
03 ROHR POSITIONIEREN ZURšCK 03 OFEN ZURšCK 03 < KšHLZEIT >

pipe positioning backward heater backward < cooling time >
04 < FERTIGMELDUNG AN TRANSPORT > 04 < FERTIGMELDUNG AN TRANSPORT > 04 WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN ZURUECK
tool carriage backward
< signal operation completed to < signal operation completed to
05 SPANNBACKEN ZURUECK
conveying > conveying >
clamping jaws backward
05 05 06 < FERTIGMELDUNG AN TRANSPORT >
< signal operation completed to

06 06
conveying >
07 07 07
08 08 08
09 09 09
10 10 10
11 11 11
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
59 61
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 60
Frank Meyer
error display + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ST™RANZEIGE
error display
SCHRITTNUMMER
SCHRITTNUMMER
SCHRITTNUMMER
step number
step number
step number
SCHRITTKETTE 06 "ROHRTRANSPORT" SCHRITTKETTE 07 SCHRITTKETTE 08

step chain 06 "pipe transport" step chain 07 step chain 08
01 QUERTRANSPORT VOR (2S2V BEDECKT) 01 01

coveying unit forward (2S2V occupied)
02 < LEERSCHRITT > 02 02

< idle step >
03 < START SCHRITTKETTEN 03, 04, 05 > 03 03

< start step chain 03, 04, 05 >
04 QUERTRANSPORT VOR (2S2V BEDECKT) 04 04

coveying unit forward (2S2V occupied)
05 < FERTIGMELDUNG VON SCHRITTKETTEN 05 05

03, 04, 05 >
< signal operation completed from
06 06
step chain 03, 04, 05 >
06 < WARTEZEIT 0,1s > 07 07

< waiting time 0,1s >
07 08 08
08 09 09
09 10 10
10 11 11
11 12 12
12 13 13
13 14 14
14 15 15
60 62
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 61
Frank Meyer
error display + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BEWEGUNG BEDINGUNG BEWEGUNG BEDINGUNG

motion condition motion condition
QUERTRANSPORT VOR : EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 GESCHLOSSEN ROHR POSITIONIEREN VOR : QUERTRANSPORT ZURšCK

conveying unit forward : extrusion axis 1 closed pipe positioning forward : conveying unit backward
EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 GESCHLOSSEN ROHR POSITIONIEREN NICHT VORNE

extrusion axis 2 closed pipe positioning not forward
ANDRUCKROLLE 1 ZURšCK ROHR POSITIONIEREN ZURšCK : KEINE

back up roller 1 backward pipe positioning backward : no
ANDRUCKROLLE 2 ZURšCK OFEN VOR : QUERTRANSPORT ZURšCK

back up roller 2 backward heater forward : conveying unit backward
GRUNDSTELLUNG ROHR POSITIONIEREN ROHR ANWRMEN : OFEN VOR

normal position pipe positioning pipe heating : heater forward
GRUNDSTELLUNG OFEN WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN VOR : QUERTRANSPORT ZURšCK

normal position heater tool carriage forward : conveying unit backward
GRUNDSTELLUNG MUFFSTATION WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN ZURšCK : KEINE

normal position socketing station tool carriage backward : no
SPANNBACKEN ZURšCK START KšHLZEIT : KEINE

clamping jaws backward start cooling time : no
ANFASEINHEIT ZURšCK MUFFE KšHLEN : KEINE

chamfering unit backward socket cooling : no
ROHR ABBLASEN : KEINE

pipe blowing off : no
SPANNBACKEN VOR : QUERTRANSPORT ZURšCK

clamping jaws forward : conveying unit backward
SPANNBACKEN ZURšCK : KEINE

clamping jaws backward : no
61 63
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 62
VERRIEGELUNG HAND MU919902
Frank Meyer
locking hand + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 ™FFNEN : ANDRUCKROLLE 1 ZURšCK

extrusion axis 1 opening : back up roller 1 backward
TEILKONTR. EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 FREI

part control extrusion axis 1 off
ANDRUCKROLLE 1 VOR : ROHREINZUG ACHSE 1 STOP BELEGT

back up roller 1 forward : driving gear axis 1 stop on
EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 ™FFNEN : ANDRUCKROLLE 2 ZURšCK

extrusion axis 2 opening : back up roller 2 backward
TEILKONTR. EXTRUSIONSACHSE 2 FREI

part control extrusion axis 2 off
ANDRUCKROLLE 2 VOR : ROHREINZUG ACHSE 2 STOP BELEGT

back up roller 2 forward : driving gear axis 2 stop on
MOTOR ROHREINZUG : KEINE

motor driving gear : no
62 64
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 63
VERRIEGELUNG HAND MU919902
Frank Meyer
locking hand + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

HEBER VOR : QUERTRANSPORT ZURšCK

lifter forward : conveying unit backward
EINWERFER ZURšCK
tilting device backward
OFEN ZURšCK
heater backward
ODER
or
QUERTRANSPORT VOR
conveying unit forward
QUERTRANSPORT ZURšCK : HEBER ZURšCK

conveying unit backward : lifter backward
QUERTRANSPORT VOR : ROLLGANG MUFFACHSE VOR - FREI

conveying unit forward : roller socketing axis
forward - off
ROLLGANG MUFFACHSE LANGSAM - FREI

rollers socketing axis
slow - off
FREIGABE VON STAPELANLAGE

release from stacking machine
ROLLGANG MUFFACHSE ZURšCK : SPANNBACKEN ZURšCK

rollers socketing axis backward : clamping jaws backward
WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN ZURšCK
tool carriage backward
ROLLGANG MUFFACHSE VOR : SPANNBACKEN ZURšCK

rollers socketing axis forward : clamping jaws backward
63 70
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 64
VERRIEGELUNG TRANSPORT MU919902
Frank Meyer
locking conveying unit + 115
nderung
64
Klemmenplan WUPK035D 14.03.2000
W1x0/6X03
W1X0/6X02
W1X0/5X3
W1X0/6X01
W1X0/6X52
W1X0/6X51
Leistenbezeichnung
0
Datum
Kabelname
Kabelname
1X0
Name
Oelflex
Oelflex
Oelflex
Oelflex
Oelflex
Oelflex
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
nummer
Klemmen-
Brcken
Anschluá
Ger„te-
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
Seite/Pfad
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb. Frank Meyer
Datum
1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Frank Meyer
02.Nov.2004
4x1.5mmý
7x1.5mmý
4x1.5mmý
4x1.5mmý
3x2.5mmý
3x2.5mmý
Funktionstext
EINSPEISSUNG 3X400V N PE 50Hz

0/L1 1Q1 L1 9.0
power supply 3X400V N PE 50cps
Urspr.
=
0/L2 1Q1 L2 9.0
2
=
0/L3 1Q1 L3 9.0
=
0/N 9.1
=
0/PE PE-BAR PE-BAR 9.1
LEISTUNG HEIZUNG OBEN power

1 6X06 1 1 1KL2 2 10.1
heater up
Ers.f.
=
2 6X06 2 2 10.2
3
=
2/PE 10.2
LEISTUNG HEIZUNG UNTEN power

1 6X07 1 3 1KL3 2 10.3
heater down
=
2 6X07 2 4 10.5
=
4/PE 10.5
Ers.d.
Ident-Nr.
ROLLGANG ROHREINZUG rollers

1 6X01 1 5 1KL5 2 12.1
MUFFAUTOMAT KK 70/2A
driving gear
4
=
2 6X01 2 6 1KL5 4 12.1
=
3 6X01 3 7 1KL5 6 12.1
=
7/PE 12.1
509849
MUFFE KšHLEN socket cooling

1 5X3 24 8 1KL6 2 12.3
=
2 5X3 25 9 12.4
Benennung
terminal strip 1X0
KLEMMLEISTE 1X0
5
=
9/PE 12.4
QUERTRANSPORT conveying unit

1 6X02 1 10 1KL7 2 12.6
=
2 6X02 2 11 1KL7 4 12.6
=
3 6X02 3 12 1KL7 6 12.6
BREMSE QUERTRANSPORT brake

4 6X02 4 13 1KL7 14 12.8
conveying unit
6
=
5 6X02 5 14 M-BAR 12.8
=
14/PE 12.8
TRANSPORTEINHEIT HEBEN / SENKEN

1 6X03 1 15 1KL8R 2 13.5
conveying unit up / down
Zeichnungs-Nr.
MU919902
=
2 6X03 2 16 1KL8R 4 13.5
=
3 6X03 3 17 1KL8R 6 13.6
7
=
17/PE 13.6
=
18 13.8
=
19 13.8
=
20 13.8
=
20/PE 13.8
8
1K4 3 21 1F4 2 11.3

+
STECKDOSE 220V AC socket 220V AC

22 1E1 13.1
=
23 1M1 13.2
SCHALTSCHRANKLšFTER fan control

24 13.3
cabinet
REGLER HEIZUNG OBEN cotroller

25 3A2 10 11.4
heater up
von
Bl.
STECKDOSE 220V AC socket 220V AC

26 1E1 13.1
115
SCHALTSCHRANKLšFTER fan control

27 1M1 13.3
70
71
cabinet
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WUPK035D 14.03.2000
13.4
13.4
13.4
Seite/Pfad
Kabelname Kabeltyp
Anschluá
Ziel-
bezeichnung
Leistenbezeichnung
1X0
Ger„te-
Anschluá
Brcken
28
28/PE
28/PE
Klemmen-
nummer
Anschluá
Ziel-
bezeichnung
Kabelname Kabeltyp
fan control
Klemmenplan
SCHALTSCHRANKLšFTER
Funktionstext
cabinet
=
70 72
Bearb. Frank Meyer
509849
= 71
KLEMMLEISTE 1X0 MU919902
Frank Meyer
terminal strip 1X0 + 115
nderung
71
Leistenbezeichnung
0
Datum
Kabelname
Kabelname
1X1
Name
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
nummer
Klemmen-
Brcken
Anschluá
Ger„te-
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
Seite/Pfad
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb. Frank Meyer
Datum
1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Frank Meyer
02.Nov.2004
Funktionstext
NETZTEIL 400V/24V DC power pack

M-BAR 1 1G10 14.1
400V/24V DC
Urspr.
=
1/PE 14.1
2
=
1F11 2 2 14.2
STEUERUNG S5-95U CONTROL S5-95U

3 1A0 L+ 14.2
BEDIENTERMINAL PCS 095 operating

4 3A0 L+ 14.6
panel PCS 095
VERSORGUNG NOT-AUS supply emerg.

5 1K1N A1 14.7
stop
Ers.f.
šBERWACHUNG monitoring
1K1 57 6 14.8
3
ANLAGE EIN unit on
7 1XA0 1 14.9
VERSORGUNG ENDSCHALTER supply

1F12 2 8 15.1
limit switch
=
9 1K4 1 15.1
=
10 1X3 1 15.1
Ers.d.
Ident-Nr.
=
11 1X4 1 15.2
4
=
12 15.2
=
13 15.2
=
14 15.4
509849
=
15 15.4
=
16 15.4
Benennung
terminal strip 1X1
KLEMMLEISTE 1X1
5
=
17 15.4
VERSORGUNG SPS-EINGNGE supply

1F13 2 18 16.1
PLC inputs
=
19 1XE0 1 16.1
=
20 1XE1 1 16.1
=
21 1XE2 1 16.1
6
=
22 16.1
=
23 16.2
=
24 16.2
Zeichnungs-Nr.
MU919902
VERSORGUNG SPS-EINGNGE (PASSIV)

1F14 2 25 16.3
supply PLC inputs (passive)
=
26 16.4
7
=
27 16.4
VERSORGUNG SPS-EINGNGE (AKTIV)

1K1N 14 28 16.4
supply PLC inputs (active)
=
29 1KL7 13 16.5
=
30 1XA0 11 16.5
=
31 1XA1 11 16.5
8
=
32 1XA1 1 16.5
+
=
33 1XA2 11 16.6
=
34 1XA2 1 16.6
=
35 16.7
=
36 16.7
von
Bl.
9
115
72
73
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WUPK035D 14.03.2000
11.3
11.4
11.8
11.8
Seite/Pfad
Kabelname Kabeltyp
1
W1X0/A3 NiCr/Ni 2x1.5mmý

1
W1X0/A2 NiCr/Ni 2x1.5mmý

1
Anschluá
3A2
3A2
3A3
3A3
Ziel-
bezeichnung
Leistenbezeichnung
1X2
Ger„te-
Anschluá
Brcken
1
Klemmen-
nummer
3
Anschluá
6X06
6X06
6X07
6X07
Ziel-
bezeichnung
1
W1X0/6X06 NiCr/Ni 2x1.5mmý

1
W1X0/6X07 NiCr/Ni 2x1.5mmý

Kabelname Kabeltyp
controller
cotroller
Klemmenplan
REGLER HEIZUNG UNTEN

REGLER HEIZUNG OBEN
Funktionstext
heater down
heater up
=
72 74
Bearb. Frank Meyer
509849
= 73
KLEMMLEISTE 1X2 MU919902
Frank Meyer
terminal strip 1X2 + 115
nderung
73
W1X3/5X3
Leistenbezeichnung
0
Datum
Kabelname
Kabelname
1X3
Name
Oelflex
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
nummer
Klemmen-
Brcken
Anschluá
Ger„te-
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
Seite/Pfad
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb. Frank Meyer
Datum
1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Frank Meyer
02.Nov.2004
25x1mmý
Funktionstext
1 5X3 + 1 1X1 10 19.0

Urspr.
2 5X3 - 2 M-BAR 19.1
2
SPANNBACKEN ZURšCK clamping jaws
3 5X3 2 3 E33.0 1XE0 12 19.1
backward
SPANNBACKEN VOR clamping jaws

4 5X3 3 4 E33.1 1XE0 13 19.2
forward
RESERVE spare
5 5X3 4 5 E33.2 1XE0 14 19.3
=
6 5X3 5 6 E33.3 1XE0 15 19.4
Ers.f.
=
7 5X3 6 7 E33.4 1XE0 16 19.5
3
OFEN ZURšCK heater backward
8 5X3 7 8 E33.5 1XE0 17 19.6
OFEN VOR heater forward

9 5X3 8 9 E33.6 1XE0 18 19.7
RESERVE spare
10 5X3 9 10 E33.7 1XE0 19 19.7
WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN ZURšCK tool

11 5X3 10 11 E64.0 1XE1 12 21.1
Ers.d.
Ident-Nr.
carriage backward
WERKZEUGSCHLITTEN VOR tool

12 5X3 11 12 E64.1 1XE1 13 21.2
carriage forward
4
RESERVE spare
13 5X3 12 13 E64.2 1XE1 14 21.3
=
14 5X3 13 14 E64.3 1XE1 15 21.4
=
15 5X3 14 15 E64.4 1XE1 16 21.5
509849
=
16 5X3 15 16 E64.5 1XE1 17 21.6
=
17 5X3 16 17 E64.6 1XE1 18 21.7
Benennung
terminal strip 1X3
KLEMMLEISTE 1X3
5
=
18 5X3 17 18 E64.7 1XE1 19 21.8
ST™RANZEIGE AUF SCHALTSCHRANK

19 5X3 18 19 A32.7 1XA0 9 27.7
error display on machine
ROHR ABBLASEN pipe blowing off

20 5X3 19 20 28.7
RESERVE spare
21 5X3 20 21 A33.7 1XA0 19 28.7
=
22 5X3 21 22 28.8
23 5X3 22 23 35.1 6
24 5X3 23 24 35.1
24/PE 35.1
Zeichnungs-Nr.
MU919902
7
8
+
=
von
Bl.
9
115
74
75
nderung
74
W1X4/2S31V
W1X4/2S31R
W1X4/6X4
Leistenbezeichnung
0
Datum
Kabelname
Kabelname
1X4
Name
Oelflex
Oelflex
Oelflex
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
nummer
Klemmen-
Brcken
Anschluá
Ger„te-
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
Seite/Pfad
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb. Frank Meyer
Datum
1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Frank Meyer
02.Nov.2004
25x1mmý
3x1mmý
3x1mmý
Funktionstext
1 6X04 1 1 1X1 11 22.0

Urspr.
2 6X04 2 2 M-BAR 22.1
2
FREIGABE ACHSE 1 release axis 1
3 6X04 3 3 E65.0 1XE1 2 22.1

4 6X04 4 4 E65.1 1XE1 3 22.2
EXTRUSION 1 GESCHLOEEEN
5 6X04 5 5 E65.2 1XE1 4 22.3
extrusion 1 closed
EXTRUSION 1 OFFEN extrusion 1

6 6X04 6 6 E65.3 1XE1 5 22.4
open
Ers.f.
7 6X04 7 7 E65.4 1XE1 6 22.5
extrusion 2 closed
3
8 6X04 8 8 E65.5 1XE1 7 22.6
open
ROHR POSITIONIEREN VOR pipe

9 6X04 9 9 E65.6 1XE1 8 22.7
positioning forward
ROHR POSITIONIEREN ZURšCK pipe

10 6X04 10 10 E65.7 1XE1 9 22.7
positioning backward
ANDRUCKROLLE ACHSE 1 ZURšCK back

11 6X04 11 11 E72.0 1XE2 12 23.1
Ers.d.
Ident-Nr.
up roller axis 1 backward

12 6X04 12 12 E72.1 1XE2 13 23.2
4
TEILKONTROLLE ACHSE 1 part
13 6X04 13 13 E72.2 1XE2 14 23.3
control axis 1

14 6X04 14 14 E72.3 1XE2 15 23.4
control axis 2
ROHREINZUG ACHSE 1 STOP driving

15 6X04 15 15 E72.4 1XE2 16 23.5
gear axis 1 stop
509849

16 6X04 16 16 E72.5 1XE2 17 23.6
gear axis 2 stop
RESERVE spare
17 6X04 17 17 E72.6 1XE2 18 23.7
Benennung
terminal strip 1X4
KLEMMLEISTE 1X4
5
=
18 6X04 18 18 E72.7 1XE2 19 23.8
QUERTRANSPORT ZURšCK coveying

19 6X04 19 19 E73.0 1XE2 2 24.1
unit backward
QUERTRANSPORT FREIGABE STATIONEN

20 6X04 20 20 E73.1 1XE2 3 24.2
conveying unit release stations
RESERVE spare
21 6X04 21 21 E73.2 1XE2 4 24.3

22 6X04 22 22 A33.6 1XA0 18 28.7
6
NOT-AUS TASTER EXTRUSIONSACHSE
23 6X04 23 23 3S1N 22 17.2
emerg. stop extrusion axis
=
24 6X04 24 24 17.2
=
25 17.3
Zeichnungs-Nr.
MU919902
=
26 1K1N Y11 17.3
=
26/PE 17.3
7
NOT-AUS EXTERN emerg. stop

27 1K1N 33 17.8
extern
=
28 17.8
=
29 1K1N 34 17.9
=
30 17.9
TRANSPORT EINHEIT SENKEN coveying

1 2S31R 21 31 A33.3 1XA0 15 28.4
unit down
8
=
2 2S31R 22 32 1KL8V 21 28.4
+
TRANSPORT EINHEIT HEBEN coveying

1 2S31V 21 33 A33.4 1XA0 16 28.5
unit up
=
2 2S31V 22 34 1KL8R 21 28.5
PE 35.1
PE 35.1
von
Bl.
9
115
75
76
nderung
75
Leistenbezeichnung
0
Datum
Kabelname
Kabelname
1X5
Name
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
nummer
Klemmen-
Brcken
Anschluá
Ger„te-
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
Seite/Pfad
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb. Frank Meyer
Datum
1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Frank Meyer
02.Nov.2004
Funktionstext
EXTRUSIONSACHSE 1 ™FFNEN
6X05 C1 1 A64.0 1XA1 12 29.1
extrusions axis 1 opening
Urspr.
RESERVE spare
6X05 B1 2 A64.1 1XA1 13 29.2
2
6X05 C2 3 A64.2 1XA1 14 29.3
RESERVE spare
6X05 B2 4 A64.3 1XA1 15 29.4
ANDRUCKROLLE ACHSE 1 VOR back up

6X05 C3 5 A64.4 1XA1 16 29.5
roller axis 1 forward
RESERVE spare
6X05 B3 6 A64.5 1XA1 17 29.6
Ers.f.

6X05 C4 7 A64.6 1XA1 18 29.7
3
RESERVE spare
6X05 B4 8 A64.7 1XA1 19 29.7

6X05 C5 9 A65.0 1XA1 2 30.1
RESERVE spare
6X05 B5 10 A65.1 1XA1 3 30.2

6X05 C6 11 A65.2 1XA1 4 30.3
Ers.d.
Ident-Nr.
forward

6X05 B6 12 A65.3 1XA1 5 30.4
backward
4
6X05 C7 13 A65.4 1XA1 6 30.5
carriage forward

6X05 B7 14 A65.5 1XA1 7 30.6
carriage backward
ROHR POSITIONIERER VOR pipe

6X05 C8 15 A65.6 1XA1 8 30.7
positioner forward
509849
ROHR POSITIONIERER ZURšCK pipe

6X05 B8 16 A65.7 1XA1 9 30.7
positioner backward
M-BAR 17 6X05 A1 29.1
Benennung
terminal strip 1X5
KLEMMLEISTE 1X5
5
18 6X05 A2 29.3

19 6X05 A3 29.5

20 6X05 A4 29.7

21 6X05 A5 30.1

22 6X05 A6 30.3
forward
6
23 6X05 A7 30.5
carriage forward
ROHR POSITIONIERER VOR pipe

24 6X05 A8 30.7
positioner forward
PE 35.1
Zeichnungs-Nr.
MU919902
7
8
+
=
von
Bl.
9
115
76
77
nderung
76
W1X3/5X3
Leistenbezeichnung
0
Datum
Kabelname
Kabelname
5X3
Name
Oelflex
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
nummer
Klemmen-
Brcken
Anschluá
Ger„te-
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
Seite/Pfad
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb. Frank Meyer
Datum
1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Frank Meyer
02.Nov.2004
25x1mmý
Funktionstext
1/+ 1X3 1 1 19.0

Urspr.
1/- 1X3 2 2 19.1
2
2S3R sw 2 E33.0 1X3 3 3 19.1
backward
=
2S3R br 2/+ 19.1
=
2S3R bl 2/- 19.1

2S3V sw 3 E33.1 1X3 4 4 19.2
forward
Ers.f.
=
2S3V br 3/+ 19.2
3
=
2S3V bl 3/- 19.2
RESERVE spare
4 E33.2 1X3 5 5 19.3
=
4/+ 19.3
=
4/- 19.3
Ers.d.
Ident-Nr.
=
5 E33.3 1X3 6 6 19.4
4
=
5/+ 19.4
=
5/- 19.4
=
6 E33.4 1X3 7 7 19.5
509849
=
6/+ 19.5
=
6/- 19.5
Benennung
terminal strip 5X3
KLEMMLEISTE 5X3
5
OFEN ZURšCK heater backward
2S6R sw 7 E33.5 1X3 8 8 19.6
=
2S6R br 7/+ 19.6
=
2S6R bl 7/- 19.6

2S6V sw 8 E33.6 1X3 9 9 19.7
=
2S6V br 8/+ 19.7
6
=
2S6V bl 8/- 19.7
RESERVE spare
9 E33.7 1X3 10 10 19.7
=
9/+ 19.7
Zeichnungs-Nr.
MU919902
=
9/- 19.8

2S8R sw 10 E64.0 1X3 11 11 21.1
carriage backward
7
=
2S8R br 10/+ 21.1
=
2S8R bl 10/- 21.1

2S8V sw 11 E64.1 1X3 12 12 21.2
carriage forward
=
2S8V br 11/+ 21.2
=
2S8V bl 11/- 21.2
8
RESERVE spare
12 E64.2 1X3 13 13 21.3
+
=
12/+ 21.3
=
12/- 21.3
=
13 E64.3 1X3 14 14 21.4
=
13/+ 21.4
von
Bl.
=
13/- 21.4
115
=
14 1X3 15 21.5
77
E64.4 15
78
nderung
77
W5X3/M6
W5X3/3H1
W1X3/5X3
W1X0/5X3
Leistenbezeichnung
0
Datum
Kabelname
Kabelname
5X3
Name
Oelflex
Oelflex
Oelflex
Oelflex
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
nummer
Klemmen-
Brcken
Anschluá
Ger„te-
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
Seite/Pfad
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb. Frank Meyer
Datum
1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Frank Meyer
02.Nov.2004
4x1.5mmý
4x1.5mmý
25x1mmý
3x1mmý
Funktionstext
RESERVE spare
14/+ 21.5
Urspr.
=
14/- 21.5
2
=
15 E64.5 1X3 16 16 21.6
=
15/+ 21.6
=
15/- 21.6
=
16 E64.6 1X3 17 17 21.7
Ers.f.
=
16/+ 21.7
3
=
16/- 21.7
=
17 E64.7 1X3 18 18 21.8
=
17/+ 21.8
=
17/- 21.8
Ers.d.
Ident-Nr.

1 3H1 X1 18 A32.7 1X3 19 19 27.7
4
RESERVE spare
18/+ 27.7

2 3H1 X2 18/- 27.7

19 1X3 20 20 28.7
509849
RESERVE spare
19/+ 28.8
=
19/- 28.8
Benennung
terminal strip 5X3
KLEMMLEISTE 5X3
5
=
20 A33.7 1X3 21 21 28.7
=
20/+ 28.8
=
20/- 28.8
=
21 1X3 22 22 28.8
=
21/+ 28.9
6
=
21/- 28.9
22 1X3 23 23 35.1
22/+ 35.1
Zeichnungs-Nr.
MU919902
22/- 35.1
23 1X3 24 24 35.1
7
23/+ 35.1
23/- 35.1
23/PE 35.1
MUFFE KšHLEN socket cooling

1 M6 24 1X0 8 1 12.3
=
2 M6 25 1X0 9 2 12.4
8
=
25/PE 12.4
+
=
von
Bl.
9
115
78
79
nderung
78
W5X4/2S11TK
W5X4/2S10TK
W5X4/6X04
Leistenbezeichnung
0
Datum
Kabelname
Kabelname
5X4
Name
Oelflex
Oelflex
Oelflex
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
nummer
Klemmen-
Brcken
Anschluá
Ger„te-
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
Seite/Pfad
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb. Frank Meyer
Datum
1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Frank Meyer
02.Nov.2004
25x1mmý
3x1mmý
3x1mmý
Funktionstext
1/+ 6X04 1 1 22.0

Urspr.
1/- 6X04 2 2 22.1
2
1 2S10TK 14 2 E65.0 6X04 3 3 22.1
=
2 2S10TK 13 2/+ 22.1
=
2/- 22.1

1 2S11TK 14 3 E65.1 6X04 4 4 22.2
Ers.f.
=
2 2S11TK 13 3/+ 22.2
3
=
3/- 22.2
2S10R sw 4 E65.2 6X04 5 5 22.3
extrusion 1 closed
=
2S10R br 4/+ 22.3
=
2S10R bl 4/- 22.3
Ers.d.
Ident-Nr.

2S10V sw 5 E65.3 6X04 6 6 22.4
open
4
=
2S10V br 5/+ 22.4
=
2S10V bl 5/- 22.4
2S11R sw 6 E65.4 6X04 7 7 22.5
extrusion 2 closed
509849
=
2S11R br 6/+ 22.5
=
2S11R bl 6/- 22.5
Benennung
terminal strip 5X4
KLEMMLEISTE 5X4
5
2S11V sw 7 E65.5 6X04 8 8 22.6
open
=
2S11V br 7/+ 22.6
=
2S11V bl 7/- 22.6
ROHR POSITIONIEREN VOR pipe

2S5V sw 8 E65.6 6X04 9 9 22.7
positioning forward
=
2S5V br 8/+ 22.7
6
=
2S5V bl 8/- 22.7
ROHR POSITIONIEREN ZURšCK pipe

2S5R sw 9 E65.7 6X04 10 10 22.7
positioning backward
=
2S5R br 9/+ 22.7
Zeichnungs-Nr.
MU919902
=
2S5R bl 9/- 22.8

2S12R sw 10 E72.0 6X04 11 11 23.1
7
=
2S12R br 10/+ 23.1
=
2S12R bl 10/- 23.1

2S13R sw 11 E72.1 6X04 12 12 23.2
=
2S13R br 11/+ 23.2
=
2S13R bl 11/- 23.2
8

2S12TK sw 12 E72.2 6X04 13 13 23.3
control axis 1
+
=
2S12TK br 12/+ 23.3
=
2S12TK bl 12/- 23.3

2S13TK sw 13 E72.3 6X04 14 14 23.4
control axis 2
=
2S13TK br 13/+ 23.4
von
Bl.
=
2S13TK bl 13/- 23.4
115

2S14R1 sw 14 6X04 15 23.5
79
E72.4 15
80
gear axis 1 stop

nderung
79
W5X4/2S1N
W5X4/6X04
Leistenbezeichnung
0
Datum
Kabelname
Kabelname
5X4
Name
Oelflex
Oelflex
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
nummer
Klemmen-
Brcken
Anschluá
Ger„te-
bezeichnung
Ziel-
Anschluá
Seite/Pfad
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb. Frank Meyer
Datum
1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Frank Meyer
02.Nov.2004
25x1mmý
3x1mmý
Funktionstext

2S14R1 br 14/+ 23.5
gear axis 1 stop
Urspr.
=
2S14R1 bl 14/- 23.5
2
2S14R2 sw 15 E72.5 6X04 16 16 23.6
gear axis 2 stop
=
2S14R2 br 15/+ 23.6
=
2S14R2 bl 15/- 23.6
RESERVE spare
16 E72.6 6X04 17 17 23.7
Ers.f.
=
16/+ 23.7
3
=
16/- 23.7
=
17 E72.7 6X04 18 18 23.8
=
17/+ 23.8
=
17/- 23.8
Ers.d.
Ident-Nr.
QUERTRANSPORT ZURšCK coveying

2S2R sw 18 E73.0 6X04 19 19 24.1
unit backward
4
=
2S2R br 18/+ 24.1
=
2S2R bl 18/- 24.1
QUERTRANSPORT FREIGABE STATIONEN

2S2V sw 19 E73.1 6X04 20 20 24.2
conveying unit release stations
509849
=
2S2V br 19/+ 24.2
=
2S2V bl 19/- 24.2
Benennung
terminal strip 5X4
KLEMMLEISTE 5X4
5
RESERVE spare
20 E73.2 6X04 21 21 24.3
=
20/+ 24.3
=
20/- 24.3

2Y61 21 A33.6 6X04 22 22 28.7
MOTORQUERTRANSPORT EIN motor

21/+ 28.7
conveying unit on
6
2Y61 21/- 28.7
NOT-AUS TASTER EXTRUSIONSACHSE

1 2S1N 21 22 6X04 23 23 17.2
emerg. stop extrusion axis
22/+ 35.1
Zeichnungs-Nr.
MU919902
22/- 35.1
=
2 2S1N 22 23 6X04 24 24 17.2
7
23/+ 35.1
23/- 35.1
PE 35.1
8
+
=
von
Bl.
9
115
80
90
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ELEKTRO - STšCKLISTE
electrical part list
BMK MENGE BEZEICHNUNG ARTIKELNUMMER HERSTELLER BESTELLNUMMER SEITE
el. id. quantity name article no. manufacturer order no. page
KABEL OELFLEX 4x1,5mmý

W1X0/5X3 5 m cable OELFLEX 4x1,5mmý 1119304 Lapp MK000499 12.3
AUSGLEICHSLEITUNG NiCr/Ni 2x1,5mmý
W1X0/6X06 5 m compensating cable NiCr/Ni 2x1,5mmý 0162011 Lapp MK000505 11.3
W1X0/6X07 5 m compensating cable NiCr/Ni 2x1,5mmý 0162011 Lapp MK000505 11.8
W1X0/A2 2 m compensating cable NiCr/Ni 2x1,5mmý 0162011 Lapp MK000505 11.3
W1X0/A3 2 m compensating cable NiCr/Ni 2x1,5mmý 0162011 Lapp MK000505 11.8
Kabel OELFLEX 25x1mmý
W1X3/5X3 5 m cable OELFLEX 25x1mmý 1119225 Lapp MK000497 19.0
KABEL OELFLEX 3x1mmý
W1X4/2S31R 8 m cable OELFLEX 3x1mmý 1119203 Lapp MK000502 28.4
W1X4/2S31V 8 m cable OELFLEX 3x1mmý 1119203 Lapp MK000502 28.5
UNITRONIC LiYCY 4x0,34mmý
W1XPG/3XPCS 5 m data cable screened 4x0,34mmý 0034504 Lapp MK000509 14.5
W1x0/6X03 5 m cable OELFLEX 4x1,5mmý 1119304 Lapp MK000499 13.5
W5X3/3H1 5 m cable OELFLEX 3x1mmý 1119203 Lapp MK000502 27.7
W5X3/M6 5 m cable OELFLEX 4x1,5mmý 1119304 Lapp MK000499 12.3
W5X4/2S1N 10 m cable OELFLEX 3x1mmý 1119203 Lapp MK000502 17.2
W5X4/2S10TK 20 m cable OELFLEX 3x1mmý 1119203 Lapp MK000502 22.1
W5X4/2S11TK 20 m cable OELFLEX 3x1mmý 1119203 Lapp MK000502 22.2
80 91
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 90
ELEKTRO-STšCKLISTE MU919902
Frank Meyer
electrical part list + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

W6X02/M7-Y7 8 m cable OELFLEX 7x1,5mmý 1119307 Lapp MK001102 12.6
AUTOMATISIERUNGSGERT S5-95U
1A0 1 St central processing unit S5-95U 6ES5 095-8MA03 Siemens MK000471 14.2
SPEICHERMODUL 375 16K
1A0 1 St memory submodule 375 16K 6ES5 375-1LA21 Siemens MK000472 14.2
PUFFERBATTERIE FšR S5-95U/100U
1A0 1 St back up battery for S5-95U7100U 6ES5 980-0MA11 Siemens MK000473 14.2
FRONTSTECKER MIT EINZELADERN S5-95U
1A0 1 St front connector with single strand S5-95U 6EP5 200-2BD20 Siemens MK000474 14.2
BUSMODUL MIT SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS
1A0 1 St bus unit with scewed connection 6ES5 700-8MA11 Siemens MK000476 14.2
DIGITAL EIN/AUSGABE 16 EING. 16AUSG.
1A1 1 St digital input/output 16inputs 16outputs 6ES5 482-8MA13 Siemens MK000475 14.2
1A2 1 St digital input/output 16inputs 16outputs 6ES5 482-8MA13 Siemens MK000475 14.2
230V/16A STECKDOSE
1E1 1 St 230V/16A socket 350 8505 Seiwert MK000663 13.1
SICHERUNGSAUTOMAT 25A 3POLIG
1F1 1 St automatic circuit breaker 25A 3pin 23777 Schneider Electric MK001103 9.0
HILFSSCHALTER 1S + 1™
1F2 1 St auxiliary switch 1no + 1nc 26924 Schneider Electric MK000800 10.1
SICHERUNGSAUTOMAT 10A 1 POLIG
90 92
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 91
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SICHERUNGSAUTOMAT 0,5A 1POLIG
1F6 1 St automatic circuit breaker 0,5A 1pin 24067 Schneider Electric MK001101 12.3
GLEICHSTROMVERSORGUNG 400VAC/24VDC/10A
1G10 1 St AC / DC converter 400VAC/24VDC/10A 6EP1 434-2BA00 Siemens MK001105 14.1
LEISTUNGSSCHšTZ 3H + 1S + 1™
1K1 1 St power contactor 3h + 1no + 1nc LC1-D09 BD Schneider Electric MK000669 27.1
VERZ™GERTER HILFSSCHALTERBLOCK
1K1 1 St auxiliary switch block off delay LAD-R0 Schneider Electric MK000672 27.1
NOT / AUS RELAIS
1K1N 1 St emergency stop relay SNO2002-17/24V DC Schleicher MK000260 17.0
1K4 1 St power contactor 3h + 1no + 1nc LC1-D09 BD Schneider Electric MK000669 27.3
HALBLEITERRELAIS 75-400V AC/20A
1KL2 1 St solid state conductor 75-400V AC/20A G3PA-420B Omron MK000484 11.2
1KL3 1 St solid state conductor 75-400V AC/20A G3PA-420B Omron MK000484 11.7
1KL5 1 St power contactor 3h + 1no + 1nc LC1-D09 BD Schneider Electric MK000669 28.1
91 93
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 92
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1KL8R 1 St power contactor 3h + 1no + 1nc LC1-D09 BD Schneider Electric MK000669 28.4
1KL8V 1 St power contactor 3h + 1no + 1nc LC1-D09 BD Schneider Electric MK000669 28.5
FILTERLšFTER
1M1 1 St filter fan SK 3326. 100 Rittal MK000454 13.2
AUSTRITTSFILTER
1M1 1 St outlet filter SK 3326. 200 Rittal MK000455 13.2
ERSATZFILTERMATTE
1M1 2 St spare filter mat SK 3173. 100 Rittal MK000457 13.2
HAUPTSCHALTER 63A (fr Trmontage)
1Q1 1 St main switch 63A VCF-3 Schneider Electric MK001089 9.0
ABDECKUNG 3 POLIGFšR H. S. 63A + 80A
1Q1 2 St cover 3 pin for main switch 63A + 80A VZ-9 Schneider Electric MK001090 9.0
MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER 0,63-1,0A
1QM5 1 St motor protection device 0,63-1,0A GV2-ME05 Schneider Electric MK001100 12.1
HIFSSCHALTBLOCK 2S
1QM5 1 St auxiliary switch block 2no GV-AE20 Schneider Electric MK000667 12.1
SAMMELSCHIENE 3PHASIG FšR 3 SCHALTER
1QM5 1 St 3 phase bus bar for 3 switches GV2-G345 Schneider Electric MK001252 12.1
1QM7 1 St motor protection device 2,5-4,0A GV2-ME08 Schneider Electric MK001099 12.6
HIFSSCHALTBLOCK 2S
MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER 1-1,6A
1QM8 1 St motor protection device 1-1,6A GV2-ME06 Schneider Electric MK000809 13.5
HIFSSCHALTBLOCK 2S
2-LEITER DURCHGANGSKLEMME 16mmý GRAU
1X0 3 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 16mmý grey 283-901 Wago MK001091 9.0
ENDKLAMMER FšR TS35 10mm
1X0 2 St end clip for TS35 10mm 249-117 Wago MK000420 9.0
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
1X0 1 St label support 209-112 Wago MK000421 9.0
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
1X0 1 St protected tape 209-114 Wago MK000423 9.0
MULTIBESCHRIFTUNGSSYSTEM WMB L1,L2,L3,N,PE
1X0 1 St designation system WMB L1,L2,L3,N,PE 793-472 Wago MK000818 9.0
92 94
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 93
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MULTIBESCHRIFTUNGSSYSTEM WMB 1-50 WAAGERECHT

1X0 2 St designation system WMB 1-50 horizontal 209-566 Wago MK000430 9.0
ABSCHLUSSPLATTE GRAU 16mmý
1X0 2 St terminal board grey 16mmý 283-325 Wago MK000452 9.0
2-LEITER DURCHGANGSKLEMME 16mmý BLAU
1X0 1 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 16mmý blue 283-904 Wago MK000815 9.0
QUERBRšCKER ISOLIERT16-35 mmý
1X0 1 St cross bridges insulated 16-35mmý 283-402 Wago MK000811 9.0
2- LEITER DURCHGANGSKLEMME 16mmý GN/GE
1X0 1 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 16mmý gn/ye 283-907 Wago MK000451 9.0
2-LEITER DURCHGANGSKLEMME 4mmý GN/GE
QUERBRšCKER ISOLIERT 4mmý
1X0 6 St cross bridges insulated 4mmý 281-402 Wago MK000437 9.0
2-LEITER DURCHGANGSKLEMME 2,5mmý GRAU
1X1 36 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 2,5mmý grey 280-901 Wago MK000438 14.1
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
QUERBRšCKER ISOLIERT 2,5mmý
1X1 31 St cross bridges insulated 2,5mmý 280-402 Wago MK000441 14.1
2-LEITER DURCHGANGSKLEMME 2,5mmý GN/GE
1X1 1 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 2,5mmý gn/ye 280-907 Wago MK000439 14.1
ABSCHLUSSPLATTE GRAU 2,5mmý
1X1 6 St terminal board grey 2,5mmý 280-308 Wago MK000440 14.1
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
93 95
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 94
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ABSCHLUSSPLATTE GRAU 2,5mmý fr 3-Leiterkl.
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
94 96
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 95
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
STIFTLEISTE 15POLIG
1XPG 1 St plug connector 15pin 09670155604 Harting MK000566 14.3
SCHALENGEHUSE F. 15 POLIGEN STECKER
1XPG 1 St housing for 15 pin connector 09670150453 Harting MK000567 14.3
SCHIEBEVERRIEGELUNG F. 15 POLIGES GEHUSE
1XPG 1 St interlock for 15 pin housing 09670009915 Harting MK000568 14.3
NOT AUS TASTER GEKAPSELT
2S1N 1 St emergency stop button enclosed 3SB38 01-0DG Siemens MK000654 17.2
BEDIENKONSOLE PCS 095
3A0 1 St operator panel PCS 095 PCS 095.S Lauer MK000418 14.4
HANDBUCH FšR PCS 095 ENGLISCH
3A0 1 St instruction manual for PCS 095 english PCS 091 ENGL. Lauer MK000419 14.4
TEMPERATURREGLER 0-999øC
3A2 1 St temperature controller 0-999øC E5CS-R1KJX Omron MK000485 11.2
FRONTABDECKUNG
3A2 1 St front cover Y92A-48B Omron MK000486 11.2
BEZ. SCHILD UPPER HEATING
3A2 1 St legend plate UPPER HEATING BEZ.SCHILD 8 Jahn MK001097 11.2
95 97
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 96
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3A3 1 St temperature controller 0-999øC E5CS-R1KJX Omron MK000485 11.6
FRONTABDECKUNG
3A3 1 St front cover Y92A-48B Omron MK000486 11.6
BEZ. SCHILD LOWER HEATING
3A3 1 St legend plate LOWER HEATING BEZ.SCHILD 9 Jahn MK001098 11.6
ANSCHLUSSELEMENT MIT DECKEL
3H1 1 St assembly kit XVB-C21 Schneider Electric MK001597 27.7
LEUCHTELEMENT ROT
3H1 1 St collar. red XVB-C4B4 Schneider Electric MK001599 27.7
BEFESTIGUNGSSOCKEL
3H1 1 St mounting frame XVB-C11 Schneider Electric MK001595 27.7
VERLNGERUNGSROHR 400mm
3H1 1 St extension pipe 400mm XVB-C03 Schneider Electric MK001594 27.7
GLšHLAMPE 24V/6,5W BA15d
3H1 1 St filament lamp 24V/6,5W BA15d DL1-BA024 Schneider Electric MK000492 27.7
PILZDRUCKTASTER 40mm ROT
3S1N 1 St emergency stop button 40mm red 3SB32 01-1HA20 Siemens MK000655 17.1
STIFTLEISTE 25POLIG
3XPCS 1 St plug connector 25 pin 09670255604 Harting MK000569 14.5
GEHUSE MIT SCHRAUBVERRIEGELUNG 25 POLIG
3XPCS 1 St housing with locking (screw) 25 pin 09670250443 Harting MK000570 14.5
INITIATOR-EINSPEISEKLEMME MIT PE GRAU
5X3 1 St initiator supply terminal with PE grey 280-577 Wago MK000446 12.3
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
96 98
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 97
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

INITIATORKLEMME MIT PE GRAU
5X3 22 St initiator terminal with PE grey 280-570 Wago MK000447 12.3
KLEMMKASTEN 300X200X120
5X3 1 St terminalbox 300X200X120 KL 1503. 210 Rittal MK000466 41.3
5X4 22 St initiator terminal with PE grey 280-570 Wago MK000447 17.2
5X4 1 St initiator supply terminal with PE grey 280-577 Wago MK000446 17.2
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
5X4 1 St terminalbox 300X200X120 KL 1503. 210 Rittal MK000466 41.7
STIFTEINSATZ HAN6E
6X01 1 St plug connector HAN6E 09330062601 Harting MK001094 12.1
97 99
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 98
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BUCHSENEINSATZ HAN6E
6X01 1 St female insert HAN6E 09330062701 Harting MK001095 12.1
TšLLENGEHUSE HAN6B
6X01 1 St hood HAN6B 19300061540 Harting MK001092 12.1
SOCKELGEHUSE HAN6B
6X01 1 St housing HAN6B 19300061250 Harting MK001093 12.1
STIFTEINSATZ HAN6E
SOCKELGEHUSE HAN6B
TšLLENGEHUSE HAN6B
STIFTEINSATZ HAN6E
TšLLENGEHUSE HAN6B
SOCKELGEHUSE HAN6B
SOCKELGEHUSE HAN24B
TšLLENGEHUSE HAN24B
STIFTEINSATZ HAN24E
STIFTEINSATZ HAN6E
SOCKELGEHUSE HAN6B
TšLLENGEHUSE HAN6B
STIFTEINSATZ HAN6E
98 100
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 99
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SOCKELGEHUSE HAN6B
TšLLENGEHUSE HAN6B
99_M-BAR 2 St end clip for TS35 10mm 249-117 Wago MK000420 42.3
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
99_M-BAR 1 St label support 209-112 Wago MK000421 42.3
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
99_M-BAR 1 St protected tape 209-114 Wago MK000423 42.3
99_M-BAR 20 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 2,5mmý grey 280-641 Wago MK001601 42.3
99_M-BAR 1 St terminal board grey 2,5mmý 280-312 Wago MK001603 42.3
99_M-BAR 19 St cross bridges insulated 2,5mmý 280-402 Wago MK000441 42.3
KABELKANAL WDA 100/100 S
99_MZ1 1 St cable duct WDA 100/100 S WDA 100/100 S Pflitsch MK001104 42.1
KABELKANAL KD 20 100/100 S
99_MZ1 4 St cable duct KD 20 100/100 S KD 20 100/100 S Pflitsch MK000546 42.1
KABELKANAL LFS M6X10 VA
99_MZ1 90 St cable duct LFS M6X10 VA LFS M6X10 VA Pflitsch MK000542 42.1
KABELKANAL VI 100/100 S
99_MZ1 1 St cable duct VI 100/100 S VI 100/100 S Pflitsch MK000541 42.1
KABELKANAL TDF 100/100S
99_MZ1 1 St cable duct TDF 100/100S TDF 100/100S Pflitsch MK000540 42.1
KABELKANAL EKI 100/100 S
99_MZ1 2 St cable duct EKI 100/100 S EKI 100/100 S Pflitsch MK000918 42.1
KABELKANAL PIK K 30/30 S
99_MZ2 8 St cable duct PIK K 30/30 S PIK K 30/30 S Pflitsch MK001106 42.1
KABELKANAL PIK KS 30/30
99_MZ2 40 St cable duct PIK KS 30/30 PIK KS 30/30 Pflitsch MK001107 42.1
99_MZ2 1 St cable duct KD 20 75/75 S KD 20 75/75 S Pflitsch MK001066 42.1
KABELKANAL WDF 75/75 S
99_MZ2 1 St cable duct WDF 75/75 S WDF 75/75 S Pflitsch MK001063 42.1
99_PE1 2 St end clip for TS35 10mm 249-117 Wago MK000420 42.3
99 101
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 100
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
99_PE1 1 St label support 209-112 Wago MK000421 42.3
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
99_PE1 1 St protected tape 209-114 Wago MK000423 42.3
99_PE1 2 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 16mmý gn/ye 283-907 Wago MK000451 42.3
99_PE1 1 St terminal board grey 16mmý 283-325 Wago MK000452 42.3
99_PE2 2 St end clip for TS35 10mm 249-117 Wago MK000420 42.3
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
99_PE2 1 St label support 209-112 Wago MK000421 42.3
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
99_PE2 1 St protected tape 209-114 Wago MK000423 42.3
STANDPULT 1000x960x400/480mm
99_SZ1 1 St control board 1000x960x400/480mm AP 2670. 600 Rittal MK001096 42.1
SCHALTPLANTASCHE
99_SZ1 1 St document holder SZ 2512. 000 Rittal MK000465 42.1
100 110
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 101
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ELEKTRO - BESTELLSTšCKLISTE
MENGE BEZEICHNUNG ARTIKELNUMMER HERSTELLER BESTELLNUMMER

quantity name article no. manufacturer order no.
NOT / AUS RELAIS

1 St emergency stop relay SNO2002-17/24V DC Schleicher MK000260
BEDIENKONSOLE PCS 095
1 St operator panel PCS 095 PCS 095.S Lauer MK000418
HANDBUCH FšR PCS 095 ENGLISCH
1 St instruction manual for PCS 095 english PCS 091 ENGL. Lauer MK000419
22 St end clip for TS35 10mm 249-117 Wago MK000420
GRUPPENSCHILDTRGER
11 St label support 209-112 Wago MK000421
SCHUTZSTREIFEN
11 St protected tape 209-114 Wago MK000423
5 St designation system WMB 1-10 horizontal 209-502 Wago MK000424
22 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 4mmý grey 281-901 Wago MK000434
16 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 4mmý gn/ye 281-907 Wago MK000435
9 St terminal board grey 4mmý 281-328 Wago MK000436
QUERBRšCKER ISOLIERT 4mmý
6 St cross bridges insulated 4mmý 281-402 Wago MK000437
122 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 2,5mmý grey 280-901 Wago MK000438
6 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 2,5mmý gn/ye 280-907 Wago MK000439
16 St terminal board grey 2,5mmý 280-308 Wago MK000440
149 St cross bridges insulated 2,5mmý 280-402 Wago MK000441
101 111
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 110
ELEKTRO-BESTELLSTšCKLISTE MU919902
Frank Meyer
electrical order list + 115
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


2 St initiator supply terminal with PE grey 280-577 Wago MK000446
44 St initiator terminal with PE grey 280-570 Wago MK000447
FILTERLšFTER
1 St filter fan SK 3326. 100 Rittal MK000454
AUSTRITTSFILTER
1 St outlet filter SK 3326. 200 Rittal MK000455
ERSATZFILTERMATTE
2 St spare filter mat SK 3173. 100 Rittal MK000457
SCHALTPLANTASCHE
1 St document holder SZ 2512. 000 Rittal MK000465
2 St terminalbox 300X200X120 KL 1503. 210 Rittal MK000466
AUTOMATISIERUNGSGERT S5-95U
1 St central processing unit S5-95U 6ES5 095-8MA03 Siemens MK000471
SPEICHERMODUL 375 16K
1 St memory submodule 375 16K 6ES5 375-1LA21 Siemens MK000472
PUFFERBATTERIE FšR S5-95U/100U
1 St back up battery for S5-95U7100U 6ES5 980-0MA11 Siemens MK000473
3 St front connector with single strand S5-95U 6EP5 200-2BD20 Siemens MK000474
2 St digital input/output 16inputs 16outputs 6ES5 482-8MA13 Siemens MK000475
BUSMODUL MIT SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS
1 St bus unit with scewed connection 6ES5 700-8MA11 Siemens MK000476
2 St solid state conductor 75-400V AC/20A G3PA-420B Omron MK000484
2 St temperature controller 0-999øC E5CS-R1KJX Omron MK000485
FRONTABDECKUNG
2 St front cover Y92A-48B Omron MK000486
GLšHLAMPE 24V/6,5W BA15d
1 St filament lamp 24V/6,5W BA15d DL1-BA024 Schneider Electric MK000492
18 m cable OELFLEX 25x1mmý 1119225 Lapp MK000497
110 112
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 111
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


33 m cable OELFLEX 4x1,5mmý 1119304 Lapp MK000499
71 m cable OELFLEX 3x1mmý 1119203 Lapp MK000502
14 m compensating cable NiCr/Ni 2x1,5mmý 0162011 Lapp MK000505
UNITRONIC LiYCY 4x0,34mmý
5 m data cable screened 4x0,34mmý 0034504 Lapp MK000509
KABELKANAL TDF 100/100S
1 St cable duct TDF 100/100S TDF 100/100S Pflitsch MK000540
KABELKANAL VI 100/100 S
1 St cable duct VI 100/100 S VI 100/100 S Pflitsch MK000541
KABELKANAL LFS M6X10 VA
150 St cable duct LFS M6X10 VA LFS M6X10 VA Pflitsch MK000542
4 St cable duct KD 20 100/100 S KD 20 100/100 S Pflitsch MK000546
TšLLENGEHUSE HAN24B
1 St hood HAN24B 19300241521 Harting MK000553
SOCKELGEHUSE HAN24B
1 St housing HAN24B 19300241231 Harting MK000557
STIFTEINSATZ HAN24E
1 St plug connector HAN24E 09330242601 Harting MK000558
1 St female insert HAN24E 09330242701 Harting MK000559
STIFTLEISTE 15POLIG
1 St plug connector 15pin 09670155604 Harting MK000566
SCHALENGEHUSE F. 15 POLIGEN STECKER
1 St housing for 15 pin connector 09670150453 Harting MK000567
SCHIEBEVERRIEGELUNG F. 15 POLIGES GEHUSE
1 St interlock for 15 pin housing 09670009915 Harting MK000568
STIFTLEISTE 25POLIG
1 St plug connector 25 pin 09670255604 Harting MK000569
GEHUSE MIT SCHRAUBVERRIEGELUNG 25 POLIG
1 St housing with locking (screw) 25 pin 09670250443 Harting MK000570
NOT AUS TASTER GEKAPSELT
1 St emergency stop button enclosed 3SB38 01-0DG Siemens MK000654
PILZDRUCKTASTER 40mm ROT
1 St emergency stop button 40mm red 3SB32 01-1HA20 Siemens MK000655
111 113
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 112
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

230V/16A STECKDOSE
1 St 230V/16A socket 350 8505 Seiwert MK000663
HIFSSCHALTBLOCK 2S
3 St auxiliary switch block 2no GV-AE20 Schneider Electric MK000667
7 St power contactor 3h + 1no + 1nc LC1-D09 BD Schneider Electric MK000669
VERZ™GERTER HILFSSCHALTERBLOCK
1 St auxiliary switch block off delay LAD-R0 Schneider Electric MK000672
7 St auxiliary switch 1no + 1nc 26924 Schneider Electric MK000800
2 St automatic circuit breaker 16A 1pin 23738 Schneider Electric MK000801
SICHERUNGSAUTOMAT 10A 1 POLIG
MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER 1-1,6A
1 St motor protection device 1-1,6A GV2-ME06 Schneider Electric MK000809
QUERBRšCKER ISOLIERT16-35 mmý
1 St cross bridges insulated 16-35mmý 283-402 Wago MK000811
1 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 16mmý blue 283-904 Wago MK000815
8 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 4mmý blue 281-904 Wago MK000816
MULTIBESCHRIFTUNGSSYSTEM WMB L1,L2,L3,N,PE
1 St designation system WMB L1,L2,L3,N,PE 793-472 Wago MK000818
KABELKANAL EKI 100/100 S
2 St cable duct EKI 100/100 S EKI 100/100 S Pflitsch MK000918
KABELKANAL WDF 75/75 S
1 St cable duct WDF 75/75 S WDF 75/75 S Pflitsch MK001063
1 St cable duct KD 20 75/75 S KD 20 75/75 S Pflitsch MK001066
HAUPTSCHALTER 63A (fr Trmontage)
1 St main switch 63A VCF-3 Schneider Electric MK001089
ABDECKUNG 3 POLIGFšR H. S. 63A + 80A
2 St cover 3 pin for main switch 63A + 80A VZ-9 Schneider Electric MK001090
3 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 16mmý grey 283-901 Wago MK001091
112 114
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 113
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TšLLENGEHUSE HAN6B
5 St hood HAN6B 19300061540 Harting MK001092
SOCKELGEHUSE HAN6B
5 St housing HAN6B 19300061250 Harting MK001093
STIFTEINSATZ HAN6E
5 St plug connector HAN6E 09330062601 Harting MK001094
5 St female insert HAN6E 09330062701 Harting MK001095
STANDPULT 1000x960x400/480mm
1 St control board 1000x960x400/480mm AP 2670. 600 Rittal MK001096
BEZ. SCHILD UPPER HEATING
1 St legend plate UPPER HEATING BEZ.SCHILD 8 Jahn MK001097
BEZ. SCHILD LOWER HEATING
1 St legend plate LOWER HEATING BEZ.SCHILD 9 Jahn MK001098
1 St motor protection device 2,5-4,0A GV2-ME08 Schneider Electric MK001099
1 St motor protection device 0,63-1,0A GV2-ME05 Schneider Electric MK001100
SICHERUNGSAUTOMAT 0,5A 1POLIG
1 St automatic circuit breaker 0,5A 1pin 24067 Schneider Electric MK001101
KABELKANAL WDA 100/100 S
1 St cable duct WDA 100/100 S WDA 100/100 S Pflitsch MK001104
GLEICHSTROMVERSORGUNG 400VAC/24VDC/10A
1 St AC / DC converter 400VAC/24VDC/10A 6EP1 434-2BA00 Siemens MK001105
KABELKANAL PIK K 30/30 S
8 St cable duct PIK K 30/30 S PIK K 30/30 S Pflitsch MK001106
KABELKANAL PIK KS 30/30
40 St cable duct PIK KS 30/30 PIK KS 30/30 Pflitsch MK001107
SAMMELSCHIENE 3PHASIG FšR 3 SCHALTER
1 St 3 phase bus bar for 3 switches GV2-G345 Schneider Electric MK001252
VERLNGERUNGSROHR 400mm
1 St extension pipe 400mm XVB-C03 Schneider Electric MK001594
BEFESTIGUNGSSOCKEL
1 St mounting frame XVB-C11 Schneider Electric MK001595
ANSCHLUSSELEMENT MIT DECKEL
1 St assembly kit XVB-C21 Schneider Electric MK001597
113 115
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 114
Frank Meyer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LEUCHTELEMENT ROT
1 St collar. red XVB-C4B4 Schneider Electric MK001599
20 St 2-wire feed-through terminals 2,5mmý grey 280-641 Wago MK001601
2 St terminal board grey 2,5mmý 280-312 Wago MK001603
114
Bearb. Frank Meyer

509849
= 115
Frank Meyer
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
8.0 PNEUMATIKUNTERLAGEN 8.0 PNEUMATIC DOCUMENTATION

======================= ============================
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KOMMISSION: 509849 ANLAGE: socketing unit KK 70/2A

order number: machine:

LAND: Vietnam ZEICHNUNGSNR: MU919903

EINSPEISUNG: 6 BAR BESCHRIFTUNG: Englisch
power supply: lettering:
STEUERSPANNUNG: 24V DC
control voltage:
ANSCHLUSS: 1/2"
conection:
BEARBEITET: K.-H. Paulus GEPRšFT: K.-H. Paulus BAUJAHR: 2004 VERSION:

3
Bearb. K.-H. Paulus

509849
= 1
Deckblatt MU919903
Gepr. Automatic socketing unit von
K.-H. Paulus
KK 70/2A cover page + 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Pipe-blow Extrusion axis 1 Extrusion axis 2
í 40 x 50 Stroke í 40 x 50 Stroke
Air shower 2Z10.1
2Z11.1
G1/4 G1/4
G 1/2"
837-8
blue
DR2 DR4
DR1 DR3 DR5
2Y2 Y3
í8x1,25 í8x1,25 í8x1,25 í8x1,25
1 3 blue blue blue blue
837-8
blue
4 2 4 2
Y1 Y2
2Y10V 2Y11V
í10x1,5
blue 5 1 3 5 1 3
I1/A1
I1/P1
I1/B1
í10x1,5
blue
I1
.0
4.0
Ventilblock G 1/4"
8 fach
Pmax=10bar P1
WE1
G 1/2"
1 4
Bearb. K.-H. Paulus

509849
= 3
Pneumatik MU919903
K.-H. Paulus
KK 70/2A pneumatic + 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Back-up roller 1 Back-up roller 2 Heater above Heater below Clamping jaws
í 50 x 320 Stroke í 50 x 320 Stroke í 40 x 200 Stroke í 40 x 25 Stroke í 100 x 200 Stroke
2Z12.1 2Z13.1 2Z6.1 2Z6.2 2Z3.1
G1/4 G1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/2
DR1 DR3
DR5 DR7 DR9
DR2 DR4
DR6 DR8 DR10
í8x1,25 í8x1,25 í8x1,25 í8x1,25 í8x1,25 í8x1,25 í8x1,25 í8x1,25 í12x2 í12x2
blue blue blue blue blue blue blue blue blue blue
R1 DRV1 R2 DRV2
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6
2Y12V 2Y13V 2Y6V 2Y3V 2Y3R
5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3
I1/A1 I1/A1
I1/P1 I1/P1
I1/B1 I1/B1
I1
G 1/4
8 fach
P1 P1
3 5
Bearb. K.-H. Paulus

509849
= 4
Pneumatik MU919903
K.-H. Paulus
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tool carriage Pipe-positioning
í 100 x 125 Stroke í 50 x 320 Stroke
2Z8.1 2Z5.1
G 1/2 G 1/4
DR1 DR3
DR2 DR4
í12x2 í12x2 í8x1,25 í8x1,25

blue blue blue blue
4 2 4 2
Y7 Y8
2Y8V 2Y8R 2Y5V 2Y5R
5 1 3 5 1 3
I1/A1
I1/P1
I1/B1
I1
G 1/4
8 fach
P1
4 10
Bearb. K.-H. Paulus

509849
= 5
Pneumatik MU919903
K.-H. Paulus
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
INSTALLATIONS- STšCKLISTE
installation part list
WE1 1 WART. BOSCH.0821BJ0017 2.0
WE1 1 DMPFER BOSCH G1/2 2.0
DR1 1 DROSSEL.BOSCH.G 1/2.NG12 2.1
Y3 1 Y3/2 BOSCH.G 1/2.1SP. 2.1
Y3 1 EINZELAN.BOSCH.G1/2 2.1
Y3 1 V-STECKER.MURR.3124250 2.1
Y3 1 DMPFER BOSCH G1/2 2.1
Y3 1 DMPFER BOSCH G1/8 2.1
I1 1 INS08FACH.BOSCH.0821739 2.4
I1 1 STECKER.BOSCH.1824462 2.4
I1 2 DMPFER BOSCH G3/8 2.4
DR2 1 DROSSEL.BOSCH.G1/4.NG6 2.5
R1 1 RV FESTO.H-QS-8 3.1
DRV1 1 DRV BOSCH 1/4 3.1
R2 1 RV FESTO.H-QS-8 3.3
5 11
Bearb. K.-H. Paulus

509849
= 10
Installations-Stckliste MU919903
K.-H. Paulus
KK 70/2A installation part list + 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
INSTALLATIONS- STšCKLISTE
installation part list
DRV2 1 DRV BOSCH 1/4 3.3
10
Bearb. K.-H. Paulus

509849
= 11
MU919903
K.-H. Paulus
nderung Datum Name Norm Urspr. Ers.f. Ers.d. KK 70/2A + 11
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
9.0 9.0
======================= ============================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0 ERSATZTEILLISTEN 10.0 SPARE PART LISTS

ZEICHNUNGEN DRAWINGS
===================== =====================
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________
Muffautomat KK 70/2 A Blatt 1 von 1

Automatic Socketing unit KK 70/2 A Page 1 of 1
Maschine NR.177
________________________________________________________________________
Nr. Zeichnung / Typ Bezeichnung Description

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
1 T0-650.00.000 Muffgerät KK 70/2 Socket forming unit

MU914680 eigene Ersatzteilliste) KK 70/2(separate spare
parts list)
2 TÜ-740.00.100 Transportsystem Pipe conveying system

MU914300 (eigene Ersatzteilliste) (separate spare parts)
7 MU919902 Elektrik Electrics (for spare

(Ersatzteile siehe parts plse refer to
Stückliste) material list)
9 MU919903 Pneumatik Pneumatics (for spare

(Ersatzteile siehe parts plse refer to
Stückliste) material list)
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

Automatic Socketing unit KK 70/2 A Page 1 of 1
Muffgerät KK 70/2 A T0-650.00.000

Socketing unit KK 70/2 A MU914680
_______________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
4 T1-650.04.000 Spanneinheit eigene Ersatzteill.

Clamping unit own spare part list
5 T1-650.05.000 Heizstation eigene Eratzteill.

Heating station own spare part list
6 T0-405.03.000 Werkzeugstation eigene Eratzteill.

Socketing station own spare part list
7 T0-405.05.000 Rohrkühlung eigene Eratzteill.

Pipe cooling own spar
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________
Muffgerät KK 70/2 A Blatt 1 von 1

Socketing unit KK 70/2 A Page 1 of 1
Spanneinheit
Clamping unit T1-650.04.000
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
11 ID.NR.MK001531 Pneumatik-Zylinder pneumatic cylinder

MGPM 100 Hub 200
12 ID.NR.MK001532 Reed-Kontakte reed contact

D-Z73-M8(F)
13 ID.NR.MK000877 Steckverbindung plug connection

SWKM3-10/PVC
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

Heizeinheit
Heating unit T1-650.05.000
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
5 T3-405.04.521 Heizplatte heating element

MU914791
9 ID.NR.MK001534 Wellenunterstützung shaft support
10 ID.NR.MK001277 Pneumatikzylinder pneumatic cylinder

40-25 40-25
12 ID.NR.MK001276 Pneumatikzylinder pneumatic cylinder

40-200 40-200
13 ID.NR.MK001535 Linear-Set 1071-820-00 linear set
14 ID.NR.MK001314 Thermoelement 7212.1.NC thermocouple
17 ID.NR.MK000838 Reed-Kontakt reed contact

ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

Werkzeugstation
Socketing Station T0-405.03.000
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
11 ID.NR.MK001274 Pneumatik-Zyilinder pneumatic-cylinder

100x125 100x125
14 ID.NR.MK001273 Reed Kontakt reed contact
17 ID.NR.MK001413 Bundbuchse 20/26/32x20 bush

ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

Rohrkühlung
Pipe cooling T0-405.05.000
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
7 ID.NR.MK001538 Wärmetauscher WW 2000 heat exchanger

230V 50/60Hz
19 ID.Nr.MK001167 Wasserfilter water filter
20 ID.Nr.MK001169 Filterstrumpf easy change filter

ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

Automatic socketing unit KK 70/2 A Page 1 of 1
Transportsystem
Pipe conveying system TÜ-740.00.100
MU914300
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
1 ID.NR.MU917442 Antrieb Quertransport driving conveying unit

T0-740.01.000 (eigene Ersatzteilliste) (separate spare parts
list)
4 ID.NR.MU912932 ZSB.Kipprinne tilting mechanism

o.z. (eigene Ersatzteilliste) (separate spare parts
list)
5 ID.NR.MU914068 ZSB.Andrückrolle back-up roller

list)
6 ID.NR.MU911541 ZSB.Einzugsrolle inlet roll table

list)
7 ID.NR.MU912922 Positioniereinheit positioning unit

T0-651.07.000 (eigene Ersatzteilliste) (separate spare parts
list)
8 ID.NR.MU911546 ZSB.Bauteilabfrage part controls

list)
10 ID.NR.MU914279 Höhenverstellung central height

T0-740.10.000 adjustment
(eigene Ersatzteilliste) (separate spare parts
list)
12/10 ID.NR.MK001691 Positionsschalter position switch

NG1 HB-510
99 ID.NR.MU914745 Motorenliste part controls

list)
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________
Transportsystem KK 70/2 A Blatt 1 von 1

Pipe conveying system T0-740.01.000 Page 1 of 1
Antrieb Quertransport ID.NR.MU917442

driving conveying unit T0-740.01.000
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
10 ID.NR.MU916775 Kettenrad chain wheel

T3-651.01.010
13 ID.NR.MK001380 Stehlager PASE 40 bearing
14 ID.Nr.MK001379 Flanschlager PME 40 flanged bearing
15/6 ID.NR.MK001383 Spannrad chain tensioners
22 ID.NR.MK001373 Spannelement 40x52 locking element
25 ID.NR.MK001375 Buchse SOB-405550 bush
26 ID.NR.MK001376 Kette 12B-1 chain
27 ID.NR.MK001377 Verschlussglied 12B-1 connecting link
28 ID.NR.MK000066 Näherungsschalter 18 proximity switch

ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

Pipe conveying system TÜ-651.00.100 Page 1 of 1
ZSB.Kipprinne ID.NR.MU912932 o.Z.

tilting mechanism
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
10 ID.NR.MK001671 Pneumatik-Zyl.40x80 pneumatic cylinder
19 ID.NR.MK001677 DU-Buchse MB 2522 DU DU-bush
20 ID.NR.MK001678 DU-Buchse MB 1210 DU DU-bush

ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

ZSB.Andrückrolle ID.NR.MU914068 o.Z.

back-up roller
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
11 ID.NR.MK001682 Führungseinheit guide Unit

0 821 401 245

ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

ZSB.Einzugsrolle ID.NR.MU911541 o.Z.

inlet roll table
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
3 ID.NR.MU906235 Antriebsrolle driven roller

T3-406.00.025
11 ID.Nr.MK001685 Stehlager SG 16 204 pedestal bearing
12 ID.NR.MU912914 Kettenrad 1 chain wheel

T4-651.06.002
13 ID.NR.MU912915 Kettenrad 2 chain wheel

T4-651.06.003

ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________
Transpotsystem KK 70/2 A Blatt 1 von 1

Positioniereinheit ID.NR.MU912922
Positioning unit T0-651.07.000
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
6 ID.NR.MK001682 Führungseinheit guide Unit

0 821 401 245
19 ID.NR.MK000066 Näherungsschalter 18 proximity switch

ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

ZSB.Bauteilabfrage ID.NR.MU911546 o.Z.

part controll
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
10 ID.NR.MK000156 Lichttaster photo electric

WT 27-F410 proximity switch
12 ID.NR.MK001687 Grenztaster limit switch

ENM-SU1 AD
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

Höhenverstellung ID.NR.MU914279
height adjustment T0-740.10.000
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
5 ID.NR.MK001896 Spindel-Hubelement worm gear screw jacks
10 ID.NR.MU904528 Kettenrad chain wheel

ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
_______________________________________________________________________

Motorenliste 400V, 50Hz ID.NR.MU914745

Motor-list o.z.
________________________________________________________________________

No. Drawing / Type
________________________________________________________________________
EINZUGROLLE
Inlet roll table
-----------------
1 ID.NR.MK001669 Verstellgetriebemotor variable speed drives
RD11-1009-018-4 motor
QUERTRANSPORT
Conveying unit
----------------
2 ID.NR.MK001670 Flach-Getriebemotor shaft mouted geared
BF20-04/D08LA4 motor
HÖHENVERSTELLUNG
height adjustment
--------------------------
3 ID.NR.MK001886 Schneckengetriebemotor worm geared motor
BS06-13U/D07LA4

Dokumentation KK 70 2 A Mach NR 177

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Dokumentation KK 70 2 A Mach NR 177

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MASCHINEN UND

ANLAGENBAU GMBH & CO KG.

KUNDE Min Hung Plastics Co. Ltd.

MASCHINEN NR. 177

AUFTRAG NR. 509849

ROHRLÄNGEN 3000 - 6000 mm

1.0 SICHERHEITSHINWEISE 1.0 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1.1 VORBEMERKUNG 1.1 PREFACE

1.2 TECHNISCHE DATEN 1.2 TECHNICAL DATA

2.0 AUFBAU DER ANLAGE 2.0 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

2.1 AUFSTELLPLAN 2.1 LAY - OUT PLAN

2.2 ENERGIEANSCHLÜSSE 2.2 ENERGY CONNECTIONS

2.3 VORBEREITENDE ARBEITEN ZUR 2.3 STARTING UP OPERATIONS

3.0 ABLAUFDIAGRAMM 3.0 PROCESS CHART

4.0 SCHALT- UND REGELFUNKTIONEN 4.0 SWITCHING AND CONTROL

5.0 INBETRIEBNAHME 5.0 STARTING UP

5.1 AUSSERBETRIEBNAHME 5.1 STOPPING

5.2 EINRICHTEN 5.2 SETTING UP

5.3 AUTOMATIKABLAUF 5.3 AUTOMATIC PROCESS

5.4 UMRÜSTEN 5.4 RETOOLING

5.5 EINSTELLWERTE 5.5 SETTING VALUES

6.0 WARTUNG 6.0 MAINTENANCE

6.1 SCHMIERANWEISUNG 6.1 LUBRCATION DIRECTION

6.2 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG 6.2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

7.0 ELEKTROUNTERLAGEN 7.0 ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTATION

8.0 PNEUMATIKUNTERLAGEN 8.0 PNEUMATIC DOCUMENTATION

10.0 ERSATZTEILLISTEN 10.0 SPARE PART LISTS

1.0 SICHERHEITSHINWEISE 1.0 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

• dangers for the machine and other properties of the user

• dangers for the efficient operation of the machine may arise.

1.1 VORBEMERKUNG 1.1 PREFACE

Diese technische Dokumentation wird This Technical Documentation is

Für Schäden, die durch unsachgemäße Damage arising from improper

SGGT Maschinen-und Anlagenbau GmbH & Co. KG

Tel. +49 - 6824 – 308 - 0

Eine Ersatzteilanfrage oder Be- Spare part inquiries or -orders

Zuwiederhandlung verpflichtet zum Infringement will involve compen-

Änderungen und Ergänzungen, die dem We reserve the right to introduce

1.2 TECHNISCHE DATEN 1.2 TECHNICAL DATA

Rohrlängen: mm siehe Deckblatt

Druckluftanschluß: R" 1/2 NW 13

Luftdruck: bar 6 max 16

Luftverbrauch: NL/Muffe 150 bei 6 bar

Wasserzulauf: R" 1/2 NW 13

Wasserablauf: R" 1/2 NW 13

Wasserverbrauch: l/h 1400 max

Extrusionshöhe: mm siehe Deckblatt

Betriebsspannung: V/Hz siehe Deckblatt

Länge: mm siehe Aufstellplan

Breite: mm siehe Aufstellplan

Höhe: mm siehe Aufstellplan

2.0 AUFBAU DER ANLAGE 2.0 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

-Baugruppen nach Aufstellplan -Erection and assembling of units

-Anlagenteile beginnend mit Einlauf- -Align unit components exactly be-

-Anlagenteile nach Aufstellplan -Fix unit components to suit indi-

Die Beschaffenheit des Untergrundes The condition of the ground must

-Elektro-und Pneumatikanschlüsse -Connect electrical, pneumatic

2.1 AUFSTELLPLAN 2.1 LAY - OUT PLAN

2.2 ENERGIEANSCHLÜSSE 2.2 ENERGY CONNECTIONS

-Die Stromeinspeisung erfolgt über -Power supply of the machine is

2.3 VORBEREITENDE ARBEITEN ZUR 2.3 STARTING UP OPERATIONS

-Führungsbahnen, Kolbenstangen und -Clean and oil, if necessary,

-Alle übrigen Schmierstellen füllen. -All the other points of lubri-